rdelaage
/
postgresql
mirror of https://git.postgresql.org/git/postgresql.git
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity
postgresql/src/tools/pgindent/typedefs.list

Ignoring revisions in .git-blame-ignore-revs. Click here to bypass and see the normal blame view.

3937 lines
61 KiB
Plaintext
Raw Normal View History

Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ACL
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ACL_SIZE_INFORMATION
AFFIX
ASN1_INTEGER
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ASN1_OBJECT
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ASN1_OCTET_STRING
ASN1_STRING
AV
A_ArrayExpr
A_Const
A_Expr
A_Expr_Kind
A_Indices
A_Indirection
A_Star
AbsoluteTime
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
AccessMethodInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AccessPriv
Acl
AclItem
AclMaskHow
AclMode
AclResult
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
AcquireSampleRowsFunc
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ActionList
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ActiveSnapshotElt
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
AddForeignUpdateTargets_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AffixNode
AffixNodeData
AfterTriggerEvent
AfterTriggerEventChunk
AfterTriggerEventData
AfterTriggerEventList
AfterTriggerShared
AfterTriggerSharedData
AfterTriggersData
AfterTriggersQueryData
AfterTriggersTableData
AfterTriggersTransData
Agg
Update typedef list for upcoming pgindent run.
2011-06-09 20:01:49 +02:00
AggClauseCosts
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AggInfo
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
AggPath
Final pgindent + perltidy run for 9.6.
2016-08-15 19:42:51 +02:00
AggSplit
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AggState
AggStatePerAgg
AggStatePerGroup
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
AggStatePerHash
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
AggStatePerPhase
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
AggStatePerTrans
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AggStrategy
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
AggTransInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Aggref
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
AggregateInstrumentation
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
AlenState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Alias
AllocBlock
Improve performance of and reduce overheads of memory management Whenever we palloc a chunk of memory, traditionally, we prefix the returned pointer with a pointer to the memory context to which the chunk belongs. This is required so that we're able to easily determine the owning context when performing operations such as pfree() and repalloc(). For the AllocSet context, prior to this commit we additionally prefixed the pointer to the owning context with the size of the chunk. This made the header 16 bytes in size. This 16-byte overhead was required for all AllocSet allocations regardless of the allocation size. For the generation context, the problem was worse; in addition to the pointer to the owning context and chunk size, we also stored a pointer to the owning block so that we could track the number of freed chunks on a block. The slab allocator had a 16-byte chunk header. The changes being made here reduce the chunk header size down to just 8 bytes for all 3 of our memory context types. For small to medium sized allocations, this significantly increases the number of chunks that we can fit on a given block which results in much more efficient use of memory. Additionally, this commit completely changes the rule that pointers to palloc'd memory must be directly prefixed by a pointer to the owning memory context and instead, we now insist that they're directly prefixed by an 8-byte value where the least significant 3-bits are set to a value to indicate which type of memory context the pointer belongs to. Using those 3 bits as an index (known as MemoryContextMethodID) to a new array which stores the methods for each memory context type, we're now able to pass the pointer given to functions such as pfree() and repalloc() to the function specific to that context implementation to allow them to devise their own methods of finding the memory context which owns the given allocated chunk of memory. The reason we're able to reduce the chunk header down to just 8 bytes is because of the way we make use of the remaining 61 bits of the required 8-byte chunk header. Here we also implement a general-purpose MemoryChunk struct which makes use of those 61 remaining bits to allow the storage of a 30-bit value which the MemoryContext is free to use as it pleases, and also the number of bytes which must be subtracted from the chunk to get a reference to the block that the chunk is stored on (also 30 bits). The 1 additional remaining bit is to denote if the chunk is an "external" chunk or not. External here means that the chunk header does not store the 30-bit value or the block offset. The MemoryContext can use these external chunks at any time, but must use them if any of the two 30-bit fields are not large enough for the value(s) that need to be stored in them. When the chunk is marked as external, it is up to the MemoryContext to devise its own means to determine the block offset. Using 3-bits for the MemoryContextMethodID does mean we're limiting ourselves to only having a maximum of 8 different memory context types. We could reduce the bit space for the 30-bit value a little to make way for more than 3 bits, but it seems like it might be better to do that only if we ever need more than 8 context types. This would only be a problem if some future memory context type which does not use MemoryChunk really couldn't give up any of the 61 remaining bits in the chunk header. With this MemoryChunk, each of our 3 memory context types can quickly obtain a reference to the block any given chunk is located on. AllocSet is able to find the context to which the chunk is owned, by first obtaining a reference to the block by subtracting the block offset as is stored in the 'hdrmask' field and then referencing the block's 'aset' field. The Generation context uses the same method, but GenerationBlock did not have a field pointing back to the owning context, so one is added by this commit. In aset.c and generation.c, all allocations larger than allocChunkLimit are stored on dedicated blocks. When there's just a single chunk on a block like this, it's easy to find the block from the chunk, we just subtract the size of the block header from the chunk pointer. The size of these chunks is also known as we store the endptr on the block, so we can just subtract the pointer to the allocated memory from that. Because we can easily find the owning block and the size of the chunk for these dedicated blocks, we just always use external chunks for allocation sizes larger than allocChunkLimit. For generation.c, this sidesteps the problem of non-external MemoryChunks being unable to represent chunk sizes >= 1GB. This is less of a problem for aset.c as we store the free list index in the MemoryChunk's spare 30-bit field (the value of which will never be close to using all 30-bits). We can easily reverse engineer the chunk size from this when needed. Storing this saves AllocSetFree() from having to make a call to AllocSetFreeIndex() to determine which free list to put the newly freed chunk on. For the slab allocator, this commit adds a new restriction that slab chunks cannot be >= 1GB in size. If there happened to be any users of slab.c which used chunk sizes this large, they really should be using AllocSet instead. Here we also add a restriction that normal non-dedicated blocks cannot be 1GB or larger. It's now not possible to pass a 'maxBlockSize' >= 1GB during the creation of an AllocSet or Generation context. Allocations can still be larger than 1GB, it's just these will always be on dedicated blocks (which do not have the 1GB restriction). Author: Andres Freund, David Rowley Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpjauCRXcgcaL6+e3eqecEHoeRm9D-kcbuvBitgPnW=vw@mail.gmail.com
2022-08-29 07:15:00 +02:00
AllocFreeListLink
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AllocPointer
AllocSet
AllocSetContext
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
AllocSetFreeList
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AllocateDesc
AllocateDescKind
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
AlterCollationStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterDatabaseRefreshCollStmt
AlterDatabaseSetStmt
AlterDatabaseStmt
AlterDefaultPrivilegesStmt
AlterDomainStmt
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
AlterEnumStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterEventTrigStmt
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
AlterExtensionContentsStmt
AlterExtensionStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterFdwStmt
AlterForeignServerStmt
AlterFunctionStmt
Support ALTER THING .. DEPENDS ON EXTENSION This introduces a new dependency type which marks an object as depending on an extension, such that if the extension is dropped, the object automatically goes away; and also, if the database is dumped, the object is included in the dump output. Currently the grammar supports this for indexes, triggers, materialized views and functions only, although the utility code is generic so adding support for more object types is a matter of touching the parser rules only. Author: Abhijit Menon-Sen Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov, Álvaro Herrera Discussion: http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20160115062649.GA5068@toroid.org
2016-04-05 23:38:54 +02:00
AlterObjectDependsStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterObjectSchemaStmt
AlterOpFamilyStmt
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
AlterOperatorStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterOwnerStmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
AlterPolicyStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
AlterPublicationAction
AlterPublicationStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterRoleSetStmt
AlterRoleStmt
AlterSeqStmt
AlterStatsStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
AlterSubscriptionStmt
AlterSubscriptionType
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
AlterSystemStmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
AlterTSConfigType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterTSConfigurationStmt
AlterTSDictionaryStmt
AlterTableCmd
Rework 'MOVE ALL' to 'ALTER .. ALL IN TABLESPACE' As 'ALTER TABLESPACE .. MOVE ALL' really didn't change the tablespace but instead changed objects inside tablespaces, it made sense to rework the syntax and supporting functions to operate under the 'ALTER (TABLE|INDEX|MATERIALIZED VIEW)' syntax and to be in tablecmds.c. Pointed out by Alvaro, who also suggested the new syntax. Back-patch to 9.4.
2014-08-22 01:06:17 +02:00
AlterTableMoveAllStmt
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
AlterTableSpaceOptionsStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterTableStmt
AlterTableType
AlterTableUtilityContext
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
AlterTypeRecurseParams
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AlterTypeStmt
AlterUserMappingStmt
AlteredTableInfo
AlternativeSubPlan
AmcheckOptions
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
AnalyzeAttrComputeStatsFunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AnalyzeAttrFetchFunc
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
AnalyzeForeignTable_function
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
AnlExprData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AnlIndexData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
AnyArrayType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Append
AppendPath
AppendRelInfo
AppendState
Add logical change details to logical replication worker errcontext. Previously, on the subscriber, we set the error context callback for the tuple data conversion failures. This commit replaces the existing error context callback with a comprehensive one so that it shows not only the details of data conversion failures but also the details of logical change being applied by the apply worker or table sync worker. The additional information displayed will be the command, transaction id, and timestamp. The error context is added to an error only when applying a change but not while doing other work like receiving data etc. This will help users in diagnosing the problems that occur during logical replication. It also can be used for future work that allows skipping a particular transaction on the subscriber. Author: Masahiko Sawada Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Greg Nancarrow, Haiying Tang, Amit Kapila Tested-by: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDeScrsHhLyEPYqN3sydg6PxAPVBboK=30xJfUVihNZDA@mail.gmail.com
2021-08-27 05:00:23 +02:00
ApplyErrorCallbackArg
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ApplyExecutionData
Add support for streaming to built-in logical replication. To add support for streaming of in-progress transactions into the built-in logical replication, we need to do three things: * Extend the logical replication protocol, so identify in-progress transactions, and allow adding additional bits of information (e.g. XID of subtransactions). * Modify the output plugin (pgoutput) to implement the new stream API callbacks, by leveraging the extended replication protocol. * Modify the replication apply worker, to properly handle streamed in-progress transaction by spilling the data to disk and then replaying them on commit. We however must explicitly disable streaming replication during replication slot creation, even if the plugin supports it. We don't need to replicate the changes accumulated during this phase, and moreover we don't have a replication connection open so we don't have where to send the data anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Kuntal Ghosh and Ajin Cherian Tested-by: Neha Sharma, Mahendra Singh Thalor and Ajin Cherian Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/688b0b7f-2f6c-d827-c27b-216a8e3ea700@2ndquadrant.com
2020-09-03 04:24:07 +02:00
ApplySubXactData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Archive
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
ArchiveCheckConfiguredCB
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ArchiveEntryPtrType
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
ArchiveFileCB
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ArchiveFormat
ArchiveHandle
ArchiveMode
ArchiveModuleCallbacks
ArchiveModuleInit
Redesign archive modules A new callback named startup_cb, called shortly after a module is loaded, is added. This makes possible the initialization of any additional state data required by a module. This initial state data can be saved in a ArchiveModuleState, that is now passed down to all the callbacks that can be defined in a module. With this design, it is possible to have a per-module state, aimed at opening the door to the support of more than one archive module. The initialization of the callbacks is changed so as _PG_archive_module_init() does not anymore give in input a ArchiveModuleCallbacks that a module has to fill in with callback definitions. Instead, a module now needs to return a const ArchiveModuleCallbacks. All the structure and callback definitions of archive modules are moved into their own header, named archive_module.h, from pgarch.h. Command-based archiving follows the same line, with a new set of files named shell_archive.{c,h}. There are a few more items that are under discussion to improve the design of archive modules, like the fact that basic_archive calls sigsetjmp() by itself to define its own error handling flow. These will be adjusted later, the changes done here cover already a good portion of what has been discussed. Any modules created for v15 will need to be adjusted to this new design. Author: Nathan Bossart Reviewed-by: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230130194810.6fztfgbn32e7qarj@awork3.anarazel.de
2023-02-17 06:26:42 +01:00
ArchiveModuleState
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
ArchiveOpts
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ArchiveShutdownCB
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ArchiveStreamState
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ArchiverOutput
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ArchiverStage
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ArrayAnalyzeExtraData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ArrayBuildState
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ArrayBuildStateAny
ArrayBuildStateArr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ArrayCoerceExpr
ArrayConstIterState
ArrayExpr
ArrayExprIterState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ArrayIOData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ArrayIterator
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ArrayMapState
ArrayMetaState
ArrayParseState
Implementation of subscripting for jsonb Subscripting for jsonb does not support slices, does not have a limit for the number of subscripts, and an assignment expects a replace value to have jsonb type. There is also one functional difference between assignment via subscripting and assignment via jsonb_set(). When an original jsonb container is NULL, the subscripting replaces it with an empty jsonb and proceeds with an assignment. For the sake of code reuse, we rearrange some parts of jsonb functionality to allow the usage of the same functions for jsonb_set and assign subscripting operation. The original idea belongs to Oleg Bartunov. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcV8qvGcDXurwwgUbwACV86Th7G80pnubg42e-p9gsSf%3Dg%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcX3mdxGCgdThzuySwH-ApyHHM-G4oB1R0fn0j2hZqqkLQ%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcVDuGBv%3DM0FqBYX8DPebS3F_0KQ6OVFobGJPM507_SZ_w%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcVovR%2BXY4mfk-7oNk-rF91gH0PebnNfuUjuuDsyHjOcVA%40mail.gmail.com Author: Dmitry Dolgov Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Arthur Zakirov, Pavel Stehule, Dian M Fay Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan, Chapman Flack, Merlin Moncure, Peter Geoghegan Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Jim Nasby, Josh Berkus, Victor Wagner Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Robert Haas, Oleg Bartunov
2021-01-31 21:50:40 +01:00
ArraySubWorkspace
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ArrayType
AsyncQueueControl
AsyncQueueEntry
Defer flushing of SLRU files. Previously, we called fsync() after writing out individual pg_xact, pg_multixact and pg_commit_ts pages due to cache pressure, leading to regular I/O stalls in user backends and recovery. Collapse requests for the same file into a single system call as part of the next checkpoint, as we already did for relation files, using the infrastructure developed by commit 3eb77eba. This can cause a significant improvement to recovery performance, especially when it's otherwise CPU-bound. Hoist ProcessSyncRequests() up into CheckPointGuts() to make it clearer that it applies to all the SLRU mini-buffer-pools as well as the main buffer pool. Rearrange things so that data collected in CheckpointStats includes SLRU activity. Also remove the Shutdown{CLOG,CommitTS,SUBTRANS,MultiXact}() functions, because they were redundant after the shutdown checkpoint that immediately precedes them. (I'm not sure if they were ever needed, but they aren't now.) Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> (parts) Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <Jakub.Wartak@tomtom.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGLJ=84YT+NvhkEEDAuUtVHMfQ9i-N7k_o50JmQ6Rpj_OQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-09-25 08:49:43 +02:00
AsyncRequest
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AttInMetadata
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
AttStatsSlot
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AttoptCacheEntry
AttoptCacheKey
AttrDefInfo
AttrDefault
Refactor attribute mappings used in logical tuple conversion Tuple conversion support in tupconvert.c is able to convert rowtypes between two relations, inner and outer, which are logically equivalent but have a different ordering or even dropped columns (used mainly for inheritance tree and partitions). This makes use of attribute mappings, which are simple arrays made of AttrNumber elements with a length matching the number of attributes of the outer relation. The length of the attribute mapping has been treated as completely independent of the mapping itself until now, making it easy to pass down an incorrect mapping length. This commit refactors the code related to attribute mappings and moves it into an independent facility called attmap.c, extracted from tupconvert.c. This merges the attribute mapping with its length, avoiding to try to guess what is the length of a mapping to use as this is computed once, when the map is built. This will avoid mistakes like what has been fixed in dc816e58, which has used an incorrect mapping length by matching it with the number of attributes of an inner relation (a child partition) instead of an outer relation (a partitioned table). Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Amit Langote Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191121042556.GD153437@paquier.xyz
2019-12-18 08:23:02 +01:00
AttrMap
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
AttrMissing
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AttrNumber
AttributeOpts
AuthRequest
Refactor code related to pg_hba_file_rules() into new file hba.c is growing big, and more contents are planned for it. In order to prepare for this future work, this commit moves all the code related to the system function processing the contents of pg_hba.conf, pg_hba_file_rules() to a new file called hbafuncs.c, which will be used as the location for the SQL portion of the authentication file parsing. While on it, HbaToken, the structure holding a string token lexed from a configuration file related to authentication, is renamed to a more generic AuthToken, as it gets used not only for pg_hba.conf, but also for pg_ident.conf. TokenizedLine is now named TokenizedAuthLine. The size of hba.c is reduced by ~12%. Author: Julien Rouhaud Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
2022-03-24 04:42:30 +01:00
AuthToken
pg_prewarm: Add automatic prewarm feature. Periodically while the server is running, and at shutdown, write out a list of blocks in shared buffers. When the server reaches consistency -- unfortunatey, we can't do it before that point without breaking things -- reload those blocks into any still-unused shared buffers. Mithun Cy and Robert Haas, reviewed and tested by Beena Emerson, Amit Kapila, Jim Nasby, and Rafia Sabih. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD__OugubOs1Vy7kgF6xTjmEqTR4CrGAv8w+ZbaY_+MZeitukw@mail.gmail.com
2017-08-21 20:43:00 +02:00
AutoPrewarmSharedState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AutoVacOpts
AutoVacuumShmemStruct
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
AutoVacuumWorkItem
AutoVacuumWorkItemType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
AuxProcType
BF_ctx
BF_key
BF_word
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
BF_word_signed
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BIGNUM
BIO
BIO_METHOD
BITVECP
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
BMS_Comparison
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BMS_Membership
BN_CTX
BOOL
BOOLEAN
BOX
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
BTArrayKeyInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTBuildState
BTCycleId
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
BTDedupInterval
BTDedupState
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
BTDedupStateData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTDeletedPageData
BTIndexStat
BTInsertState
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
BTInsertStateData
Support parallel btree index builds. To make this work, tuplesort.c and logtape.c must also support parallelism, so this patch adds that infrastructure and then applies it to the particular case of parallel btree index builds. Testing to date shows that this can often be 2-3x faster than a serial index build. The model for deciding how many workers to use is fairly primitive at present, but it's better than not having the feature. We can refine it as we get more experience. Peter Geoghegan with some help from Rushabh Lathia. While Heikki Linnakangas is not an author of this patch, he wrote other patches without which this feature would not have been possible, and therefore the release notes should possibly credit him as an author of this feature. Reviewed by Claudio Freire, Heikki Linnakangas, Thomas Munro, Tels, Amit Kapila, me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM3SWZQKM=Pzc=CAHzRixKjp2eO5Q0Jg1SoFQqeXFQ647JiwqQ@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=AxWqDoVvGU7dq856S4r6sJAj6DBn7VMtigkB33N5eyg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-02 19:25:55 +01:00
BTLeader
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTMetaPageData
BTOneVacInfo
Refactor reloption handling for index AMs in-core This reworks the reloption parsing and build of a couple of index AMs by creating new structures for each index AM's options. This split was already done for BRIN, GIN and GiST (which actually has a fillfactor parameter), but not for hash, B-tree and SPGiST which relied on StdRdOptions due to an overlap with the default option set. This saves a couple of bytes for rd_options in each relcache entry with indexes making use of relation options, and brings more consistency between all index AMs. While on it, add a couple of AssertMacro() calls to make sure that utility macros to grab values of reloptions are used with the expected index AM. Author: Nikolay Shaplov Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier, Álvaro Herrera, Dent John Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4127670.gFlpRb6XCm@x200m
2019-11-25 01:40:53 +01:00
BTOptions
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
BTPS_State
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTPageOpaque
BTPageOpaqueData
BTPageStat
BTPageState
btree: Support parallel index scans. This isn't exposed to the optimizer or the executor yet; we'll add support for those things in a separate patch. But this puts the basic mechanism in place: several processes can attach to a parallel btree index scan, and each one will get a subset of the tuples that would have been produced by a non-parallel scan. Each index page becomes the responsibility of a single worker, which then returns all of the TIDs on that page. Rahila Syed, Amit Kapila, Robert Haas, reviewed and tested by Anastasia Lubennikova, Tushar Ahuja, and Haribabu Kommi.
2017-02-15 13:41:14 +01:00
BTParallelScanDesc
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
BTPendingFSM
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
BTScanInsert
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
BTScanInsertData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTScanOpaque
BTScanOpaqueData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
BTScanPos
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTScanPosData
BTScanPosItem
Support parallel btree index builds. To make this work, tuplesort.c and logtape.c must also support parallelism, so this patch adds that infrastructure and then applies it to the particular case of parallel btree index builds. Testing to date shows that this can often be 2-3x faster than a serial index build. The model for deciding how many workers to use is fairly primitive at present, but it's better than not having the feature. We can refine it as we get more experience. Peter Geoghegan with some help from Rushabh Lathia. While Heikki Linnakangas is not an author of this patch, he wrote other patches without which this feature would not have been possible, and therefore the release notes should possibly credit him as an author of this feature. Reviewed by Claudio Freire, Heikki Linnakangas, Thomas Munro, Tels, Amit Kapila, me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM3SWZQKM=Pzc=CAHzRixKjp2eO5Q0Jg1SoFQqeXFQ647JiwqQ@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=AxWqDoVvGU7dq856S4r6sJAj6DBn7VMtigkB33N5eyg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-02 19:25:55 +01:00
BTShared
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
BTSortArrayContext
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTSpool
BTStack
BTStackData
BTVacInfo
BTVacState
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
BTVacuumPosting
BTVacuumPostingData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BTWriteState
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
BUF_MEM
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BYTE
BY_HANDLE_FILE_INFORMATION
Backend
BackendId
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
BackendParameters
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
BackendState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
BackendType
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
BackgroundWorker
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
BackgroundWorkerArray
BackgroundWorkerHandle
BackgroundWorkerSlot
Refactor creation of backup_label and backup history files This change simplifies some of the logic related to the generation and creation of the backup_label and backup history files, which has become unnecessarily complicated since the removal of the exclusive backup mode in commit 39969e2. The code was previously generating the contents of these files as a string (start phase for the backup_label and stop phase for the backup history file), one problem being that the contents of the backup_label string were scanned to grab some of its internal contents at the stop phase. This commit changes the logic so as we store the data required to build these files in an intermediate structure named BackupState. The backup_label file and backup history file strings are generated when they are ready to be sent back to the client. Both files are now generated with the same code path. While on it, this commit renames some variables for clarity. Two new files named xlogbackup.{c,h} are introduced in this commit, to remove from xlog.c some of the logic around base backups. Note that more could be moved to this new set of files. Author: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXWwTDgJqCjdaPyfR7djwm6SrybGcrZyrvojzcsmt4FFw@mail.gmail.com
2022-09-26 04:15:47 +02:00
BackupState
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
Barrier
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
BaseBackupCmd
BaseBackupTargetHandle
BaseBackupTargetType
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
BeginDirectModify_function
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
BeginForeignInsert_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
BeginForeignModify_function
BeginForeignScan_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
BeginSampleScan_function
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
BernoulliSamplerData
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
BgWorkerStartTime
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
BgwHandleStatus
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
BinaryArithmFunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BindParamCbData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
BipartiteMatchState
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
BitString
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BitmapAnd
BitmapAndPath
BitmapAndState
BitmapHeapPath
BitmapHeapScan
BitmapHeapScanState
BitmapIndexScan
BitmapIndexScanState
BitmapOr
BitmapOrPath
BitmapOrState
Bitmapset
BlobInfo
Block
BlockId
BlockIdData
pg_prewarm: Add automatic prewarm feature. Periodically while the server is running, and at shutdown, write out a list of blocks in shared buffers. When the server reaches consistency -- unfortunatey, we can't do it before that point without breaking things -- reload those blocks into any still-unused shared buffers. Mithun Cy and Robert Haas, reviewed and tested by Beena Emerson, Amit Kapila, Jim Nasby, and Rafia Sabih. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD__OugubOs1Vy7kgF6xTjmEqTR4CrGAv8w+ZbaY_+MZeitukw@mail.gmail.com
2017-08-21 20:43:00 +02:00
BlockInfoRecord
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BlockNumber
BlockSampler
BlockSamplerData
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
BlockedProcData
BlockedProcsData
BloomBuildState
Add Bloom filter implementation. A Bloom filter is a space-efficient, probabilistic data structure that can be used to test set membership. Callers will sometimes incur false positives, but never false negatives. The rate of false positives is a function of the total number of elements and the amount of memory available for the Bloom filter. Two classic applications of Bloom filters are cache filtering, and data synchronization testing. Any user of Bloom filters must accept the possibility of false positives as a cost worth paying for the benefit in space efficiency. This commit adds a test harness extension module, test_bloomfilter. It can be used to get a sense of how the Bloom filter implementation performs under varying conditions. This is infrastructure for the upcoming "heapallindexed" amcheck patch, which verifies the consistency of a heap relation against one of its indexes. Author: Peter Geoghegan Reviewed-By: Andrey Borodin, Michael Paquier, Thomas Munro, Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzm5VmG7cu1N-H=nnS57wZThoSDQU+F5dewx3o84M+jY=g@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-01 02:49:41 +02:00
BloomFilter
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
BloomMetaPageData
BloomOpaque
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
BloomOptions
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
BloomPageOpaque
BloomPageOpaqueData
BloomScanOpaque
BloomScanOpaqueData
Yet again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run Because the run was delayed, the file had a chance to get out of date.
2016-06-09 18:15:33 +02:00
BloomSignatureWord
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
BloomState
BloomTuple
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
BoolAggState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BoolExpr
BoolExprType
BoolTestType
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
Boolean
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BooleanTest
BpChar
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
BrinBuildState
BrinDesc
BrinMemTuple
BrinMetaPageData
BrinOpaque
BrinOpcInfo
BrinOptions
BrinRevmap
BrinSpecialSpace
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
BrinStatsData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
BrinTuple
BrinValues
Add amcheck extension to contrib. This is the beginning of a collection of SQL-callable functions to verify the integrity of data files. For now it only contains code to verify B-Tree indexes. This adds two SQL-callable functions, validating B-Tree consistency to a varying degree. Check the, extensive, docs for details. The goal is to later extend the coverage of the module to further access methods, possibly including the heap. Once checks for additional access methods exist, we'll likely add some "dispatch" functions that cover multiple access methods. Author: Peter Geoghegan, editorialized by Andres Freund Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra, Thomas Munro, Anastasia Lubennikova, Robert Haas, Amit Langote Discussion: CAM3SWZQzLMhMwmBqjzK+pRKXrNUZ4w90wYMUWfkeV8mZ3Debvw@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-10 00:50:40 +01:00
BtreeCheckState
BtreeLevel
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Bucket
BufFile
Buffer
BufferAccessStrategy
BufferAccessStrategyType
BufferCachePagesContext
BufferCachePagesRec
BufferDesc
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
BufferDescPadded
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BufferHeapTupleTableSlot
BufferLookupEnt
BufferStrategyControl
BufferTag
BufferUsage
BuildAccumulator
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
BuiltinScript
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
BulkInsertState
BulkInsertStateData
CACHESIGN
CAC_state
Improve sys/catcache performance. The following are the individual improvements: 1) Avoidance of FunctionCallInfo based function calls, replaced by more efficient functions with a native C argument interface. 2) Don't extract columns from a cache entry's tuple whenever matching entries - instead store them as a Datum array. This also allows to get rid of having to build dummy tuples for negative & list entries, and of a hack for dealing with cstring vs. text weirdness. 3) Reorder members of catcache.h struct, so imortant entries are more likely to be on one cacheline. 4) Allowing the compiler to specialize critical SearchCatCache for a specific number of attributes allows to unroll loops and avoid other nkeys dependant initialization. 5) Only initializing the ScanKey when necessary, i.e. catcache misses, greatly reduces cache unnecessary cpu cache misses. 6) Split of the cache-miss case from the hash lookup, reducing stack allocations etc in the common case. 7) CatCTup and their corresponding heaptuple are allocated in one piece. This results in making cache lookups themselves roughly three times as fast - full-system benchmarks obviously improve less than that. I've also evaluated further techniques: - replace open coded hash with simplehash - the list walk right now shows up in profiles. Unfortunately it's not easy to do so safely as an entry's memory location can change at various times, which doesn't work well with the refcounting and cache invalidation. - Cacheline-aligning CatCTup entries - helps some with performance, but the win isn't big and the code for it is ugly, because the tuples have to be freed as well. - add more proper functions, rather than macros for SearchSysCacheCopyN etc., but right now they don't show up in profiles. The reason the macro wrapper for syscache.c/h have to be changed, rather than just catcache, is that doing otherwise would require exposing the SysCache array to the outside. That might be a good idea anyway, but it's for another day. Author: Andres Freund Reviewed-By: Robert Haas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170914061207.zxotvyopetm7lrrp@alap3.anarazel.de
2017-10-13 22:16:50 +02:00
CCFastEqualFN
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
CCHashFN
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
CEOUC_WAIT_MODE
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CFuncHashTabEntry
CHAR
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
CHECKPOINT
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CHKVAL
CIRCLE
CMPDAffix
CONTEXT
COP
CRITICAL_SECTION
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CRSSnapshotAction
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CState
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
CTECycleClause
Use FullTransactionId for the transaction stack. Provide GetTopFullTransactionId() and GetCurrentFullTransactionId(). The intended users of these interfaces are access methods that use xids for visibility checks but don't want to have to go back and "freeze" existing references some time later before the 32 bit xid counter wraps around. Use a new struct to serialize the transaction state for parallel query, because FullTransactionId doesn't fit into the previous serialization scheme very well. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1%2BMv%2Bmb0HFfWM9Srtc6MVe160WFurXV68iAFMcagRZ0dQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-27 22:59:19 +01:00
CTEMaterialize
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
CTESearchClause
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CV
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
CachedExpression
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CachedPlan
CachedPlanSource
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
CallContext
CallStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CancelRequestPacket
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
Cardinality
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CaseExpr
CaseTestExpr
CaseWhen
Cash
CastInfo
CatCList
CatCTup
CatCache
CatCacheHeader
CatalogId
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CatalogIdMapEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CatalogIndexState
ChangeVarNodes_context
CheckPoint
CheckPointStmt
CheckpointStatsData
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
CheckpointerRequest
CheckpointerShmemStruct
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Chromosome
Checkpoint sorting and balancing. Up to now checkpoints were written in the order they're in the BufferDescriptors. That's nearly random in a lot of cases, which performs badly on rotating media, but even on SSDs it causes slowdowns. To avoid that, sort checkpoints before writing them out. We currently sort by tablespace, relfilenode, fork and block number. One of the major reasons that previously wasn't done, was fear of imbalance between tablespaces. To address that balance writes between tablespaces. The other prime concern was that the relatively large allocation to sort the buffers in might fail, preventing checkpoints from happening. Thus pre-allocate the required memory in shared memory, at server startup. This particularly makes it more efficient to have checkpoint flushing enabled, because that'll often result in a lot of writes that can be coalesced into one flush. Discussion: alpine.DEB.2.10.1506011320000.28433@sto Author: Fabien Coelho and Andres Freund
2016-02-19 21:17:51 +01:00
CkptSortItem
CkptTsStatus
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ClientAuthentication_hook_type
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
ClientCertMode
ClientCertName
Allow parallel workers to retrieve some data from Port This commit moves authn_id into a new global structure called ClientConnectionInfo (mapping to a MyClientConnectionInfo for each backend) which is intended to hold all the client information that should be shared between the backend and any of its parallel workers, access for extensions and triggers being the primary use case. There is no need to push all the data of Port to the workers, and authn_id is quite a generic concept so using a separate structure provides the best balance (the name of the structure has been suggested by Robert Haas). While on it, and per discussion as this would be useful for a potential SYSTEM_USER that can be accessed through parallel workers, a second field is added for the authentication method, copied directly from Port. ClientConnectionInfo is serialized and restored using a new parallel key and a structure tracks the length of the authn_id, making the addition of more fields straight-forward. Author: Jacob Champion Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Stephen Frost, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Michael Paquier, Julien Rouhaud Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/793d990837ae5c06a558d58d62de9378ab525d83.camel@vmware.com
2022-08-24 05:57:13 +02:00
ClientConnectionInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ClientData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ClonePtrType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ClosePortalStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ClosePtrType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Clump
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
ClusterInfo
Refactor option handling of CLUSTER, REINDEX and VACUUM This continues the work done in b5913f6. All the options of those commands are changed to use hex values rather than enums to reduce the risk of compatibility bugs when introducing new options. Each option set is moved into a new structure that can be extended with more non-boolean options (this was already the case of VACUUM). The code of REINDEX is restructured so as manual REINDEX commands go through a single routine from utility.c, like VACUUM, to ease the allocation handling of option parameters when a command needs to go through multiple transactions. This can be used as a base infrastructure for future patches related to those commands, including reindex filtering and tablespace support. Per discussion with people mentioned below, as well as Alvaro Herrera and Peter Eisentraut. Author: Michael Paquier, Justin Pryzby Reviewed-by: Alexey Kondratov, Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/X8riynBLwxAD9uKk@paquier.xyz
2021-01-18 06:03:10 +01:00
ClusterParams
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ClusterStmt
CmdType
CoalesceExpr
CoerceParamHook
CoerceToDomain
CoerceToDomainValue
CoerceViaIO
CoercionContext
CoercionForm
CoercionPathType
Final pgindent + perltidy run for v10.
2017-08-14 23:29:33 +02:00
CollAliasData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
CollInfo
CollateClause
CollateExpr
CollateStrength
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
CollectedATSubcmd
CollectedCommand
CollectedCommandType
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
ColorTrgm
ColorTrgmInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ColumnCompareData
ColumnDef
ColumnIOData
ColumnRef
ColumnsHashData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CombinationGenerator
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ComboCidEntry
ComboCidEntryData
ComboCidKey
ComboCidKeyData
Command
CommandDest
CommandId
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
CommandTag
CommandTagBehavior
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CommentItem
CommentStmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
CommitTimestampEntry
CommitTimestampShared
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
CommonEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CommonTableExpr
CompareScalarsContext
Add expression compilation support to LLVM JIT provider. In addition to the interpretation of expressions (which back evaluation of WHERE clauses, target list projection, aggregates transition values etc) support compiling expressions to native code, using the infrastructure added in earlier commits. To avoid duplicating a lot of code, only support emitting code for cases that are likely to be performance critical. For expression steps that aren't deemed that, use the existing interpreter. The generated code isn't great - some architectural changes are required to address that. But this already yields a significant speedup for some analytics queries, particularly with WHERE clauses filtering a lot, or computing multiple aggregates. Author: Andres Freund Tested-By: Thomas Munro Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de Disable JITing for VALUES() nodes. VALUES() nodes are only ever executed once. This is primarily helpful for debugging, when forcing JITing even for cheap queries. Author: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-03-20 10:20:46 +01:00
CompiledExprState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CompositeIOData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CompositeTypeStmt
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
CompoundAffixFlag
Introduce a generic pg_dump compression API Switch pg_dump to use the Compression API, implemented by bf9aa490db. The CompressFileHandle replaces the cfp* family of functions with a struct of callbacks for accessing (compressed) files. This allows adding new compression methods simply by introducing a new struct instance with appropriate implementation of the callbacks. Archives compressed using custom compression methods store an identifier of the compression algorithm in their header instead of the compression level. The header version is bumped. Author: Georgios Kokolatos Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Rachel Heaton, Justin Pryzby, Tomas Vondra Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/faUNEOpts9vunEaLnmxmG-DldLSg_ql137OC3JYDmgrOMHm1RvvWY2IdBkv_CRxm5spCCb_OmKNk2T03TMm0fBEWveFF9wA1WizPuAgB7Ss%3D%40protonmail.com
2023-02-23 18:33:30 +01:00
CompressFileHandle
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CompressionLocation
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
CompressorState
snapshot scalability: Don't compute global horizons while building snapshots. To make GetSnapshotData() more scalable, it cannot not look at at each proc's xmin: While snapshot contents do not need to change whenever a read-only transaction commits or a snapshot is released, a proc's xmin is modified in those cases. The frequency of xmin modifications leads to, particularly on higher core count systems, many cache misses inside GetSnapshotData(), despite the data underlying a snapshot not changing. That is the most significant source of GetSnapshotData() scaling poorly on larger systems. Without accessing xmins, GetSnapshotData() cannot calculate accurate horizons / thresholds as it has so far. But we don't really have to: The horizons don't actually change that much between GetSnapshotData() calls. Nor are the horizons actually used every time a snapshot is built. The trick this commit introduces is to delay computation of accurate horizons until there use and using horizon boundaries to determine whether accurate horizons need to be computed. The use of RecentGlobal[Data]Xmin to decide whether a row version could be removed has been replaces with new GlobalVisTest* functions. These use two thresholds to determine whether a row can be pruned: 1) definitely_needed, indicating that rows deleted by XIDs >= definitely_needed are definitely still visible. 2) maybe_needed, indicating that rows deleted by XIDs < maybe_needed can definitely be removed GetSnapshotData() updates definitely_needed to be the xmin of the computed snapshot. When testing whether a row can be removed (with GlobalVisTestIsRemovableXid()) and the tested XID falls in between the two (i.e. XID >= maybe_needed && XID < definitely_needed) the boundaries can be recomputed to be more accurate. As it is not cheap to compute accurate boundaries, we limit the number of times that happens in short succession. As the boundaries used by GlobalVisTestIsRemovableXid() are never reset (with maybe_needed updated by GetSnapshotData()), it is likely that further test can benefit from an earlier computation of accurate horizons. To avoid regressing performance when old_snapshot_threshold is set (as that requires an accurate horizon to be computed), heap_page_prune_opt() doesn't unconditionally call TransactionIdLimitedForOldSnapshots() anymore. Both the computation of the limited horizon, and the triggering of errors (with SetOldSnapshotThresholdTimestamp()) is now only done when necessary to remove tuples. This commit just removes the accesses to PGXACT->xmin from GetSnapshotData(), but other members of PGXACT residing in the same cache line are accessed. Therefore this in itself does not result in a significant improvement. Subsequent commits will take advantage of the fact that GetSnapshotData() now does not need to access xmins anymore. Note: This contains a workaround in heap_page_prune_opt() to keep the snapshot_too_old tests working. While that workaround is ugly, the tests currently are not meaningful, and it seems best to address them separately. Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200301083601.ews6hz5dduc3w2se@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-08-13 01:03:49 +02:00
ComputeXidHorizonsResult
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
ConditionVariable
Replace buffer I/O locks with condition variables. 1. Backends waiting for buffer I/O are now interruptible. 2. If something goes wrong in a backend that is currently performing I/O, waiting backends no longer wake up until that backend reaches AbortBufferIO() and broadcasts on the CV. Previously, any waiters would wake up (because the I/O lock was automatically released) and then busy-loop until AbortBufferIO() cleared BM_IO_IN_PROGRESS. 3. LWLockMinimallyPadded is removed, as it would now be unused. Author: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> (earlier version, 2016) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ8nBFrjLuCTuqKN0pd2PQOwj9b_jnsiGFFMDvUxahj_A%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmoaj2aPti0yho7FeEf2qt-JgQPRWb0gci_o1Hfr=C56Xng@mail.gmail.com
2021-03-10 22:05:58 +01:00
ConditionVariableMinimallyPadded
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ConditionalStack
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ConfigData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ConfigVariable
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ConnCacheEntry
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
ConnCacheKey
Refactor and generalize the ParallelSlot machinery. Create a wrapper object, ParallelSlotArray, to encapsulate the number of slots and the slot array itself, plus some other relevant bits of information. This reduces the number of parameters we have to pass around all over the place. Allow for a ParallelSlotArray to contain slots connected to different databases within a single cluster. The current clients of this mechanism don't need this, but it is expected to be used by future patches. Defer connecting to databases until we actually need the connection for something. This is a slight behavior change for vacuumdb and reindexdb. If you specify a number of jobs that is larger than the number of objects, the extra connections will now not be used. But, on the other hand, if you specify a number of jobs that is so large that it's going to fail, the failure would previously have happened before any operations were actually started, and now it won't. Mark Dilger, reviewed by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/12ED3DA8-25F0-4B68-937D-D907CFBF08E7@enterprisedb.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/BA592F2D-F928-46FF-9516-2B827F067F57@enterprisedb.com
2021-03-11 19:17:46 +01:00
ConnParams
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ConnStatusType
ConnType
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
ConnectionStateEnum
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
ConsiderSplitContext
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Const
ConstrCheck
ConstrType
Constraint
ConstraintCategory
ConstraintInfo
ConstraintsSetStmt
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
ControlData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ControlFileData
ConvInfo
ConvProcInfo
ConversionLocation
ConvertRowtypeExpr
CookedConstraint
CopyDest
CopyFormatOptions
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
CopyFromState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CopyFromStateData
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
CopyHeaderChoice
tableam: Add table_multi_insert() and revamp/speed-up COPY FROM buffering. This adds table_multi_insert(), and converts COPY FROM, the only user of heap_multi_insert, to it. A simple conversion of COPY FROM use slots would have yielded a slowdown when inserting into a partitioned table for some workloads. Different partitions might need different slots (both slot types and their descriptors), and dropping / creating slots when there's constant partition changes is measurable. Thus instead revamp the COPY FROM buffering for partitioned tables to allow to buffer inserts into multiple tables, flushing only when limits are reached across all partition buffers. By only dropping slots when there've been inserts into too many different partitions, the aforementioned overhead is gone. By allowing larger batches, even when there are frequent partition changes, we actuall speed such cases up significantly. By using slots COPY of very narrow rows into unlogged / temporary might slow down very slightly (due to the indirect function calls). Author: David Rowley, Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20190327054923.t3epfuewxfqdt22e@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-04-05 00:47:19 +02:00
CopyInsertMethod
CopyMultiInsertBuffer
CopyMultiInsertInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CopySource
CopyStmt
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
CopyToState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CopyToStateData
Cost
CostSelector
Counters
Minor spelling fixes Fix a few spelling mistakes. Per bug report #8193 from Lajos Veres.
2013-06-01 16:18:59 +02:00
CoverExt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CoverPos
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
CreateAmStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateCastStmt
CreateConversionStmt
Add new block-by-block strategy for CREATE DATABASE. Because this strategy logs changes on a block-by-block basis, it avoids the need to checkpoint before and after the operation. However, because it logs each changed block individually, it might generate a lot of extra write-ahead logging if the template database is large. Therefore, the older strategy remains available via a new STRATEGY parameter to CREATE DATABASE, and a corresponding --strategy option to createdb. Somewhat controversially, this patch assembles the list of relations to be copied to the new database by reading the pg_class relation of the template database. Cross-database access like this isn't normally possible, but it can be made to work here because there can't be any connections to the database being copied, nor can it contain any in-doubt transactions. Even so, we have to use lower-level interfaces than normal, since the table scan and relcache interfaces will not work for a database to which we're not connected. The advantage of this approach is that we do not need to rely on the filesystem to determine what ought to be copied, but instead on PostgreSQL's own knowledge of the database structure. This avoids, for example, copying stray files that happen to be located in the source database directory. Dilip Kumar, with a fairly large number of cosmetic changes by me. Reviewed and tested by Ashutosh Sharma, Andres Freund, John Naylor, Greg Nancarrow, Neha Sharma. Additional feedback from Bruce Momjian, Heikki Linnakangas, Julien Rouhaud, Adam Brusselback, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Álvaro Herrera, and others. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYtcdxBjLh31DLxUXHxFVMPGzrU5_T=CYCvRyFHywSBUQ@mail.gmail.com
2022-03-29 17:31:43 +02:00
CreateDBRelInfo
CreateDBStrategy
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateDomainStmt
CreateEnumStmt
CreateEventTrigStmt
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
CreateExtensionStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateFdwStmt
CreateForeignServerStmt
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
CreateForeignTableStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateFunctionStmt
CreateOpClassItem
CreateOpClassStmt
CreateOpFamilyStmt
CreatePLangStmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
CreatePolicyStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CreatePublicationStmt
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
CreateRangeStmt
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
CreateReplicationSlotCmd
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateRoleStmt
CreateSchemaStmt
CreateSchemaStmtContext
CreateSeqStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CreateStatsStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateStmt
CreateStmtContext
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CreateSubscriptionStmt
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
CreateTableAsStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateTableSpaceStmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
CreateTransformStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CreateTrigStmt
CreateUserMappingStmt
CreatedbStmt
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
CredHandle
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CteItem
CteScan
CteScanState
CteState
CtlCommand
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
CtxtHandle
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CurrentOfExpr
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
CustomExecMethods
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
CustomOutPtrType
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
CustomPath
CustomScan
CustomScanMethods
CustomScanState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
CycleCtr
DBState
DCHCacheEntry
DEADLOCK_INFO
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
DECountItem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DH
DIR
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
DNSServiceErrorType
DNSServiceRef
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DR_copy
DR_intorel
DR_printtup
DR_sqlfunction
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
DR_transientrel
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
DSA
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DWORD
DataDumperPtr
DataPageDeleteStack
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
DatabaseInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DateADT
Datum
DatumTupleFields
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
DbInfo
DbInfoArr
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
DeClonePtrType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DeadLockState
DeallocateStmt
DeclareCursorStmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
DecodedBkpBlock
Add circular WAL decoding buffer, take II. Teach xlogreader.c to decode the WAL into a circular buffer. This will support optimizations based on looking ahead, to follow in a later commit. * XLogReadRecord() works as before, decoding records one by one, and allowing them to be examined via the traditional XLogRecGetXXX() macros and certain traditional members like xlogreader->ReadRecPtr. * An alternative new interface XLogReadAhead()/XLogNextRecord() is added that returns pointers to DecodedXLogRecord objects so that it's now possible to look ahead in the WAL stream while replaying. * In order to be able to use the new interface effectively while streaming data, support is added for the page_read() callback to respond to a new nonblocking mode with XLREAD_WOULDBLOCK instead of waiting for more data to arrive. No direct user of the new interface is included in this commit, though XLogReadRecord() uses it internally. Existing code doesn't need to change, except in a few places where it was accessing reader internals directly and now needs to go through accessor macros. Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier versions) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ4VJN8ttxScUFM8dOKX0BrBiboo5uz1cq=AovOddfHpA@mail.gmail.com
2022-03-18 05:45:04 +01:00
DecodedXLogRecord
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
DecodingOutputState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DefElem
DefElemAction
DefaultACLInfo
DefineStmt
DeleteStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
DependencyGenerator
DependencyGeneratorData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DependencyType
DestReceiver
DictISpell
DictInt
DictSimple
DictSnowball
DictSubState
DictSyn
DictThesaurus
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
DimensionInfo
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
DirectoryMethodData
DirectoryMethodFile
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
DisableTimeoutParams
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DiscardMode
DiscardStmt
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
DistanceValue
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DistinctExpr
DoStmt
DocRepresentation
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
DomainConstraintCache
DomainConstraintRef
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DomainConstraintState
DomainConstraintType
DomainIOData
DropBehavior
DropOwnedStmt
Introduce replication slots. Replication slots are a crash-safe data structure which can be created on either a master or a standby to prevent premature removal of write-ahead log segments needed by a standby, as well as (with hot_standby_feedback=on) pruning of tuples whose removal would cause replication conflicts. Slots have some advantages over existing techniques, as explained in the documentation. In a few places, we refer to the type of replication slots introduced by this patch as "physical" slots, because forthcoming patches for logical decoding will also have slots, but with somewhat different properties. Andres Freund and Robert Haas
2014-02-01 04:45:17 +01:00
DropReplicationSlotCmd
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DropRoleStmt
DropStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
DropSubscriptionStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DropTableSpaceStmt
DropUserMappingStmt
DropdbStmt
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
DumpComponents
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DumpId
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
DumpOptions
Yet again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run Because the run was delayed, the file had a chance to get out of date.
2016-06-09 18:15:33 +02:00
DumpSignalInformation
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
DumpableAcl
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
DumpableObject
DumpableObjectType
DumpableObjectWithAcl
DynamicFileList
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
DynamicZoneAbbrev
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
EC_KEY
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
EDGE
ENGINE
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
EOM_flatten_into_method
EOM_get_flat_size_method
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
EPQState
EPlan
EState
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
EStatus
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
EVP_CIPHER
EVP_CIPHER_CTX
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
EVP_MD
EVP_MD_CTX
EVP_PKEY
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
EachState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Edge
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
EditableObjectType
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
ElementsState
EnableTimeoutParams
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
EndBlobPtrType
EndBlobsPtrType
EndDataPtrType
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
EndDirectModify_function
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
EndForeignInsert_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
EndForeignModify_function
EndForeignScan_function
Split xlog.c into xlog.c and xlogrecovery.c. This moves the functions related to performing WAL recovery into the new xlogrecovery.c source file, leaving xlog.c responsible for maintaining the WAL buffers, coordinating the startup and switch from recovery to normal operations, and other miscellaneous stuff that have always been in xlog.c. Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Robert Haas Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/a31f27b4-a31d-f976-6217-2b03be646ffa%40iki.fi
2022-02-16 08:30:38 +01:00
EndOfWalRecoveryInfo
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
EndSampleScan_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
EnumItem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
EolType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
EphemeralNameRelationType
EphemeralNamedRelation
EphemeralNamedRelationData
EphemeralNamedRelationMetadata
EphemeralNamedRelationMetadataData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
EquivalenceClass
EquivalenceMember
ErrorContextCallback
ErrorData
Create infrastructure for "soft" error reporting. Postgres' standard mechanism for reporting errors (ereport() or elog()) is used for all sorts of error conditions. This means that throwing an exception via ereport(ERROR) requires an expensive transaction or subtransaction abort and cleanup, since the exception catcher dare not make many assumptions about what has gone wrong. There are situations where we would rather have a lighter-weight mechanism for dealing with errors that are known to be safe to recover from without a full transaction cleanup. This commit creates infrastructure to let us adapt existing error-reporting code for that purpose. See the included documentation changes for details. Follow-on commits will provide test code and usage examples. The near-term plan is to convert most if not all datatype input functions to report invalid input "softly". This will enable implementing some SQL/JSON features cleanly and without the cost of subtransactions, and it will also allow creating COPY options to deal with bad input without cancelling the whole COPY. This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul. Thanks also to Andres Freund for review. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
2022-12-09 15:58:38 +01:00
ErrorSaveContext
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
EstimateDSMForeignScan_function
EstimationInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
EventTriggerCacheEntry
EventTriggerCacheItem
EventTriggerCacheStateType
EventTriggerData
EventTriggerEvent
EventTriggerInfo
EventTriggerQueryState
ExceptionLabelMap
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExceptionMap
ExecAuxRowMark
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ExecEvalBoolSubroutine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ExecEvalJsonExprContext
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ExecEvalSubroutine
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExecForeignBatchInsert_function
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ExecForeignDelete_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExecForeignInsert_function
ExecForeignTruncate_function
ExecForeignUpdate_function
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ExecParallelEstimateContext
ExecParallelInitializeDSMContext
ExecPhraseData
Final pgindent + perltidy run for v10.
2017-08-14 23:29:33 +02:00
ExecProcNodeMtd
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ExecRowMark
ExecScanAccessMtd
ExecScanRecheckMtd
ExecStatus
ExecStatusType
ExecuteStmt
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExecutorCheckPerms_hook_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ExecutorEnd_hook_type
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExecutorFinish_hook_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ExecutorRun_hook_type
ExecutorStart_hook_type
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ExpandedArrayHeader
ExpandedObjectHeader
ExpandedObjectMethods
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
ExpandedRange
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ExpandedRecordFieldInfo
ExpandedRecordHeader
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ExplainDirectModify_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExplainForeignModify_function
ExplainForeignScan_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ExplainFormat
ExplainOneQuery_hook_type
ExplainState
ExplainStmt
ExplainWorkersState
Final pgindent run with old pg_bsd_indent (version 1.3). This is just to have a clean basis for comparison with the results of the new version (which will indeed end up reverting some of these changes...) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E1dAmxK-0006EE-1r@gemulon.postgresql.org Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/30527.1495162840@sss.pgh.pa.us
2017-06-21 20:09:24 +02:00
ExportedSnapshot
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Expr
ExprContext
ExprContextCallbackFunction
ExprContext_CB
ExprDoneCond
Faster expression evaluation and targetlist projection. This replaces the old, recursive tree-walk based evaluation, with non-recursive, opcode dispatch based, expression evaluation. Projection is now implemented as part of expression evaluation. This both leads to significant performance improvements, and makes future just-in-time compilation of expressions easier. The speed gains primarily come from: - non-recursive implementation reduces stack usage / overhead - simple sub-expressions are implemented with a single jump, without function calls - sharing some state between different sub-expressions - reduced amount of indirect/hard to predict memory accesses by laying out operation metadata sequentially; including the avoidance of nearly all of the previously used linked lists - more code has been moved to expression initialization, avoiding constant re-checks at evaluation time Future just-in-time compilation (JIT) has become easier, as demonstrated by released patches intended to be merged in a later release, for primarily two reasons: Firstly, due to a stricter split between expression initialization and evaluation, less code has to be handled by the JIT. Secondly, due to the non-recursive nature of the generated "instructions", less performance-critical code-paths can easily be shared between interpreted and compiled evaluation. The new framework allows for significant future optimizations. E.g.: - basic infrastructure for to later reduce the per executor-startup overhead of expression evaluation, by caching state in prepared statements. That'd be helpful in OLTPish scenarios where initialization overhead is measurable. - optimizing the generated "code". A number of proposals for potential work has already been made. - optimizing the interpreter. Similarly a number of proposals have been made here too. The move of logic into the expression initialization step leads to some backward-incompatible changes: - Function permission checks are now done during expression initialization, whereas previously they were done during execution. In edge cases this can lead to errors being raised that previously wouldn't have been, e.g. a NULL array being coerced to a different array type previously didn't perform checks. - The set of domain constraints to be checked, is now evaluated once during expression initialization, previously it was re-built every time a domain check was evaluated. For normal queries this doesn't change much, but e.g. for plpgsql functions, which caches ExprStates, the old set could stick around longer. The behavior around might still change. Author: Andres Freund, with significant changes by Tom Lane, changes by Heikki Linnakangas Reviewed-By: Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20161206034955.bh33paeralxbtluv@alap3.anarazel.de
2017-03-14 23:45:36 +01:00
ExprEvalOp
Expression evaluation based aggregate transition invocation. Previously aggregate transition and combination functions were invoked by special case code in nodeAgg.c, evaluating input and filters separately using the expression evaluation machinery. That turns out to not be great for performance for several reasons: - repeated expression evaluations have some cost - the transition functions invocations are poorly predicted, as commonly there are multiple aggregates in a query, resulting in the same call-stack invoking different functions. - filter and input computation had to be done separately - the special case code made it hard to implement JITing of the whole transition function invocation Address this by building one large expression that computes input, evaluates filters, and invokes transition functions. This leads to moderate speedups in queries bottlenecked by aggregate computations, and enables large speedups for similar cases once JITing is done. There's potential for further improvement: - It'd be nice if we could simplify the somewhat expensive aggstate->all_pergroups lookups. - right now there's still an advance_transition_function invocation in nodeAgg.c, leading to some code duplication. Author: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-01-09 22:25:38 +01:00
ExprEvalOpLookup
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExprEvalRowtypeCache
Faster expression evaluation and targetlist projection. This replaces the old, recursive tree-walk based evaluation, with non-recursive, opcode dispatch based, expression evaluation. Projection is now implemented as part of expression evaluation. This both leads to significant performance improvements, and makes future just-in-time compilation of expressions easier. The speed gains primarily come from: - non-recursive implementation reduces stack usage / overhead - simple sub-expressions are implemented with a single jump, without function calls - sharing some state between different sub-expressions - reduced amount of indirect/hard to predict memory accesses by laying out operation metadata sequentially; including the avoidance of nearly all of the previously used linked lists - more code has been moved to expression initialization, avoiding constant re-checks at evaluation time Future just-in-time compilation (JIT) has become easier, as demonstrated by released patches intended to be merged in a later release, for primarily two reasons: Firstly, due to a stricter split between expression initialization and evaluation, less code has to be handled by the JIT. Secondly, due to the non-recursive nature of the generated "instructions", less performance-critical code-paths can easily be shared between interpreted and compiled evaluation. The new framework allows for significant future optimizations. E.g.: - basic infrastructure for to later reduce the per executor-startup overhead of expression evaluation, by caching state in prepared statements. That'd be helpful in OLTPish scenarios where initialization overhead is measurable. - optimizing the generated "code". A number of proposals for potential work has already been made. - optimizing the interpreter. Similarly a number of proposals have been made here too. The move of logic into the expression initialization step leads to some backward-incompatible changes: - Function permission checks are now done during expression initialization, whereas previously they were done during execution. In edge cases this can lead to errors being raised that previously wouldn't have been, e.g. a NULL array being coerced to a different array type previously didn't perform checks. - The set of domain constraints to be checked, is now evaluated once during expression initialization, previously it was re-built every time a domain check was evaluated. For normal queries this doesn't change much, but e.g. for plpgsql functions, which caches ExprStates, the old set could stick around longer. The behavior around might still change. Author: Andres Freund, with significant changes by Tom Lane, changes by Heikki Linnakangas Reviewed-By: Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20161206034955.bh33paeralxbtluv@alap3.anarazel.de
2017-03-14 23:45:36 +01:00
ExprEvalStep
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ExprState
ExprStateEvalFunc
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ExtensibleNode
ExtensibleNodeEntry
ExtensibleNodeMethods
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ExtensionControlFile
ExtensionInfo
ExtensionVersionInfo
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
FDWCollateState
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
FD_SET
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FILE
FILETIME
FPI
FSMAddress
FSMPage
FSMPageData
FakeRelCacheEntry
FakeRelCacheEntryData
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
FastPathStrongRelationLockData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FdwInfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
FdwRoutine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FetchDirection
FetchStmt
FieldSelect
FieldStore
File
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
FileFdwExecutionState
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
FileFdwPlanState
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
FileNameMap
Refactor sharedfileset.c to separate out fileset implementation. Move fileset related implementation out of sharedfileset.c to allow its usage by backends that don't want to share filesets among different processes. After this split, fileset infrastructure is used by both sharedfileset.c and worker.c for the named temporary files that survive across transactions. Author: Dilip Kumar, based on suggestion by Andres Freund Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Masahiko Sawada, Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E1mCC6U-0004Ik-Fs@gemulon.postgresql.org
2021-08-30 05:15:35 +02:00
FileSet
Refactor the fsync queue for wider use. Previously, md.c and checkpointer.c were tightly integrated so that fsync calls could be handed off and processed in the background. Introduce a system of callbacks and file tags, so that other modules can hand off fsync work in the same way. For now only md.c uses the new interface, but other users are being proposed. Since there may be use cases that are not strictly SMGR implementations, use a new function table for sync handlers rather than extending the traditional SMGR one. Instead of using a bitmapset of segment numbers for each RelFileNode in the checkpointer's hash table, make the segment number part of the key. This requires sending explicit "forget" requests for every segment individually when relations are dropped, but suits the file layout schemes of proposed future users better (ie sparse or high segment numbers). Author: Shawn Debnath and Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro, Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2gTANm=e3ARnJT=n0h8hf88wqmaZxk0JYkxw+b21fNrw@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 10:56:03 +02:00
FileTag
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
FinalPathExtraData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FindColsContext
FindSplitData
FindSplitStrat
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
FixedParallelExecutorState
FixedParallelState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FixedParamState
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
FlagMode
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
Float
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
FlushPosition
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FmgrBuiltin
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
FmgrHookEventType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FmgrInfo
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
ForBothCellState
ForBothState
ForEachState
ForFiveState
ForFourState
ForThreeState
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ForeignAsyncConfigureWait_function
ForeignAsyncNotify_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ForeignAsyncRequest_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ForeignDataWrapper
ForeignKeyCacheInfo
ForeignKeyOptInfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ForeignPath
ForeignScan
ForeignScanState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ForeignServer
ForeignServerInfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ForeignTable
Allow TRUNCATE command to truncate foreign tables. This commit introduces new foreign data wrapper API for TRUNCATE. It extends TRUNCATE command so that it accepts foreign tables as the targets to truncate and invokes that API. Also it extends postgres_fdw so that it can issue TRUNCATE command to foreign servers, by adding new routine for that TRUNCATE API. The information about options specified in TRUNCATE command, e.g., ONLY, CACADE, etc is passed to FDW via API. The list of foreign tables to truncate is also passed to FDW. FDW truncates the foreign data sources that the passed foreign tables specify, based on those information. For example, postgres_fdw constructs TRUNCATE command using them and issues it to the foreign server. For performance, TRUNCATE command invokes the FDW routine for TRUNCATE once per foreign server that foreign tables to truncate belong to. Author: Kazutaka Onishi, Kohei KaiGai, slightly modified by Fujii Masao Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier, Zhihong Yu, Alvaro Herrera, Stephen Frost, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Langote, Daniel Gustafsson, Ibrar Ahmed, Fujii Masao Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOP8fzb_gkReLput7OvOK+8NHgw-RKqNv59vem7=524krQTcWA@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJuF6cMWDDqU-vn_knZgma+2GMaout68YUgn1uyDnexRhqqM5Q@mail.gmail.com
2021-04-08 13:56:08 +02:00
ForeignTruncateInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ForkNumber
FormData_pg_aggregate
FormData_pg_am
FormData_pg_amop
FormData_pg_amproc
FormData_pg_attrdef
FormData_pg_attribute
FormData_pg_auth_members
FormData_pg_authid
FormData_pg_cast
FormData_pg_class
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
FormData_pg_collation
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_constraint
FormData_pg_conversion
FormData_pg_database
FormData_pg_default_acl
FormData_pg_depend
FormData_pg_enum
FormData_pg_event_trigger
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
FormData_pg_extension
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_foreign_data_wrapper
FormData_pg_foreign_server
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
FormData_pg_foreign_table
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_index
FormData_pg_inherits
FormData_pg_language
FormData_pg_largeobject
FormData_pg_largeobject_metadata
FormData_pg_namespace
FormData_pg_opclass
FormData_pg_operator
FormData_pg_opfamily
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
FormData_pg_partitioned_table
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
FormData_pg_policy
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_proc
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
FormData_pg_publication
Allow publishing the tables of schema. A new option "FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA" in Create/Alter Publication allows one or more schemas to be specified, whose tables are selected by the publisher for sending the data to the subscriber. The new syntax allows specifying both the tables and schemas. For example: CREATE PUBLICATION pub1 FOR TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; OR ALTER PUBLICATION pub1 ADD TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; A new system table "pg_publication_namespace" has been added, to maintain the schemas that the user wants to publish through the publication. Modified the output plugin (pgoutput) to publish the changes if the relation is part of schema publication. Updates pg_dump to identify and dump schema publications. Updates the \d family of commands to display schema publications and \dRp+ variant will now display associated schemas if any. Author: Vignesh C, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila Syntax-Suggested-by: Tom Lane, Alvaro Herrera Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Masahiko Sawada, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Haiying Tang, Ajin Cherian, Rahila Syed, Bharath Rupireddy, Mark Dilger Tested-by: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALDaNm0OANxuJ6RXqwZsM1MSY4s19nuH3734j4a72etDwvBETQ@mail.gmail.com
2021-10-27 04:14:52 +02:00
FormData_pg_publication_namespace
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
FormData_pg_publication_rel
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
FormData_pg_range
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
FormData_pg_replication_origin
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_rewrite
FormData_pg_sequence
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
FormData_pg_sequence_data
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_shdepend
FormData_pg_statistic
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
FormData_pg_statistic_ext
FormData_pg_statistic_ext_data
FormData_pg_subscription
FormData_pg_subscription_rel
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_tablespace
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
FormData_pg_transform
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FormData_pg_trigger
FormData_pg_ts_config
FormData_pg_ts_config_map
FormData_pg_ts_dict
FormData_pg_ts_parser
FormData_pg_ts_template
FormData_pg_type
FormData_pg_user_mapping
Form_pg_aggregate
Form_pg_am
Form_pg_amop
Form_pg_amproc
Form_pg_attrdef
Form_pg_attribute
Form_pg_auth_members
Form_pg_authid
Form_pg_cast
Form_pg_class
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
Form_pg_collation
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_constraint
Form_pg_conversion
Form_pg_database
Form_pg_default_acl
Form_pg_depend
Form_pg_enum
Form_pg_event_trigger
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
Form_pg_extension
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_foreign_data_wrapper
Form_pg_foreign_server
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
Form_pg_foreign_table
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_index
Form_pg_inherits
Form_pg_language
Form_pg_largeobject
Form_pg_largeobject_metadata
Form_pg_namespace
Form_pg_opclass
Form_pg_operator
Form_pg_opfamily
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
Form_pg_partitioned_table
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
Form_pg_policy
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_proc
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
Form_pg_publication
Allow publishing the tables of schema. A new option "FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA" in Create/Alter Publication allows one or more schemas to be specified, whose tables are selected by the publisher for sending the data to the subscriber. The new syntax allows specifying both the tables and schemas. For example: CREATE PUBLICATION pub1 FOR TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; OR ALTER PUBLICATION pub1 ADD TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; A new system table "pg_publication_namespace" has been added, to maintain the schemas that the user wants to publish through the publication. Modified the output plugin (pgoutput) to publish the changes if the relation is part of schema publication. Updates pg_dump to identify and dump schema publications. Updates the \d family of commands to display schema publications and \dRp+ variant will now display associated schemas if any. Author: Vignesh C, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila Syntax-Suggested-by: Tom Lane, Alvaro Herrera Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Masahiko Sawada, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Haiying Tang, Ajin Cherian, Rahila Syed, Bharath Rupireddy, Mark Dilger Tested-by: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALDaNm0OANxuJ6RXqwZsM1MSY4s19nuH3734j4a72etDwvBETQ@mail.gmail.com
2021-10-27 04:14:52 +02:00
Form_pg_publication_namespace
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
Form_pg_publication_rel
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
Form_pg_range
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
Form_pg_replication_origin
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_rewrite
Form_pg_sequence
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
Form_pg_sequence_data
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_shdepend
Form_pg_statistic
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
Form_pg_statistic_ext
Form_pg_statistic_ext_data
Form_pg_subscription
Form_pg_subscription_rel
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_tablespace
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
Form_pg_transform
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Form_pg_trigger
Form_pg_ts_config
Form_pg_ts_config_map
Form_pg_ts_dict
Form_pg_ts_parser
Form_pg_ts_template
Form_pg_type
Form_pg_user_mapping
FormatNode
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
FreeBlockNumberArray
FreeListData
Management of free memory pages. This is intended as infrastructure for a full-fledged allocator for dynamic shared memory. The interface looks a bit like a real allocator, but only supports allocating and freeing memory in multiples of the 4kB page size. Further, to free memory, you must know the size of the span you wish to free, in pages. While these are make it unsuitable as an allocator in and of itself, it still serves as very useful scaffolding for a full-fledged allocator. Robert Haas and Thomas Munro. This code is mostly the same as my 2014 submission, but Thomas fixed quite a few bugs and made some changes to the interface. Discussion: CA+TgmobkeWptGwiNa+SGFWsTLzTzD-CeLz0KcE-y6LFgoUus4A@mail.gmail.com Discussion: CAEepm=1z5WLuNoJ80PaCvz6EtG9dN0j-KuHcHtU6QEfcPP5-qA@mail.gmail.com
2016-12-02 18:03:30 +01:00
FreePageBtree
FreePageBtreeHeader
FreePageBtreeInternalKey
FreePageBtreeLeafKey
FreePageBtreeSearchResult
FreePageManager
FreePageSpanLeader
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FromCharDateMode
FromExpr
Add basic infrastructure for 64 bit transaction IDs. Instead of inferring epoch progress from xids and checkpoints, introduce a 64 bit FullTransactionId type and use it to track xid generation. This fixes an unlikely bug where the epoch is reported incorrectly if the range of active xids wraps around more than once between checkpoints. The only user-visible effect of this commit is to correct the epoch used by txid_current() and txid_status(), also visible with pg_controldata, in those rare circumstances. It also creates some basic infrastructure so that later patches can use 64 bit transaction IDs in more places. The new type is a struct that we pass by value, as a form of strong typedef. This prevents the sort of accidental confusion between TransactionId and FullTransactionId that would be possible if we were to use a plain old uint64. Author: Thomas Munro Reported-by: Amit Kapila Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1%2BMv%2Bmb0HFfWM9Srtc6MVe160WFurXV68iAFMcagRZ0dQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-27 22:34:43 +01:00
FullTransactionId
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FuncCall
FuncCallContext
FuncCandidateList
FuncDetailCode
FuncExpr
FuncInfo
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
FuncLookupError
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FunctionCallInfo
Change function call information to be variable length. Before this change FunctionCallInfoData, the struct arguments etc for V1 function calls are stored in, always had space for FUNC_MAX_ARGS/100 arguments, storing datums and their nullness in two arrays. For nearly every function call 100 arguments is far more than needed, therefore wasting memory. Arg and argnull being two separate arrays also guarantees that to access a single argument, two cachelines have to be touched. Change the layout so there's a single variable-length array with pairs of value / isnull. That drastically reduces memory consumption for most function calls (on x86-64 a two argument function now uses 64bytes, previously 936 bytes), and makes it very likely that argument value and its nullness are on the same cacheline. Arguments are stored in a new NullableDatum struct, which, due to padding, needs more memory per argument than before. But as usually far fewer arguments are stored, and individual arguments are cheaper to access, that's still a clear win. It's likely that there's other places where conversion to NullableDatum arrays would make sense, e.g. TupleTableSlots, but that's for another commit. Because the function call information is now variable-length allocations have to take the number of arguments into account. For heap allocations that can be done with SizeForFunctionCallInfoData(), for on-stack allocations there's a new LOCAL_FCINFO(name, nargs) macro that helps to allocate an appropriately sized and aligned variable. Some places with stack allocation function call information don't know the number of arguments at compile time, and currently variably sized stack allocations aren't allowed in postgres. Therefore allow for FUNC_MAX_ARGS space in these cases. They're not that common, so for now that seems acceptable. Because of the need to allocate FunctionCallInfo of the appropriate size, older extensions may need to update their code. To avoid subtle breakages, the FunctionCallInfoData struct has been renamed to FunctionCallInfoBaseData. Most code only references FunctionCallInfo, so that shouldn't cause much collateral damage. This change is also a prerequisite for more efficient expression JIT compilation (by allocating the function call information on the stack, allowing LLVM to optimize it away); previously the size of the call information caused problems inside LLVM's optimizer. Author: Andres Freund Reviewed-By: Tom Lane Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180605172952.x34m5uz6ju6enaem@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-01-26 23:17:52 +01:00
FunctionCallInfoBaseData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FunctionParameter
FunctionParameterMode
FunctionScan
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
FunctionScanPerFuncState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
FunctionScanState
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
FuzzyAttrMatchState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GBT_NUMKEY
GBT_NUMKEY_R
GBT_VARKEY
GBT_VARKEY_R
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
GENERAL_NAME
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
GISTBuildBuffers
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GISTBuildState
GISTDeletedPageContents
GISTENTRY
GISTInsertStack
GISTInsertState
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
GISTIntArrayBigOptions
GISTIntArrayOptions
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
GISTNodeBuffer
GISTNodeBufferPage
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GISTPageOpaque
GISTPageOpaqueData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GISTPageSplitInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GISTSTATE
GISTScanOpaque
GISTScanOpaqueData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GISTSearchHeapItem
GISTSearchItem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GISTTYPE
GIST_SPLITVEC
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
GMReaderTupleBuffer
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
GROUP
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GV
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
Gather
Add a Gather Merge executor node. Like Gather, we spawn multiple workers and run the same plan in each one; however, Gather Merge is used when each worker produces the same output ordering and we want to preserve that output ordering while merging together the streams of tuples from various workers. (In a way, Gather Merge is like a hybrid of Gather and MergeAppend.) This works out to a win if it saves us from having to perform an expensive Sort. In cases where only a small amount of data would need to be sorted, it may actually be faster to use a regular Gather node and then sort the results afterward, because Gather Merge sometimes needs to wait synchronously for tuples whereas a pure Gather generally doesn't. But if this avoids an expensive sort then it's a win. Rushabh Lathia, reviewed and tested by Amit Kapila, Thomas Munro, and Neha Sharma, and reviewed and revised by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAGPqQf09oPX-cQRpBKS0Gq49Z+m6KBxgxd_p9gX8CKk_d75HoQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-09 13:40:36 +01:00
GatherMerge
GatherMergePath
GatherMergeState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
GatherPath
GatherState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Gene
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
GeneratePruningStepsContext
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
GenerationBlock
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GenerationContext
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
GenerationPointer
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
GenericCosts
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
GenericXLogState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GeqoPrivateData
Allow locking updated tuples in tuple_update() and tuple_delete() Currently, in read committed transaction isolation mode (default), we have the following sequence of actions when tuple_update()/tuple_delete() finds the tuple updated by concurrent transaction. 1. Attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete(), which returns TM_Updated. 2. Lock tuple with tuple_lock(). 3. Re-evaluate plan qual (recheck if we still need to update/delete and calculate the new tuple for update). 4. Second attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete(). This attempt should be successful, since the tuple was previously locked. This patch eliminates step 2 by taking the lock during first tuple_update()/tuple_delete() call. Heap table access method saves some efforts by checking the updated tuple once instead of twice. Future undo-based table access methods, which will start from the latest row version, can immediately place a lock there. The code in nodeModifyTable.c is simplified by removing the nested switch/case. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdua-YFw3XTprfutzGp28xXLigFtzNbuFY8yPhqeq6X5kg%40mail.gmail.com Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Pavel Borisov, Vignesh C, Mason Sharp Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Chris Travers
2023-03-22 22:13:37 +01:00
GetEPQSlotArg
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
GetForeignJoinPaths_function
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
GetForeignModifyBatchSize_function
GetForeignPaths_function
GetForeignPlan_function
GetForeignRelSize_function
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
GetForeignRowMarkType_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
GetForeignUpperPaths_function
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
GetState
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
GiSTOptions
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GinBtree
GinBtreeData
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
GinBtreeDataLeafInsertData
GinBtreeEntryInsertData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GinBtreeStack
GinBuildState
GinChkVal
GIN support for @@ and @? jsonpath operators This commit makes existing GIN operator classes jsonb_ops and json_path_ops support "jsonb @@ jsonpath" and "jsonb @? jsonpath" operators. Basic idea is to extract statements of following form out of jsonpath. key1.key2. ... .keyN = const The rest of jsonpath is rechecked from heap. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov Reviewed-by: Jonathan Katz, Pavel Stehule
2019-04-01 17:08:15 +02:00
GinEntries
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GinEntryAccumulator
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
GinIndexStat
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GinMetaPageData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GinNullCategory
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GinOptions
GinPageOpaque
GinPageOpaqueData
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
GinPlaceToPageRC
GinPostingList
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
GinQualCounts
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GinScanEntry
GinScanKey
GinScanOpaque
GinScanOpaqueData
GinState
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GinStatsData
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
GinTernaryValue
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GinTupleCollector
GinVacuumState
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
GistBuildMode
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GistEntryVector
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
GistHstoreOptions
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
GistInetKey
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GistNSN
Add new typedefs introduced in 773df883e8 to typedefs.list
2020-03-19 19:40:45 +01:00
GistOptBufferingMode
Reduce non-leaf keys overlap in GiST indexes produced by a sorted build The GiST sorted build currently chooses split points according to the only page space utilization. That may lead to higher non-leaf keys overlap and, in turn, slower search query answers. This commit makes the sorted build use the opclass's picksplit method. Once four pages at the level are accumulated, the picksplit method is applied until each split partition fits the page. Some of our split algorithms could show significant performance degradation while processing 4-times more data at once. But those opclasses haven't received the sorted build support and shouldn't receive it before their split algorithms are improved. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHqSB9jqtS94e9%3D0vxqQX5dxQA89N95UKyz-%3DA7Y%2B_YJt%2BVW5A%40mail.gmail.com Author: Aliaksandr Kalenik, Sergei Shoulbakov, Andrey Borodin Reviewed-by: Björn Harrtell, Darafei Praliaskouski, Andres Freund Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov
2022-02-07 21:20:42 +01:00
GistSortedBuildLevelState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GistSplitUnion
GistSplitVector
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
GistTsVectorOptions
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
GistVacState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GlobalTransaction
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
GlobalVisHorizonKind
snapshot scalability: Don't compute global horizons while building snapshots. To make GetSnapshotData() more scalable, it cannot not look at at each proc's xmin: While snapshot contents do not need to change whenever a read-only transaction commits or a snapshot is released, a proc's xmin is modified in those cases. The frequency of xmin modifications leads to, particularly on higher core count systems, many cache misses inside GetSnapshotData(), despite the data underlying a snapshot not changing. That is the most significant source of GetSnapshotData() scaling poorly on larger systems. Without accessing xmins, GetSnapshotData() cannot calculate accurate horizons / thresholds as it has so far. But we don't really have to: The horizons don't actually change that much between GetSnapshotData() calls. Nor are the horizons actually used every time a snapshot is built. The trick this commit introduces is to delay computation of accurate horizons until there use and using horizon boundaries to determine whether accurate horizons need to be computed. The use of RecentGlobal[Data]Xmin to decide whether a row version could be removed has been replaces with new GlobalVisTest* functions. These use two thresholds to determine whether a row can be pruned: 1) definitely_needed, indicating that rows deleted by XIDs >= definitely_needed are definitely still visible. 2) maybe_needed, indicating that rows deleted by XIDs < maybe_needed can definitely be removed GetSnapshotData() updates definitely_needed to be the xmin of the computed snapshot. When testing whether a row can be removed (with GlobalVisTestIsRemovableXid()) and the tested XID falls in between the two (i.e. XID >= maybe_needed && XID < definitely_needed) the boundaries can be recomputed to be more accurate. As it is not cheap to compute accurate boundaries, we limit the number of times that happens in short succession. As the boundaries used by GlobalVisTestIsRemovableXid() are never reset (with maybe_needed updated by GetSnapshotData()), it is likely that further test can benefit from an earlier computation of accurate horizons. To avoid regressing performance when old_snapshot_threshold is set (as that requires an accurate horizon to be computed), heap_page_prune_opt() doesn't unconditionally call TransactionIdLimitedForOldSnapshots() anymore. Both the computation of the limited horizon, and the triggering of errors (with SetOldSnapshotThresholdTimestamp()) is now only done when necessary to remove tuples. This commit just removes the accesses to PGXACT->xmin from GetSnapshotData(), but other members of PGXACT residing in the same cache line are accessed. Therefore this in itself does not result in a significant improvement. Subsequent commits will take advantage of the fact that GetSnapshotData() now does not need to access xmins anymore. Note: This contains a workaround in heap_page_prune_opt() to keep the snapshot_too_old tests working. While that workaround is ugly, the tests currently are not meaningful, and it seems best to address them separately. Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200301083601.ews6hz5dduc3w2se@alap3.anarazel.de
2020-08-13 01:03:49 +02:00
GlobalVisState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GrantRoleStmt
GrantStmt
GrantTargetType
Group
GroupClause
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
GroupPath
Implement partition-wise grouping/aggregation. If the partition keys of input relation are part of the GROUP BY clause, all the rows belonging to a given group come from a single partition. This allows aggregation/grouping over a partitioned relation to be broken down * into aggregation/grouping on each partition. This should be no worse, and often better, than the normal approach. If the GROUP BY clause does not contain all the partition keys, we can still perform partial aggregation for each partition and then finalize aggregation after appending the partial results. This is less certain to be a win, but it's still useful. Jeevan Chalke, Ashutosh Bapat, Robert Haas. The larger patch series of which this patch is a part was also reviewed and tested by Antonin Houska, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, David Rowley, Dilip Kumar, Konstantin Knizhnik, Pascal Legrand, and Rafia Sabih. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM2+6=V64_xhstVHie0Rz=KPEQnLJMZt_e314P0jaT_oJ9MR8A@mail.gmail.com
2018-03-22 17:49:48 +01:00
GroupPathExtraData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GroupResultPath
GroupState
GroupVarInfo
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
GroupingFunc
GroupingSet
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
GroupingSetData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
GroupingSetKind
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
GroupingSetsPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GucAction
GucBoolAssignHook
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GucBoolCheckHook
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GucContext
GucEnumAssignHook
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GucEnumCheckHook
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GucIntAssignHook
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GucIntCheckHook
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GucRealAssignHook
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GucRealCheckHook
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
GucShowHook
GucSource
GucStack
GucStackState
GucStringAssignHook
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
GucStringCheckHook
Introduce a generic pg_dump compression API Switch pg_dump to use the Compression API, implemented by bf9aa490db. The CompressFileHandle replaces the cfp* family of functions with a struct of callbacks for accessing (compressed) files. This allows adding new compression methods simply by introducing a new struct instance with appropriate implementation of the callbacks. Archives compressed using custom compression methods store an identifier of the compression algorithm in their header instead of the compression level. The header version is bumped. Author: Georgios Kokolatos Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Rachel Heaton, Justin Pryzby, Tomas Vondra Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/faUNEOpts9vunEaLnmxmG-DldLSg_ql137OC3JYDmgrOMHm1RvvWY2IdBkv_CRxm5spCCb_OmKNk2T03TMm0fBEWveFF9wA1WizPuAgB7Ss%3D%40protonmail.com
2023-02-23 18:33:30 +01:00
GzipCompressorState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HANDLE
HASHACTION
HASHBUCKET
HASHCTL
HASHELEMENT
HASHHDR
HASHSEGMENT
HASH_SEQ_STATUS
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
HE
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HEntry
HIST_ENTRY
HKEY
HLOCAL
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
HMAC_CTX
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HMODULE
HOldEntry
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
HRESULT
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HSParser
HSpool
HStore
HTAB
HTSV_Result
HV
Hash
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
HashAggBatch
HashAggSpill
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HashAllocFunc
HashBuildState
HashCompareFunc
HashCopyFunc
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
HashIndexStat
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
HashInstrumentation
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HashJoin
HashJoinState
HashJoinTable
HashJoinTuple
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
HashMemoryChunk
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HashMetaPage
HashMetaPageData
Refactor reloption handling for index AMs in-core This reworks the reloption parsing and build of a couple of index AMs by creating new structures for each index AM's options. This split was already done for BRIN, GIN and GiST (which actually has a fillfactor parameter), but not for hash, B-tree and SPGiST which relied on StdRdOptions due to an overlap with the default option set. This saves a couple of bytes for rd_options in each relcache entry with indexes making use of relation options, and brings more consistency between all index AMs. While on it, add a couple of AssertMacro() calls to make sure that utility macros to grab values of reloptions are used with the expected index AM. Author: Nikolay Shaplov Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier, Álvaro Herrera, Dent John Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4127670.gFlpRb6XCm@x200m
2019-11-25 01:40:53 +01:00
HashOptions
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HashPageOpaque
HashPageOpaqueData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
HashPageStat
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HashPath
HashScanOpaque
HashScanOpaqueData
HashScanPosData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
HashScanPosItem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HashSkewBucket
HashState
HashValueFunc
HbaLine
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
HeadlineJsonState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HeadlineParsedText
HeadlineWordEntry
Extend amcheck to check heap pages. Mark Dilger, reviewed by Peter Geoghegan, Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier, Amul Sul, and by me. Some last-minute cosmetic revisions by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/12ED3DA8-25F0-4B68-937D-D907CFBF08E7@enterprisedb.com
2020-10-22 14:44:18 +02:00
HeapCheckContext
Run pgindent on heapam.c An upcoming patch by Melanie Plageman does some refactoring work in this area. Run pgindent on that file now before making any changes so that it's easier to maintain/evolve each of the individual patches doing the refactor work. Additionally, add a few new required typedefs to the list to make it easier to do future pgindent runs on this file during the refactor work. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_YSOnhKsDyFcqJsKtBSrd32DP-jjXmv7hL0BPD-z0TGXQ@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-23 11:08:38 +01:00
HeapPageFreeze
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HeapScanDesc
HeapTuple
HeapTupleData
HeapTupleFields
Fix alphabetic ordering in typedefs.list
2020-11-15 06:56:31 +01:00
HeapTupleForceOption
Run pgindent on heapam.c An upcoming patch by Melanie Plageman does some refactoring work in this area. Run pgindent on that file now before making any changes so that it's easier to maintain/evolve each of the individual patches doing the refactor work. Additionally, add a few new required typedefs to the list to make it easier to do future pgindent runs on this file during the refactor work. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_YSOnhKsDyFcqJsKtBSrd32DP-jjXmv7hL0BPD-z0TGXQ@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-23 11:08:38 +01:00
HeapTupleFreeze
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
HeapTupleHeader
HeapTupleHeaderData
HeapTupleTableSlot
HistControl
HotStandbyState
I32
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ICU_Convert_Func
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ID
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
INFIX
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
INT128
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
INTERFACE_INFO
pgstat: Infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics, documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review easier. While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies, it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly, pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers / compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers. The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse, and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend, autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite). What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope of the already large patchset manageable. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
2023-02-09 05:53:42 +01:00
IOContext
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IOFuncSelector
pgstat: Infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics, documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review easier. While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies, it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly, pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers / compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers. The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse, and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend, autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite). What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope of the already large patchset manageable. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
2023-02-09 05:53:42 +01:00
IOObject
IOOp
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IPCompareMethod
ITEM
IV
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
IdentLine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IdentifierLookup
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
IdentifySystemCmd
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
IfStackElem
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ImportForeignSchemaStmt
ImportForeignSchemaType
ImportForeignSchema_function
ImportQual
Avoid race in RelationBuildDesc() affecting CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY. CIC and REINDEX CONCURRENTLY assume backends see their catalog changes no later than each backend's next transaction start. That failed to hold when a backend absorbed a relevant invalidation in the middle of running RelationBuildDesc() on the CIC index. Queries that use the resulting index can silently fail to find rows. Fix this for future index builds by making RelationBuildDesc() loop until it finishes without accepting a relevant invalidation. It may be necessary to reindex to recover from past occurrences; REINDEX CONCURRENTLY suffices. Back-patch to 9.6 (all supported versions). Noah Misch and Andrey Borodin, reviewed (in earlier versions) by Andres Freund. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210730022548.GA1940096@gust.leadboat.com
2021-10-24 03:36:38 +02:00
InProgressEnt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
IncludeWal
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
InclusionOpaque
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IncrementVarSublevelsUp_context
IncrementalSort
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
IncrementalSortExecutionStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IncrementalSortGroupInfo
IncrementalSortInfo
IncrementalSortPath
IncrementalSortState
Index
Final pgindent + perltidy run for 9.6.
2016-08-15 19:42:51 +02:00
IndexAMProperty
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
IndexAmRoutine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IndexArrayKeyInfo
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
IndexAttachInfo
Add new wal_level, logical, sufficient for logical decoding. When wal_level=logical, we'll log columns from the old tuple as configured by the REPLICA IDENTITY facility added in commit 07cacba983ef79be4a84fcd0e0ca3b5fcb85dd65. This makes it possible a properly-configured logical replication solution to correctly follow table updates even if they change the chosen key columns, or, with REPLICA IDENTITY FULL, even if the table has no key at all. Note that updates which do not modify the replica identity column won't log anything extra, making the choice of a good key (i.e. one that will rarely be changed) important to performance when wal_level=logical is configured. Each insert, update, or delete to a catalog table will also log the CMIN and/or CMAX values of stamped by the current transaction. This is necessary because logical decoding will require access to historical snapshots of the catalog in order to decode some data types, and the CMIN/CMAX values that we may need in order to judge row visibility may have been overwritten by the time we need them. Andres Freund, reviewed in various versions by myself, Heikki Linnakangas, KONDO Mitsumasa, and many others.
2013-12-11 00:33:45 +01:00
IndexAttrBitmapKind
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IndexBuildCallback
IndexBuildResult
IndexBulkDeleteCallback
IndexBulkDeleteResult
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
IndexClause
IndexClauseSet
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IndexDeleteCounts
Compute XID horizon for page level index vacuum on primary. Previously the xid horizon was only computed during WAL replay. That had two major problems: 1) It relied on knowing what the table pointed to looks like. That was easy enough before the introducing of tableam (we knew it had to be heap, although some trickery around logging the heap relfilenodes was required). But to properly handle table AMs we need per-database catalog access to look up the AM handler, which recovery doesn't allow. 2) Not knowing the xid horizon also makes it hard to support logical decoding on standbys. When on a catalog table, we need to be able to conflict with slots that have an xid horizon that's too old. But computing the horizon by visiting the heap only works once consistency is reached, but we always need to be able to detect conflicts. There's also a secondary problem, in that the current method performs redundant work on every standby. But that's counterbalanced by potentially computing the value when not necessary (either because there's no standby, or because there's no connected backends). Solve 1) and 2) by moving computation of the xid horizon to the primary and by involving tableam in the computation of the horizon. To address the potentially increased overhead, increase the efficiency of the xid horizon computation for heap by sorting the tids, and eliminating redundant buffer accesses. When prefetching is available, additionally perform prefetching of buffers. As this is more of a maintenance task, rather than something routinely done in every read only query, we add an arbitrary 10 to the effective concurrency - thereby using IO concurrency, when not globally enabled. That's possibly not the perfect formula, but seems good enough for now. Bumps WAL format, as latestRemovedXid is now part of the records, and the heap's relfilenode isn't anymore. Author: Andres Freund, Amit Khandekar, Robert Haas Reviewed-By: Robert Haas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181212204154.nsxf3gzqv3gesl32@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20181214014235.dal5ogljs3bmlq44@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-03-26 22:41:46 +01:00
IndexDeletePrefetchState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IndexElem
tableam: Add and use scan APIs. Too allow table accesses to be not directly dependent on heap, several new abstractions are needed. Specifically: 1) Heap scans need to be generalized into table scans. Do this by introducing TableScanDesc, which will be the "base class" for individual AMs. This contains the AM independent fields from HeapScanDesc. The previous heap_{beginscan,rescan,endscan} et al. have been replaced with a table_ version. There's no direct replacement for heap_getnext(), as that returned a HeapTuple, which is undesirable for a other AMs. Instead there's table_scan_getnextslot(). But note that heap_getnext() lives on, it's still used widely to access catalog tables. This is achieved by new scan_begin, scan_end, scan_rescan, scan_getnextslot callbacks. 2) The portion of parallel scans that's shared between backends need to be able to do so without the user doing per-AM work. To achieve that new parallelscan_{estimate, initialize, reinitialize} callbacks are introduced, which operate on a new ParallelTableScanDesc, which again can be subclassed by AMs. As it is likely that several AMs are going to be block oriented, block oriented callbacks that can be shared between such AMs are provided and used by heap. table_block_parallelscan_{estimate, intiialize, reinitialize} as callbacks, and table_block_parallelscan_{nextpage, init} for use in AMs. These operate on a ParallelBlockTableScanDesc. 3) Index scans need to be able to access tables to return a tuple, and there needs to be state across individual accesses to the heap to store state like buffers. That's now handled by introducing a sort-of-scan IndexFetchTable, which again is intended to be subclassed by individual AMs (for heap IndexFetchHeap). The relevant callbacks for an AM are index_fetch_{end, begin, reset} to create the necessary state, and index_fetch_tuple to retrieve an indexed tuple. Note that index_fetch_tuple implementations need to be smarter than just blindly fetching the tuples for AMs that have optimizations similar to heap's HOT - the currently alive tuple in the update chain needs to be fetched if appropriate. Similar to table_scan_getnextslot(), it's undesirable to continue to return HeapTuples. Thus index_fetch_heap (might want to rename that later) now accepts a slot as an argument. Core code doesn't have a lot of call sites performing index scans without going through the systable_* API (in contrast to loads of heap_getnext calls and working directly with HeapTuples). Index scans now store the result of a search in IndexScanDesc->xs_heaptid, rather than xs_ctup->t_self. As the target is not generally a HeapTuple anymore that seems cleaner. To be able to sensible adapt code to use the above, two further callbacks have been introduced: a) slot_callbacks returns a TupleTableSlotOps* suitable for creating slots capable of holding a tuple of the AMs type. table_slot_callbacks() and table_slot_create() are based upon that, but have additional logic to deal with views, foreign tables, etc. While this change could have been done separately, nearly all the call sites that needed to be adapted for the rest of this commit also would have been needed to be adapted for table_slot_callbacks(), making separation not worthwhile. b) tuple_satisfies_snapshot checks whether the tuple in a slot is currently visible according to a snapshot. That's required as a few places now don't have a buffer + HeapTuple around, but a slot (which in heap's case internally has that information). Additionally a few infrastructure changes were needed: I) SysScanDesc, as used by systable_{beginscan, getnext} et al. now internally uses a slot to keep track of tuples. While systable_getnext() still returns HeapTuples, and will so for the foreseeable future, the index API (see 1) above) now only deals with slots. The remainder, and largest part, of this commit is then adjusting all scans in postgres to use the new APIs. Author: Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi, Alvaro Herrera Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-11 20:46:41 +01:00
IndexFetchHeapData
IndexFetchTableData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IndexInfo
IndexList
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
IndexOnlyScan
IndexOnlyScanState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IndexOptInfo
Improve handling of NULLs in KNN-GiST and KNN-SP-GiST This commit improves subject in two ways: * It removes ugliness of 02f90879e7, which stores distance values and null flags in two separate arrays after GISTSearchItem struct. Instead we pack both distance value and null flag in IndexOrderByDistance struct. Alignment overhead should be negligible, because we typically deal with at most few "col op const" expressions in ORDER BY clause. * It fixes handling of "col op NULL" expression in KNN-SP-GiST. Now, these expression are not passed to support functions, which can't deal with them. Instead, NULL result is implicitly assumed. It future we may decide to teach support functions to deal with NULL arguments, but current solution is bugfix suitable for backpatch. Reported-by: Nikita Glukhov Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/826f57ee-afc7-8977-c44c-6111d18b02ec%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov Backpatch-through: 9.4
2019-09-19 20:30:19 +02:00
IndexOrderByDistance
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IndexPath
IndexRuntimeKeyInfo
IndexScan
IndexScanDesc
IndexScanState
IndexStateFlagsAction
IndexStmt
IndexTuple
IndexTupleData
IndexUniqueCheck
IndexVacuumInfo
IndxInfo
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
InferClause
InferenceElem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
InfoItem
InhInfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
InheritableSocket
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
InitSampleScan_function
InitializeDSMForeignScan_function
InitializeWorkerForeignScan_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
InlineCodeBlock
InsertStmt
Instrumentation
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
Int128AggState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Int8TransTypeData
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
IntRBTreeNode
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
Integer
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
IntegerSet
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
InternalDefaultACL
InternalGrant
Interval
IntoClause
InvalMessageArray
InvalidationMsgsGroup
IpcMemoryId
IpcMemoryKey
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
IpcMemoryState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IpcSemaphoreId
IpcSemaphoreKey
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
IsForeignPathAsyncCapable_function
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
IsForeignRelUpdatable_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
IsForeignScanParallelSafe_function
Pre branch pgindent / pgperltidy run Along the way make a slight adjustment to src/include/utils/queryjumble.h to avoid an unused typedef.
2021-06-28 17:05:54 +02:00
IsoConnInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
IspellDict
Item
ItemId
ItemIdData
ItemPointer
ItemPointerData
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
IterateDirectModify_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
IterateForeignScan_function
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
IterateJsonStringValuesState
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JEntry
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
JHashState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JOBOBJECTINFOCLASS
JOBOBJECT_BASIC_LIMIT_INFORMATION
JOBOBJECT_BASIC_UI_RESTRICTIONS
JOBOBJECT_SECURITY_LIMIT_INFORMATION
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
JitContext
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
JitInstrumentation
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
JitProviderCallbacks
JitProviderCompileExprCB
JitProviderInit
JitProviderReleaseContextCB
JitProviderResetAfterErrorCB
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Join
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
JoinCostWorkspace
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JoinExpr
JoinHashEntry
JoinPath
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
JoinPathExtraData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JoinState
JoinType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
JsObject
JsValue
JsonAggConstructor
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
JsonAggState
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonArgument
JsonArrayAgg
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
JsonArrayConstructor
JsonArrayQueryConstructor
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonBaseObjectInfo
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonBehavior
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonBehaviorType
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonCoercion
JsonCommon
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
JsonConstructorExpr
JsonConstructorType
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonEncoding
JsonExpr
JsonExprOp
JsonFormat
JsonFormatType
JsonFunc
JsonFuncExpr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JsonHashEntry
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonIsPredicate
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
JsonItemCoercions
JsonIterateStringValuesAction
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonKeyValue
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
JsonLexContext
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonLikeRegexContext
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
JsonManifestFileField
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
JsonManifestParseContext
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonManifestParseState
JsonManifestSemanticState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
JsonManifestWALRangeField
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonObjectAgg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JsonObjectConstructor
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonOutput
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
JsonParseContext
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonParseErrorType
JsonParseExpr
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonPath
JsonPathBool
JsonPathDatatypeStatus
JsonPathExecContext
JsonPathExecResult
GIN support for @@ and @? jsonpath operators This commit makes existing GIN operator classes jsonb_ops and json_path_ops support "jsonb @@ jsonpath" and "jsonb @? jsonpath" operators. Basic idea is to extract statements of following form out of jsonpath. key1.key2. ... .keyN = const The rest of jsonpath is rechecked from heap. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov Reviewed-by: Jonathan Katz, Pavel Stehule
2019-04-01 17:08:15 +02:00
JsonPathGinAddPathItemFunc
JsonPathGinContext
JsonPathGinExtractNodesFunc
JsonPathGinNode
JsonPathGinNodeType
JsonPathGinPath
JsonPathGinPathItem
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonPathItem
JsonPathItemType
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
JsonPathKeyword
JSON_TABLE This feature allows jsonb data to be treated as a table and thus used in a FROM clause like other tabular data. Data can be selected from the jsonb using jsonpath expressions, and hoisted out of nested structures in the jsonb to form multiple rows, more or less like an outer join. Nikita Glukhov Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zhihong Yu (whose name I previously misspelled), Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7e2cb85d-24cf-4abb-30a5-1a33715959bd@postgrespro.ru
2022-04-04 21:36:03 +02:00
JsonPathMutableContext
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonPathParseItem
JsonPathParseResult
JsonPathPredicateCallback
GIN support for @@ and @? jsonpath operators This commit makes existing GIN operator classes jsonb_ops and json_path_ops support "jsonb @@ jsonpath" and "jsonb @? jsonpath" operators. Basic idea is to extract statements of following form out of jsonpath. key1.key2. ... .keyN = const The rest of jsonpath is rechecked from heap. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov Reviewed-by: Jonathan Katz, Pavel Stehule
2019-04-01 17:08:15 +02:00
JsonPathString
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonPathVarCallback
GIN support for @@ and @? jsonpath operators This commit makes existing GIN operator classes jsonb_ops and json_path_ops support "jsonb @@ jsonpath" and "jsonb @? jsonpath" operators. Basic idea is to extract statements of following form out of jsonpath. key1.key2. ... .keyN = const The rest of jsonpath is rechecked from heap. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov Reviewed-by: Jonathan Katz, Pavel Stehule
2019-04-01 17:08:15 +02:00
JsonPathVariableEvalContext
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonQuotes
JsonReturning
JsonScalarExpr
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
JsonSemAction
JsonTokenType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
JsonTransformStringValuesAction
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
JsonTypeCategory
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonUniqueBuilderState
Add amcheck extension to contrib. This is the beginning of a collection of SQL-callable functions to verify the integrity of data files. For now it only contains code to verify B-Tree indexes. This adds two SQL-callable functions, validating B-Tree consistency to a varying degree. Check the, extensive, docs for details. The goal is to later extend the coverage of the module to further access methods, possibly including the heap. Once checks for additional access methods exist, we'll likely add some "dispatch" functions that cover multiple access methods. Author: Peter Geoghegan, editorialized by Andres Freund Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra, Thomas Munro, Anastasia Lubennikova, Robert Haas, Amit Langote Discussion: CAM3SWZQzLMhMwmBqjzK+pRKXrNUZ4w90wYMUWfkeV8mZ3Debvw@mail.gmail.com
2017-03-10 00:50:40 +01:00
JsonUniqueCheckState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JsonUniqueHashEntry
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonUniqueParsingState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JsonUniqueStackEntry
Partial implementation of SQL/JSON path language SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing features will be added later by separate commits. Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values: * jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]), * jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). * jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]). This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb, jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support (implemented in subsequent patches). Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators. Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me. Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work was inspired by Oleg Bartunov. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
2019-03-16 10:15:37 +01:00
JsonValueExpr
JsonValueList
JsonValueListIterator
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
JsonValueType
JsonWrapper
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
Jsonb
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
JsonbAggState
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
JsonbContainer
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonbInState
JsonbIterState
JsonbIterator
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
JsonbIteratorToken
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonbPair
JsonbParseState
Implementation of subscripting for jsonb Subscripting for jsonb does not support slices, does not have a limit for the number of subscripts, and an assignment expects a replace value to have jsonb type. There is also one functional difference between assignment via subscripting and assignment via jsonb_set(). When an original jsonb container is NULL, the subscripting replaces it with an empty jsonb and proceeds with an assignment. For the sake of code reuse, we rearrange some parts of jsonb functionality to allow the usage of the same functions for jsonb_set and assign subscripting operation. The original idea belongs to Oleg Bartunov. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcV8qvGcDXurwwgUbwACV86Th7G80pnubg42e-p9gsSf%3Dg%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcX3mdxGCgdThzuySwH-ApyHHM-G4oB1R0fn0j2hZqqkLQ%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcVDuGBv%3DM0FqBYX8DPebS3F_0KQ6OVFobGJPM507_SZ_w%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2Bq6zcVovR%2BXY4mfk-7oNk-rF91gH0PebnNfuUjuuDsyHjOcVA%40mail.gmail.com Author: Dmitry Dolgov Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Arthur Zakirov, Pavel Stehule, Dian M Fay Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan, Chapman Flack, Merlin Moncure, Peter Geoghegan Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Jim Nasby, Josh Berkus, Victor Wagner Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Robert Haas, Oleg Bartunov
2021-01-31 21:50:40 +01:00
JsonbSubWorkspace
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
JsonbTypeCategory
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
JsonbValue
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
JumbleState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
JunkFilter
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
KeyAction
KeyActions
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
KeyArray
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
KeySuffix
KeyWord
LARGE_INTEGER
LDAP
LDAPMessage
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
LDAPURLDesc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LDAP_TIMEVAL
LINE
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
LLVMAttributeRef
LLVMBasicBlockRef
Add helpers for emitting LLVM IR. These basically just help to make code a bit more concise and pgindent proof. Author: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-03-22 19:10:33 +01:00
LLVMBuilderRef
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
LLVMIntPredicate
Basic JIT provider and error handling infrastructure. This commit introduces: 1) JIT provider abstraction, which allows JIT functionality to be implemented in separate shared libraries. That's desirable because it allows to install JIT support as a separate package, and because it allows experimentation with different forms of JITing. 2) JITContexts which can be, using functions introduced in follow up commits, used to emit JITed functions, and have them be cleaned up on error. 3) The outline of a LLVM JIT provider, which will be fleshed out in subsequent commits. Documentation for GUCs added, and for JIT in general, will be added in later commits. Author: Andres Freund, with architectural input from Jeff Davis Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-03-22 03:28:28 +01:00
LLVMJitContext
Support for optimizing and emitting code in LLVM JIT provider. This commit introduces the ability to actually generate code using LLVM. In particular, this adds: - Ability to emit code both in heavily optimized and largely unoptimized fashion - Batching facility to allow functions to be defined in small increments, but optimized and emitted in executable form in larger batches (for performance and memory efficiency) - Type and function declaration synchronization between runtime generated code and normal postgres code. This is critical to be able to access struct fields etc. - Developer oriented jit_dump_bitcode GUC, for inspecting / debugging the generated code. - per JitContext statistics of number of functions, time spent generating code, optimizing, and emitting it. This will later be employed for EXPLAIN support. This commit doesn't yet contain any code actually generating functions. That'll follow in later commits. Documentation for GUCs added, and for JIT in general, will be added in later commits. Author: Andres Freund, with contributions by Pierre Ducroquet Testing-By: Thomas Munro, Peter Eisentraut Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-03-22 19:05:22 +01:00
LLVMJitHandle
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
LLVMMemoryBufferRef
LLVMModuleRef
LLVMOrcJITStackRef
LLVMOrcModuleHandle
LLVMOrcTargetAddress
LLVMPassManagerBuilderRef
LLVMPassManagerRef
LLVMSharedModuleRef
LLVMTargetMachineRef
LLVMTargetRef
Support for optimizing and emitting code in LLVM JIT provider. This commit introduces the ability to actually generate code using LLVM. In particular, this adds: - Ability to emit code both in heavily optimized and largely unoptimized fashion - Batching facility to allow functions to be defined in small increments, but optimized and emitted in executable form in larger batches (for performance and memory efficiency) - Type and function declaration synchronization between runtime generated code and normal postgres code. This is critical to be able to access struct fields etc. - Developer oriented jit_dump_bitcode GUC, for inspecting / debugging the generated code. - per JitContext statistics of number of functions, time spent generating code, optimizing, and emitting it. This will later be employed for EXPLAIN support. This commit doesn't yet contain any code actually generating functions. That'll follow in later commits. Documentation for GUCs added, and for JIT in general, will be added in later commits. Author: Andres Freund, with contributions by Pierre Ducroquet Testing-By: Thomas Munro, Peter Eisentraut Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
2018-03-22 19:05:22 +01:00
LLVMTypeRef
LLVMValueRef
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LOCALLOCK
LOCALLOCKOWNER
LOCALLOCKTAG
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
LOCALPREDICATELOCK
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LOCK
LOCKMASK
LOCKMETHODID
LOCKMODE
LOCKTAG
LONG
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
LONG_PTR
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
LOOP
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LPBYTE
LPCTSTR
LPCWSTR
LPDWORD
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
LPFILETIME
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LPSECURITY_ATTRIBUTES
LPSERVICE_STATUS
LPSTR
LPTHREAD_START_ROUTINE
LPTSTR
LPVOID
LPWSTR
LSEG
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
LUID
LVPagePruneState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LVRelState
Improve vacuum error context handling. Use separate functions to save and restore error context information as that made code easier to understand.  Also, make it clear that the index information required for error context is sane. Author: Andres Freund, Justin Pryzby, Amit Kapila Backpatch-through: 13, where it was introduced Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1LWo+v1OWu=Sky27GTGSCuOmr7iaURNbc5xz6jO+SaPeA@mail.gmail.com
2020-07-01 04:28:36 +02:00
LVSavedErrInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LWLock
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
LWLockHandle
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LWLockMode
LWLockPadded
Add LZ4 compression to pg_dump Expand pg_dump's compression streaming and file APIs to support the lz4 algorithm. The newly added compress_lz4.{c,h} files cover all the functionality of the aforementioned APIs. Minor changes were necessary in various pg_backup_* files, where code for the 'lz4' file suffix has been added, as well as pg_dump's compression option parsing. Author: Georgios Kokolatos Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Rachel Heaton, Justin Pryzby, Shi Yu, Tomas Vondra Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/faUNEOpts9vunEaLnmxmG-DldLSg_ql137OC3JYDmgrOMHm1RvvWY2IdBkv_CRxm5spCCb_OmKNk2T03TMm0fBEWveFF9wA1WizPuAgB7Ss%3D%40protonmail.com
2023-02-23 21:19:19 +01:00
LZ4CompressorState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LZ4F_compressionContext_t
Rename backup_compression.{c,h} to compression.{c,h} Compression option handling (level, algorithm or even workers) can be used across several parts of the system and not only base backups. Structures, objects and routines are renamed in consequence, to remove the concept of base backups from this part of the code making this change straight-forward. pg_receivewal, that has gained support for LZ4 since babbbb5, will make use of this infrastructure for its set of compression options, bringing more consistency with pg_basebackup. This cleanup needs to be done before releasing a beta of 15. pg_dump is a potential future target, as well, and adding more compression options to it may happen in 16~. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Georgios Kokolatos Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YlPQGNAAa04raObK@paquier.xyz
2022-04-12 06:38:54 +02:00
LZ4F_decompressOptions_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LZ4F_decompressionContext_t
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
LZ4F_errorCode_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LZ4F_preferences_t
Add LZ4 compression to pg_dump Expand pg_dump's compression streaming and file APIs to support the lz4 algorithm. The newly added compress_lz4.{c,h} files cover all the functionality of the aforementioned APIs. Minor changes were necessary in various pg_backup_* files, where code for the 'lz4' file suffix has been added, as well as pg_dump's compression option parsing. Author: Georgios Kokolatos Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Rachel Heaton, Justin Pryzby, Shi Yu, Tomas Vondra Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/faUNEOpts9vunEaLnmxmG-DldLSg_ql137OC3JYDmgrOMHm1RvvWY2IdBkv_CRxm5spCCb_OmKNk2T03TMm0fBEWveFF9wA1WizPuAgB7Ss%3D%40protonmail.com
2023-02-23 21:19:19 +01:00
LZ4File
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
LabelProvider
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
LagTracker
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LargeObjectDesc
Faster expression evaluation and targetlist projection. This replaces the old, recursive tree-walk based evaluation, with non-recursive, opcode dispatch based, expression evaluation. Projection is now implemented as part of expression evaluation. This both leads to significant performance improvements, and makes future just-in-time compilation of expressions easier. The speed gains primarily come from: - non-recursive implementation reduces stack usage / overhead - simple sub-expressions are implemented with a single jump, without function calls - sharing some state between different sub-expressions - reduced amount of indirect/hard to predict memory accesses by laying out operation metadata sequentially; including the avoidance of nearly all of the previously used linked lists - more code has been moved to expression initialization, avoiding constant re-checks at evaluation time Future just-in-time compilation (JIT) has become easier, as demonstrated by released patches intended to be merged in a later release, for primarily two reasons: Firstly, due to a stricter split between expression initialization and evaluation, less code has to be handled by the JIT. Secondly, due to the non-recursive nature of the generated "instructions", less performance-critical code-paths can easily be shared between interpreted and compiled evaluation. The new framework allows for significant future optimizations. E.g.: - basic infrastructure for to later reduce the per executor-startup overhead of expression evaluation, by caching state in prepared statements. That'd be helpful in OLTPish scenarios where initialization overhead is measurable. - optimizing the generated "code". A number of proposals for potential work has already been made. - optimizing the interpreter. Similarly a number of proposals have been made here too. The move of logic into the expression initialization step leads to some backward-incompatible changes: - Function permission checks are now done during expression initialization, whereas previously they were done during execution. In edge cases this can lead to errors being raised that previously wouldn't have been, e.g. a NULL array being coerced to a different array type previously didn't perform checks. - The set of domain constraints to be checked, is now evaluated once during expression initialization, previously it was re-built every time a domain check was evaluated. For normal queries this doesn't change much, but e.g. for plpgsql functions, which caches ExprStates, the old set could stick around longer. The behavior around might still change. Author: Andres Freund, with significant changes by Tom Lane, changes by Heikki Linnakangas Reviewed-By: Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20161206034955.bh33paeralxbtluv@alap3.anarazel.de
2017-03-14 23:45:36 +01:00
LastAttnumInfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
Latch
Allow locking updated tuples in tuple_update() and tuple_delete() Currently, in read committed transaction isolation mode (default), we have the following sequence of actions when tuple_update()/tuple_delete() finds the tuple updated by concurrent transaction. 1. Attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete(), which returns TM_Updated. 2. Lock tuple with tuple_lock(). 3. Re-evaluate plan qual (recheck if we still need to update/delete and calculate the new tuple for update). 4. Second attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete(). This attempt should be successful, since the tuple was previously locked. This patch eliminates step 2 by taking the lock during first tuple_update()/tuple_delete() call. Heap table access method saves some efforts by checking the updated tuple once instead of twice. Future undo-based table access methods, which will start from the latest row version, can immediately place a lock there. The code in nodeModifyTable.c is simplified by removing the nested switch/case. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdua-YFw3XTprfutzGp28xXLigFtzNbuFY8yPhqeq6X5kg%40mail.gmail.com Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Pavel Borisov, Vignesh C, Mason Sharp Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Chris Travers
2023-03-22 22:13:37 +01:00
LazyTupleTableSlot
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
LerpFunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LexDescr
LexemeEntry
LexemeHashKey
LexemeInfo
LexemeKey
LexizeData
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
LibraryInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Limit
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
LimitOption
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
LimitPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LimitState
LimitStateCond
List
ListCell
ListDictionary
ListParsedLex
ListenAction
ListenActionKind
ListenStmt
LoadStmt
LocalBufferLookupEnt
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
LocalPgBackendStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LocalTransactionId
LocationIndex
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
LocationLen
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LockAcquireResult
LockClauseStrength
LockData
LockInfoData
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
LockInstanceData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LockMethod
LockMethodData
LockRelId
LockRows
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
LockRowsPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LockRowsState
LockStmt
LockTagType
LockTupleMode
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
LockViewRecurse_context
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
LockWaitPolicy
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LockingClause
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
LogOpts
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LogStmtLevel
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
LogicalDecodeBeginCB
Extend the output plugin API to allow decoding of prepared xacts. This adds six methods to the output plugin API, adding support for streaming changes of two-phase transactions at prepare time. * begin_prepare * filter_prepare * prepare * commit_prepared * rollback_prepared * stream_prepare Most of this is a simple extension of the existing methods, with the semantic difference that the transaction is not yet committed and maybe aborted later. Until now two-phase transactions were translated into regular transactions on the subscriber, and the GID was not forwarded to it. None of the two-phase commands were communicated to the subscriber. This patch provides the infrastructure for logical decoding plugins to be informed of two-phase commands Like PREPARE TRANSACTION, COMMIT PREPARED and ROLLBACK PREPARED commands with the corresponding GID. This also extends the 'test_decoding' plugin, implementing these new methods. This commit simply adds these new APIs and the upcoming patch to "allow the decoding at prepare time in ReorderBuffer" will use these APIs. Author: Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, and Dilip Kumar Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru https://postgr.es/m/CAMGcDxeqEpWj3fTXwqhSwBdXd2RS9jzwWscO-XbeCfso6ts3+Q@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-30 11:47:26 +01:00
LogicalDecodeBeginPrepareCB
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
LogicalDecodeChangeCB
LogicalDecodeCommitCB
Extend the output plugin API to allow decoding of prepared xacts. This adds six methods to the output plugin API, adding support for streaming changes of two-phase transactions at prepare time. * begin_prepare * filter_prepare * prepare * commit_prepared * rollback_prepared * stream_prepare Most of this is a simple extension of the existing methods, with the semantic difference that the transaction is not yet committed and maybe aborted later. Until now two-phase transactions were translated into regular transactions on the subscriber, and the GID was not forwarded to it. None of the two-phase commands were communicated to the subscriber. This patch provides the infrastructure for logical decoding plugins to be informed of two-phase commands Like PREPARE TRANSACTION, COMMIT PREPARED and ROLLBACK PREPARED commands with the corresponding GID. This also extends the 'test_decoding' plugin, implementing these new methods. This commit simply adds these new APIs and the upcoming patch to "allow the decoding at prepare time in ReorderBuffer" will use these APIs. Author: Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, and Dilip Kumar Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru https://postgr.es/m/CAMGcDxeqEpWj3fTXwqhSwBdXd2RS9jzwWscO-XbeCfso6ts3+Q@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-30 11:47:26 +01:00
LogicalDecodeCommitPreparedCB
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
LogicalDecodeFilterByOriginCB
Extend the output plugin API to allow decoding of prepared xacts. This adds six methods to the output plugin API, adding support for streaming changes of two-phase transactions at prepare time. * begin_prepare * filter_prepare * prepare * commit_prepared * rollback_prepared * stream_prepare Most of this is a simple extension of the existing methods, with the semantic difference that the transaction is not yet committed and maybe aborted later. Until now two-phase transactions were translated into regular transactions on the subscriber, and the GID was not forwarded to it. None of the two-phase commands were communicated to the subscriber. This patch provides the infrastructure for logical decoding plugins to be informed of two-phase commands Like PREPARE TRANSACTION, COMMIT PREPARED and ROLLBACK PREPARED commands with the corresponding GID. This also extends the 'test_decoding' plugin, implementing these new methods. This commit simply adds these new APIs and the upcoming patch to "allow the decoding at prepare time in ReorderBuffer" will use these APIs. Author: Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, and Dilip Kumar Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru https://postgr.es/m/CAMGcDxeqEpWj3fTXwqhSwBdXd2RS9jzwWscO-XbeCfso6ts3+Q@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-30 11:47:26 +01:00
LogicalDecodeFilterPrepareCB
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
LogicalDecodeMessageCB
Extend the output plugin API to allow decoding of prepared xacts. This adds six methods to the output plugin API, adding support for streaming changes of two-phase transactions at prepare time. * begin_prepare * filter_prepare * prepare * commit_prepared * rollback_prepared * stream_prepare Most of this is a simple extension of the existing methods, with the semantic difference that the transaction is not yet committed and maybe aborted later. Until now two-phase transactions were translated into regular transactions on the subscriber, and the GID was not forwarded to it. None of the two-phase commands were communicated to the subscriber. This patch provides the infrastructure for logical decoding plugins to be informed of two-phase commands Like PREPARE TRANSACTION, COMMIT PREPARED and ROLLBACK PREPARED commands with the corresponding GID. This also extends the 'test_decoding' plugin, implementing these new methods. This commit simply adds these new APIs and the upcoming patch to "allow the decoding at prepare time in ReorderBuffer" will use these APIs. Author: Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, and Dilip Kumar Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru https://postgr.es/m/CAMGcDxeqEpWj3fTXwqhSwBdXd2RS9jzwWscO-XbeCfso6ts3+Q@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-30 11:47:26 +01:00
LogicalDecodePrepareCB
LogicalDecodeRollbackPreparedCB
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
LogicalDecodeShutdownCB
Extend the output plugin API to allow decoding of prepared xacts. This adds six methods to the output plugin API, adding support for streaming changes of two-phase transactions at prepare time. * begin_prepare * filter_prepare * prepare * commit_prepared * rollback_prepared * stream_prepare Most of this is a simple extension of the existing methods, with the semantic difference that the transaction is not yet committed and maybe aborted later. Until now two-phase transactions were translated into regular transactions on the subscriber, and the GID was not forwarded to it. None of the two-phase commands were communicated to the subscriber. This patch provides the infrastructure for logical decoding plugins to be informed of two-phase commands Like PREPARE TRANSACTION, COMMIT PREPARED and ROLLBACK PREPARED commands with the corresponding GID. This also extends the 'test_decoding' plugin, implementing these new methods. This commit simply adds these new APIs and the upcoming patch to "allow the decoding at prepare time in ReorderBuffer" will use these APIs. Author: Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, and Dilip Kumar Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru https://postgr.es/m/CAMGcDxeqEpWj3fTXwqhSwBdXd2RS9jzwWscO-XbeCfso6ts3+Q@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-30 11:47:26 +01:00
LogicalDecodeStartupCB
LogicalDecodeStreamAbortCB
LogicalDecodeStreamChangeCB
LogicalDecodeStreamCommitCB
LogicalDecodeStreamMessageCB
LogicalDecodeStreamPrepareCB
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
LogicalDecodeStreamStartCB
LogicalDecodeStreamStopCB
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
LogicalDecodeStreamTruncateCB
LogicalDecodeTruncateCB
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
LogicalDecodingContext
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
LogicalErrorCallbackState
LogicalOutputPluginInit
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
LogicalOutputPluginWriterPrepareWrite
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
LogicalOutputPluginWriterUpdateProgress
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
LogicalOutputPluginWriterWrite
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
LogicalRepBeginData
LogicalRepCommitData
Add support for prepared transactions to built-in logical replication. To add support for streaming transactions at prepare time into the built-in logical replication, we need to do the following things: * Modify the output plugin (pgoutput) to implement the new two-phase API callbacks, by leveraging the extended replication protocol. * Modify the replication apply worker, to properly handle two-phase transactions by replaying them on prepare. * Add a new SUBSCRIPTION option "two_phase" to allow users to enable two-phase transactions. We enable the two_phase once the initial data sync is over. We however must explicitly disable replication of two-phase transactions during replication slot creation, even if the plugin supports it. We don't need to replicate the changes accumulated during this phase, and moreover, we don't have a replication connection open so we don't know where to send the data anyway. The streaming option is not allowed with this new two_phase option. This can be done as a separate patch. We don't allow to toggle two_phase option of a subscription because it can lead to an inconsistent replica. For the same reason, we don't allow to refresh the publication once the two_phase is enabled for a subscription unless copy_data option is false. Author: Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Sawada Masahiko, Vignesh C, Dilip Kumar, Takamichi Osumi, Greg Nancarrow Tested-By: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+opiV4aFTmWWUF9h_32=HfPOW9vZASHarT0UA5oBrtGw@mail.gmail.com
2021-07-14 04:03:50 +02:00
LogicalRepCommitPreparedTxnData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
LogicalRepCtxStruct
Rename GUC logical_decoding_mode to logical_replication_mode. Rename the developer option 'logical_decoding_mode' to the more flexible name 'logical_replication_mode' because doing so will make it easier to extend this option in the future to help test other areas of logical replication. Currently, it is used on the publisher side to allow streaming or serializing each change in logical decoding. In the upcoming patch, we are planning to use it on the subscriber. On the subscriber, it will allow serializing the changes to file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We discussed exposing this parameter as a subscription option but it did not seem advisable since it is primarily used for testing/debugging and there is no other such parameter. We also discussed having separate GUCs for publisher and subscriber but for current testing/debugging requirements, one GUC is sufficient. Author: Hou Zhijie Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Kuroda Hayato, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAy2c=Mx=FTCs+EwUsf2kQL5MmU3N18X84k0EmCXntK4g@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-30 03:32:08 +01:00
LogicalRepMode
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
LogicalRepMsgType
LogicalRepPartMapEntry
Add support for prepared transactions to built-in logical replication. To add support for streaming transactions at prepare time into the built-in logical replication, we need to do the following things: * Modify the output plugin (pgoutput) to implement the new two-phase API callbacks, by leveraging the extended replication protocol. * Modify the replication apply worker, to properly handle two-phase transactions by replaying them on prepare. * Add a new SUBSCRIPTION option "two_phase" to allow users to enable two-phase transactions. We enable the two_phase once the initial data sync is over. We however must explicitly disable replication of two-phase transactions during replication slot creation, even if the plugin supports it. We don't need to replicate the changes accumulated during this phase, and moreover, we don't have a replication connection open so we don't know where to send the data anyway. The streaming option is not allowed with this new two_phase option. This can be done as a separate patch. We don't allow to toggle two_phase option of a subscription because it can lead to an inconsistent replica. For the same reason, we don't allow to refresh the publication once the two_phase is enabled for a subscription unless copy_data option is false. Author: Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Sawada Masahiko, Vignesh C, Dilip Kumar, Takamichi Osumi, Greg Nancarrow Tested-By: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+opiV4aFTmWWUF9h_32=HfPOW9vZASHarT0UA5oBrtGw@mail.gmail.com
2021-07-14 04:03:50 +02:00
LogicalRepPreparedTxnData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
LogicalRepRelId
LogicalRepRelMapEntry
LogicalRepRelation
Add support for prepared transactions to built-in logical replication. To add support for streaming transactions at prepare time into the built-in logical replication, we need to do the following things: * Modify the output plugin (pgoutput) to implement the new two-phase API callbacks, by leveraging the extended replication protocol. * Modify the replication apply worker, to properly handle two-phase transactions by replaying them on prepare. * Add a new SUBSCRIPTION option "two_phase" to allow users to enable two-phase transactions. We enable the two_phase once the initial data sync is over. We however must explicitly disable replication of two-phase transactions during replication slot creation, even if the plugin supports it. We don't need to replicate the changes accumulated during this phase, and moreover, we don't have a replication connection open so we don't know where to send the data anyway. The streaming option is not allowed with this new two_phase option. This can be done as a separate patch. We don't allow to toggle two_phase option of a subscription because it can lead to an inconsistent replica. For the same reason, we don't allow to refresh the publication once the two_phase is enabled for a subscription unless copy_data option is false. Author: Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Sawada Masahiko, Vignesh C, Dilip Kumar, Takamichi Osumi, Greg Nancarrow Tested-By: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+opiV4aFTmWWUF9h_32=HfPOW9vZASHarT0UA5oBrtGw@mail.gmail.com
2021-07-14 04:03:50 +02:00
LogicalRepRollbackPreparedTxnData
Perform apply of large transactions by parallel workers. Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to be applied via parallel workers. In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to "partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker available. This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available. The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour). In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for publications on servers < PG16. Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-09 02:30:39 +01:00
LogicalRepStreamAbortData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
LogicalRepTupleData
LogicalRepTyp
LogicalRepWorker
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
LogicalRewriteMappingData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
LogicalTape
LogicalTapeSet
Prefetch data referenced by the WAL, take II. Introduce a new GUC recovery_prefetch. When enabled, look ahead in the WAL and try to initiate asynchronous reading of referenced data blocks that are not yet cached in our buffer pool. For now, this is done with posix_fadvise(), which has several caveats. Since not all OSes have that system call, "try" is provided so that it can be enabled where available. Better mechanisms for asynchronous I/O are possible in later work. Set to "try" for now for test coverage. Default setting to be finalized before release. The GUC wal_decode_buffer_size limits the distance we can look ahead in bytes of decoded data. The existing GUC maintenance_io_concurrency is used to limit the number of concurrent I/Os allowed, based on pessimistic heuristics used to infer that I/Os have begun and completed. We'll also not look more than maintenance_io_concurrency * 4 block references ahead. Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version) Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version) Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <Jakub.Wartak@tomtom.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Sait Talha Nisanci <Sait.Nisanci@microsoft.com> (earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ4VJN8ttxScUFM8dOKX0BrBiboo5uz1cq%3DAovOddfHpA%40mail.gmail.com
2022-04-07 09:28:40 +02:00
LsnReadQueue
LsnReadQueueNextFun
LsnReadQueueNextStatus
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
LtreeGistOptions
LtreeSignature
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MAGIC
MBuf
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
MCVItem
MCVList
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
MEMORY_BASIC_INFORMATION
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
MGVTBL
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
MINIDUMPWRITEDUMP
MINIDUMP_TYPE
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
MJEvalResult
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
MTTargetRelLookup
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
MVDependencies
MVDependency
MVNDistinct
MVNDistinctItem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Material
MaterialPath
MaterialState
MdfdVec
Change the name of the Result Cache node to Memoize "Result Cache" was never a great name for this node, but nobody managed to come up with another name that anyone liked enough. That was until David Johnston mentioned "Node Memoization", which Tom Lane revised to just "Memoize". People seem to like "Memoize", so let's do the rename. Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210708165145.GG1176@momjian.us Backpatch-through: 14, where Result Cache was introduced
2021-07-14 02:43:58 +02:00
Memoize
MemoizeEntry
MemoizeInstrumentation
MemoizeKey
MemoizePath
MemoizeState
MemoizeTuple
Improve performance of and reduce overheads of memory management Whenever we palloc a chunk of memory, traditionally, we prefix the returned pointer with a pointer to the memory context to which the chunk belongs. This is required so that we're able to easily determine the owning context when performing operations such as pfree() and repalloc(). For the AllocSet context, prior to this commit we additionally prefixed the pointer to the owning context with the size of the chunk. This made the header 16 bytes in size. This 16-byte overhead was required for all AllocSet allocations regardless of the allocation size. For the generation context, the problem was worse; in addition to the pointer to the owning context and chunk size, we also stored a pointer to the owning block so that we could track the number of freed chunks on a block. The slab allocator had a 16-byte chunk header. The changes being made here reduce the chunk header size down to just 8 bytes for all 3 of our memory context types. For small to medium sized allocations, this significantly increases the number of chunks that we can fit on a given block which results in much more efficient use of memory. Additionally, this commit completely changes the rule that pointers to palloc'd memory must be directly prefixed by a pointer to the owning memory context and instead, we now insist that they're directly prefixed by an 8-byte value where the least significant 3-bits are set to a value to indicate which type of memory context the pointer belongs to. Using those 3 bits as an index (known as MemoryContextMethodID) to a new array which stores the methods for each memory context type, we're now able to pass the pointer given to functions such as pfree() and repalloc() to the function specific to that context implementation to allow them to devise their own methods of finding the memory context which owns the given allocated chunk of memory. The reason we're able to reduce the chunk header down to just 8 bytes is because of the way we make use of the remaining 61 bits of the required 8-byte chunk header. Here we also implement a general-purpose MemoryChunk struct which makes use of those 61 remaining bits to allow the storage of a 30-bit value which the MemoryContext is free to use as it pleases, and also the number of bytes which must be subtracted from the chunk to get a reference to the block that the chunk is stored on (also 30 bits). The 1 additional remaining bit is to denote if the chunk is an "external" chunk or not. External here means that the chunk header does not store the 30-bit value or the block offset. The MemoryContext can use these external chunks at any time, but must use them if any of the two 30-bit fields are not large enough for the value(s) that need to be stored in them. When the chunk is marked as external, it is up to the MemoryContext to devise its own means to determine the block offset. Using 3-bits for the MemoryContextMethodID does mean we're limiting ourselves to only having a maximum of 8 different memory context types. We could reduce the bit space for the 30-bit value a little to make way for more than 3 bits, but it seems like it might be better to do that only if we ever need more than 8 context types. This would only be a problem if some future memory context type which does not use MemoryChunk really couldn't give up any of the 61 remaining bits in the chunk header. With this MemoryChunk, each of our 3 memory context types can quickly obtain a reference to the block any given chunk is located on. AllocSet is able to find the context to which the chunk is owned, by first obtaining a reference to the block by subtracting the block offset as is stored in the 'hdrmask' field and then referencing the block's 'aset' field. The Generation context uses the same method, but GenerationBlock did not have a field pointing back to the owning context, so one is added by this commit. In aset.c and generation.c, all allocations larger than allocChunkLimit are stored on dedicated blocks. When there's just a single chunk on a block like this, it's easy to find the block from the chunk, we just subtract the size of the block header from the chunk pointer. The size of these chunks is also known as we store the endptr on the block, so we can just subtract the pointer to the allocated memory from that. Because we can easily find the owning block and the size of the chunk for these dedicated blocks, we just always use external chunks for allocation sizes larger than allocChunkLimit. For generation.c, this sidesteps the problem of non-external MemoryChunks being unable to represent chunk sizes >= 1GB. This is less of a problem for aset.c as we store the free list index in the MemoryChunk's spare 30-bit field (the value of which will never be close to using all 30-bits). We can easily reverse engineer the chunk size from this when needed. Storing this saves AllocSetFree() from having to make a call to AllocSetFreeIndex() to determine which free list to put the newly freed chunk on. For the slab allocator, this commit adds a new restriction that slab chunks cannot be >= 1GB in size. If there happened to be any users of slab.c which used chunk sizes this large, they really should be using AllocSet instead. Here we also add a restriction that normal non-dedicated blocks cannot be 1GB or larger. It's now not possible to pass a 'maxBlockSize' >= 1GB during the creation of an AllocSet or Generation context. Allocations can still be larger than 1GB, it's just these will always be on dedicated blocks (which do not have the 1GB restriction). Author: Andres Freund, David Rowley Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpjauCRXcgcaL6+e3eqecEHoeRm9D-kcbuvBitgPnW=vw@mail.gmail.com
2022-08-29 07:15:00 +02:00
MemoryChunk
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MemoryContext
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
MemoryContextCallback
MemoryContextCallbackFunction
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
MemoryContextCounters
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MemoryContextData
Improve performance of and reduce overheads of memory management Whenever we palloc a chunk of memory, traditionally, we prefix the returned pointer with a pointer to the memory context to which the chunk belongs. This is required so that we're able to easily determine the owning context when performing operations such as pfree() and repalloc(). For the AllocSet context, prior to this commit we additionally prefixed the pointer to the owning context with the size of the chunk. This made the header 16 bytes in size. This 16-byte overhead was required for all AllocSet allocations regardless of the allocation size. For the generation context, the problem was worse; in addition to the pointer to the owning context and chunk size, we also stored a pointer to the owning block so that we could track the number of freed chunks on a block. The slab allocator had a 16-byte chunk header. The changes being made here reduce the chunk header size down to just 8 bytes for all 3 of our memory context types. For small to medium sized allocations, this significantly increases the number of chunks that we can fit on a given block which results in much more efficient use of memory. Additionally, this commit completely changes the rule that pointers to palloc'd memory must be directly prefixed by a pointer to the owning memory context and instead, we now insist that they're directly prefixed by an 8-byte value where the least significant 3-bits are set to a value to indicate which type of memory context the pointer belongs to. Using those 3 bits as an index (known as MemoryContextMethodID) to a new array which stores the methods for each memory context type, we're now able to pass the pointer given to functions such as pfree() and repalloc() to the function specific to that context implementation to allow them to devise their own methods of finding the memory context which owns the given allocated chunk of memory. The reason we're able to reduce the chunk header down to just 8 bytes is because of the way we make use of the remaining 61 bits of the required 8-byte chunk header. Here we also implement a general-purpose MemoryChunk struct which makes use of those 61 remaining bits to allow the storage of a 30-bit value which the MemoryContext is free to use as it pleases, and also the number of bytes which must be subtracted from the chunk to get a reference to the block that the chunk is stored on (also 30 bits). The 1 additional remaining bit is to denote if the chunk is an "external" chunk or not. External here means that the chunk header does not store the 30-bit value or the block offset. The MemoryContext can use these external chunks at any time, but must use them if any of the two 30-bit fields are not large enough for the value(s) that need to be stored in them. When the chunk is marked as external, it is up to the MemoryContext to devise its own means to determine the block offset. Using 3-bits for the MemoryContextMethodID does mean we're limiting ourselves to only having a maximum of 8 different memory context types. We could reduce the bit space for the 30-bit value a little to make way for more than 3 bits, but it seems like it might be better to do that only if we ever need more than 8 context types. This would only be a problem if some future memory context type which does not use MemoryChunk really couldn't give up any of the 61 remaining bits in the chunk header. With this MemoryChunk, each of our 3 memory context types can quickly obtain a reference to the block any given chunk is located on. AllocSet is able to find the context to which the chunk is owned, by first obtaining a reference to the block by subtracting the block offset as is stored in the 'hdrmask' field and then referencing the block's 'aset' field. The Generation context uses the same method, but GenerationBlock did not have a field pointing back to the owning context, so one is added by this commit. In aset.c and generation.c, all allocations larger than allocChunkLimit are stored on dedicated blocks. When there's just a single chunk on a block like this, it's easy to find the block from the chunk, we just subtract the size of the block header from the chunk pointer. The size of these chunks is also known as we store the endptr on the block, so we can just subtract the pointer to the allocated memory from that. Because we can easily find the owning block and the size of the chunk for these dedicated blocks, we just always use external chunks for allocation sizes larger than allocChunkLimit. For generation.c, this sidesteps the problem of non-external MemoryChunks being unable to represent chunk sizes >= 1GB. This is less of a problem for aset.c as we store the free list index in the MemoryChunk's spare 30-bit field (the value of which will never be close to using all 30-bits). We can easily reverse engineer the chunk size from this when needed. Storing this saves AllocSetFree() from having to make a call to AllocSetFreeIndex() to determine which free list to put the newly freed chunk on. For the slab allocator, this commit adds a new restriction that slab chunks cannot be >= 1GB in size. If there happened to be any users of slab.c which used chunk sizes this large, they really should be using AllocSet instead. Here we also add a restriction that normal non-dedicated blocks cannot be 1GB or larger. It's now not possible to pass a 'maxBlockSize' >= 1GB during the creation of an AllocSet or Generation context. Allocations can still be larger than 1GB, it's just these will always be on dedicated blocks (which do not have the 1GB restriction). Author: Andres Freund, David Rowley Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpjauCRXcgcaL6+e3eqecEHoeRm9D-kcbuvBitgPnW=vw@mail.gmail.com
2022-08-29 07:15:00 +02:00
MemoryContextMethodID
Add doubly linked count list implementation We have various requirements when using a dlist_head to keep track of the number of items in the list. This, traditionally, has been done by maintaining a counter variable in the calling code. Here we tidy this up by adding "dclist", which is very similar to dlist but also keeps track of the number of items stored in the list. Callers may use the new dclist_count() function when they need to know how many items are stored. Obtaining the count is an O(1) operation. For simplicity reasons, dclist and dlist both use dlist_node as their node type and dlist_iter/dlist_mutable_iter as their iterator type. dclists have all of the same functionality as dlists except there is no function named dclist_delete(). To remove an item from a list dclist_delete_from() must be used. This requires knowing which dclist the given item is stored in. Additionally, here we also convert some dlists where additional code exists to keep track of the number of items stored and to make these use dclists instead. Author: David Rowley Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy, Aleksander Alekseev Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrtVxr+FXEX0VbViCFKDGxA3tWDgw9oFewNXCJMmwLjLg@mail.gmail.com
2022-11-02 02:06:05 +01:00
MemoryContextMethods
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
MemoryStatsPrintFunc
Add support for MERGE SQL command MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows -- a task that would otherwise require multiple PL statements. For example, MERGE INTO target AS t USING source AS s ON t.tid = s.sid WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta WHEN MATCHED THEN DELETE WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta) WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN DO NOTHING; MERGE works with regular tables, partitioned tables and inheritance hierarchies, including column and row security enforcement, as well as support for row and statement triggers and transition tables therein. MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead. MERGE can be used from PL/pgSQL. MERGE does not support targetting updatable views or foreign tables, and RETURNING clauses are not allowed either. These limitations are likely fixable with sufficient effort. Rewrite rules are also not supported, but it's not clear that we'd want to support them. Author: Pavan Deolasee <pavan.deolasee@gmail.com> Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com> Author: Simon Riggs <simon.riggs@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier versions) Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie> (earlier versions) Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (earlier versions) Reviewed-by: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201231134736.GA25392@alvherre.pgsql
2022-03-28 16:45:58 +02:00
MergeAction
MergeActionState
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
MergeAppend
MergeAppendPath
MergeAppendState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MergeJoin
MergeJoinClause
MergeJoinState
MergePath
MergeScanSelCache
Add support for MERGE SQL command MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows -- a task that would otherwise require multiple PL statements. For example, MERGE INTO target AS t USING source AS s ON t.tid = s.sid WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta WHEN MATCHED THEN DELETE WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta) WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN DO NOTHING; MERGE works with regular tables, partitioned tables and inheritance hierarchies, including column and row security enforcement, as well as support for row and statement triggers and transition tables therein. MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead. MERGE can be used from PL/pgSQL. MERGE does not support targetting updatable views or foreign tables, and RETURNING clauses are not allowed either. These limitations are likely fixable with sufficient effort. Rewrite rules are also not supported, but it's not clear that we'd want to support them. Author: Pavan Deolasee <pavan.deolasee@gmail.com> Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com> Author: Simon Riggs <simon.riggs@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier versions) Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie> (earlier versions) Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (earlier versions) Reviewed-by: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201231134736.GA25392@alvherre.pgsql
2022-03-28 16:45:58 +02:00
MergeStmt
MergeWhenClause
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
MetaCommand
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MinMaxAggInfo
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
MinMaxAggPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MinMaxExpr
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
MinMaxMultiOptions
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MinMaxOp
MinimalTuple
MinimalTupleData
MinimalTupleTableSlot
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
MinmaxMultiOpaque
MinmaxOpaque
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ModifyTable
Split ExecUpdate and ExecDelete into reusable pieces Create subroutines ExecUpdatePrologue / ExecUpdateAct / ExecUpdateEpilogue, and similar for ExecDelete. Introduce a new struct to be used internally in nodeModifyTable.c, dubbed ModifyTableContext, which contains all context information needed to perform these operations, as well as ExecInsert and others. This allows using a different schedule and a different way of evaluating the results of these operations, which can be exploited by a later commit introducing support for MERGE. It also makes ExecUpdate and ExecDelete proper shorter and (hopefully) simpler. Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com> Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202202271724.4z7xv3cf46kv@alvherre.pgsql
2022-03-17 11:47:04 +01:00
ModifyTableContext
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ModifyTablePath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ModifyTableState
MonotonicFunction
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
MorphOpaque
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MsgType
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
MultiAssignRef
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
MultiSortSupport
MultiSortSupportData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MultiXactId
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
MultiXactMember
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
MultiXactOffset
MultiXactStateData
MultiXactStatus
Multirange datatypes Multiranges are basically sorted arrays of non-overlapping ranges with set-theoretic operations defined over them. Since v14, each range type automatically gets a corresponding multirange datatype. There are both manual and automatic mechanisms for naming multirange types. Once can specify multirange type name using multirange_type_name attribute in CREATE TYPE.  Otherwise, a multirange type name is generated automatically. If the range type name contains "range" then we change that to "multirange". Otherwise, we add "_multirange" to the end. Implementation of multiranges comes with a space-efficient internal representation format, which evades extra paddings and duplicated storage of oids.  Altogether this format allows fetching a particular range by its index in O(n). Statistic gathering and selectivity estimation are implemented for multiranges. For this purpose, stored multirange is approximated as union range without gaps. This field will likely need improvements in the future. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALNJ-vSUpQ_Y%3DjXvTxt1VYFztaBSsWVXeF1y6gTYQ4bOiWDLgQ%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a0b8026459d1e6167933be2104a6174e7d40d0ab.camel%40j-davis.com#fe7218c83b08068bfffb0c5293eceda0 Author: Paul Jungwirth, revised by me Reviewed-by: David Fetter, Corey Huinker, Jeff Davis, Pavel Stehule Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Tom Lane, Isaac Morland, David G. Johnston Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu, Alexander Korotkov
2020-12-20 05:20:33 +01:00
MultirangeIOData
MultirangeParseState
MultirangeType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NDBOX
NODE
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
NTSTATUS
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NUMCacheEntry
NUMDesc
NUMProc
NV
Name
NameData
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
NameHashEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NamedArgExpr
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
NamedLWLockTranche
NamedLWLockTrancheRequest
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
NamedTuplestoreScan
NamedTuplestoreScanState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NamespaceInfo
NestLoop
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
NestLoopParam
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NestLoopState
NestPath
NewColumnValue
NewConstraint
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
NextSampleBlock_function
NextSampleTuple_function
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
NextValueExpr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Node
NodeTag
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
NonEmptyRange
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Notification
NotificationHash
NotificationList
NotifyStmt
Nsrt
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
NtDllRoutine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NullIfExpr
NullTest
NullTestType
Change function call information to be variable length. Before this change FunctionCallInfoData, the struct arguments etc for V1 function calls are stored in, always had space for FUNC_MAX_ARGS/100 arguments, storing datums and their nullness in two arrays. For nearly every function call 100 arguments is far more than needed, therefore wasting memory. Arg and argnull being two separate arrays also guarantees that to access a single argument, two cachelines have to be touched. Change the layout so there's a single variable-length array with pairs of value / isnull. That drastically reduces memory consumption for most function calls (on x86-64 a two argument function now uses 64bytes, previously 936 bytes), and makes it very likely that argument value and its nullness are on the same cacheline. Arguments are stored in a new NullableDatum struct, which, due to padding, needs more memory per argument than before. But as usually far fewer arguments are stored, and individual arguments are cheaper to access, that's still a clear win. It's likely that there's other places where conversion to NullableDatum arrays would make sense, e.g. TupleTableSlots, but that's for another commit. Because the function call information is now variable-length allocations have to take the number of arguments into account. For heap allocations that can be done with SizeForFunctionCallInfoData(), for on-stack allocations there's a new LOCAL_FCINFO(name, nargs) macro that helps to allocate an appropriately sized and aligned variable. Some places with stack allocation function call information don't know the number of arguments at compile time, and currently variably sized stack allocations aren't allowed in postgres. Therefore allow for FUNC_MAX_ARGS space in these cases. They're not that common, so for now that seems acceptable. Because of the need to allocate FunctionCallInfo of the appropriate size, older extensions may need to update their code. To avoid subtle breakages, the FunctionCallInfoData struct has been renamed to FunctionCallInfoBaseData. Most code only references FunctionCallInfo, so that shouldn't cause much collateral damage. This change is also a prerequisite for more efficient expression JIT compilation (by allocating the function call information on the stack, allowing LLVM to optimize it away); previously the size of the call information caused problems inside LLVM's optimizer. Author: Andres Freund Reviewed-By: Tom Lane Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180605172952.x34m5uz6ju6enaem@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-01-26 23:17:52 +01:00
NullableDatum
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Numeric
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
NumericAggState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NumericDigit
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
NumericSortSupport
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
NumericSumAccum
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
NumericVar
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
OM_uint32
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
OP
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
OSAPerGroupState
OSAPerQueryState
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
OSInfo
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
OSSLCipher
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
OSSLDigest
OVERLAPPED
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ObjectAccessDrop
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ObjectAccessNamespaceSearch
ObjectAccessPostAlter
ObjectAccessPostCreate
ObjectAccessType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ObjectAddress
ObjectAddressAndFlags
ObjectAddressExtra
ObjectAddressStack
ObjectAddresses
ObjectClass
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
ObjectPropertyType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ObjectType
Add operator_with_argtypes grammar rule This makes the handling of operators similar to that of functions and aggregates. Rename node FuncWithArgs to ObjectWithArgs, to reflect the expanded use. Reviewed-by: Jim Nasby <Jim.Nasby@BlueTreble.com> Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2016-12-28 18:00:00 +01:00
ObjectWithArgs
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Offset
OffsetNumber
OffsetVarNodes_context
Oid
OidOptions
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
OkeysState
Make oldSnapshotControl a pointer to a volatile structure It was incorrectly declared as a volatile pointer to a non-volatile structure. Eliminate the OldSnapshotControl struct definition; it is really not needed. Pointed out by Tom Lane. While at it, add OldSnapshotControlData to pgindent's list of structures.
2016-04-11 22:43:52 +02:00
OldSnapshotControlData
OldSnapshotTimeMapping
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
OldToNewMapping
OldToNewMappingData
OnCommitAction
OnCommitItem
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
OnConflictAction
OnConflictClause
OnConflictExpr
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
OnConflictSetState
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
OpBtreeInterpretation
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
OpClassCacheEnt
OpExpr
OpFamilyMember
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
OpFamilyOpFuncGroup
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
OpclassInfo
Operator
Final pgindent + perltidy run for 9.6.
2016-08-15 19:42:51 +02:00
OperatorElement
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
OpfamilyInfo
OprCacheEntry
OprCacheKey
OprInfo
OprProofCacheEntry
OprProofCacheKey
OutputContext
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
OutputPluginCallbacks
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
OutputPluginOptions
OutputPluginOutputType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
OverrideSearchPath
OverrideStackEntry
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
OverridingKind
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PACE_HEADER
PACL
PATH
PBOOL
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PCtxtHandle
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
PERL_CONTEXT
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
PERL_SI
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PFN
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
PGAlignedBlock
PGAlignedXLogBlock
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGAsyncStatusType
PGCALL2
Add options to enable and disable checksums in pg_checksums An offline cluster can now work with more modes in pg_checksums: - --enable enables checksums in a cluster, updating all blocks with a correct checksum, and updating the control file at the end. - --disable disables checksums in a cluster, updating only the control file. - --check is an extra option able to verify checksums for a cluster, and the default used if no mode is specified. When running --enable or --disable, the data folder gets fsync'd for durability, and then it is followed by a control file update and flush to keep the operation consistent should the tool be interrupted, killed or the host unplugged. If no mode is specified in the options, then --check is used for compatibility with older versions of pg_checksums (named pg_verify_checksums in v11 where it was introduced). Author: Michael Banck, Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Magnus Hagander, Sergei Kornilov Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-23 00:12:55 +01:00
PGChecksummablePage
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
PGContextVisibility
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGEvent
PGEventConnDestroy
PGEventConnReset
PGEventId
PGEventProc
PGEventRegister
PGEventResultCopy
PGEventResultCreate
PGEventResultDestroy
PGFInfoFunction
Skip unnecessary stat() calls in walkdir(). Some kernels can tell us the type of a "dirent", so we can avoid a call to stat() or lstat() in many cases. Define a new function get_dirent_type() to contain that logic, for use by the backend and frontend versions of walkdir(), and perhaps other callers in future. Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> Reviewed-by: Juan José Santamaría Flecha <juanjo.santamaria@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BFzxupGGN4GpUdbzZN%2Btn6FQPHo8w0Q%2BAPH5Wz8RG%2Bww%40mail.gmail.com
2020-09-07 08:11:46 +02:00
PGFileType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGFunction
PGLZ_HistEntry
PGLZ_Strategy
PGMessageField
PGModuleMagicFunction
PGNoticeHooks
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PGOutputData
Skip empty transactions for logical replication. The current logical replication behavior is to send every transaction to subscriber even if the transaction is empty. This can happen because transaction doesn't contain changes from the selected publications or all the changes got filtered. It is a waste of CPU cycles and network bandwidth to build/transmit these empty transactions. This patch addresses the above problem by postponing the BEGIN message until the first change is sent. While processing a COMMIT message, if there was no other change for that transaction, do not send the COMMIT message. This allows us to skip sending BEGIN/COMMIT messages for empty transactions. When skipping empty transactions in synchronous replication mode, we send a keepalive message to avoid delaying such transactions. Author: Ajin Cherian, Hou Zhijie, Euler Taveira Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Takamichi Osumi, Shi Yu, Masahiko Sawada, Greg Nancarrow, Vignesh C, Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMkU=1yohp9-dv48FLoSPrMqYEyyS5ZWkaZGD41RJr10xiNo_Q@mail.gmail.com
2022-03-30 04:11:05 +02:00
PGOutputTxnData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGPROC
PGP_CFB
PGP_Context
PGP_MPI
PGP_PubKey
PGP_S2K
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PGPing
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGQueryClass
PGRUsage
PGSemaphore
PGSemaphoreData
PGShmemHeader
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
PGTargetServerType
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
PGTernaryBool
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGTransactionStatusType
PGVerbosity
Update typedef list for upcoming pgindent run.
2011-06-09 20:01:49 +02:00
PG_Locale_Strategy
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PG_Lock_Status
PG_init_t
PGcancel
Implement pipeline mode in libpq Pipeline mode in libpq lets an application avoid the Sync messages in the FE/BE protocol that are implicit in the old libpq API after each query. The application can then insert Sync at its leisure with a new libpq function PQpipelineSync. This can lead to substantial reductions in query latency. Co-authored-by: Craig Ringer <craig.ringer@enterprisedb.com> Co-authored-by: Matthieu Garrigues <matthieu.garrigues@gmail.com> Co-authored-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Aya Iwata <iwata.aya@jp.fujitsu.com> Reviewed-by: Daniel Vérité <daniel@manitou-mail.org> Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Kirk Jamison <k.jamison@fujitsu.com> Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Nikhil Sontakke <nikhils@2ndquadrant.com> Reviewed-by: Vaishnavi Prabakaran <VaishnaviP@fast.au.fujitsu.com> Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsr+YFUjJytRyV4J-16bEoiZyH=4nj+sQ7JP9ajwz=B4dMMZw@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJkzx4T5E-2cQe3dtv2R78dYFvz+in8PY7A8MArvLhs_pg75gg@mail.gmail.com
2021-03-15 22:13:42 +01:00
PGcmdQueueEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGconn
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
PGdataValue
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGlobjfuncs
PGnotify
Implement pipeline mode in libpq Pipeline mode in libpq lets an application avoid the Sync messages in the FE/BE protocol that are implicit in the old libpq API after each query. The application can then insert Sync at its leisure with a new libpq function PQpipelineSync. This can lead to substantial reductions in query latency. Co-authored-by: Craig Ringer <craig.ringer@enterprisedb.com> Co-authored-by: Matthieu Garrigues <matthieu.garrigues@gmail.com> Co-authored-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Aya Iwata <iwata.aya@jp.fujitsu.com> Reviewed-by: Daniel Vérité <daniel@manitou-mail.org> Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Kirk Jamison <k.jamison@fujitsu.com> Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Nikhil Sontakke <nikhils@2ndquadrant.com> Reviewed-by: Vaishnavi Prabakaran <VaishnaviP@fast.au.fujitsu.com> Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsr+YFUjJytRyV4J-16bEoiZyH=4nj+sQ7JP9ajwz=B4dMMZw@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJkzx4T5E-2cQe3dtv2R78dYFvz+in8PY7A8MArvLhs_pg75gg@mail.gmail.com
2021-03-15 22:13:42 +01:00
PGpipelineStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PGresAttDesc
PGresAttValue
PGresParamDesc
PGresult
PGresult_data
PHANDLE
PLAINTREE
PLAssignStmt
PLUID_AND_ATTRIBUTES
PLcword
PLpgSQL_case_when
PLpgSQL_condition
PLpgSQL_datum
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLpgSQL_datum_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_diag_item
PLpgSQL_exception
PLpgSQL_exception_block
PLpgSQL_execstate
PLpgSQL_expr
PLpgSQL_func_hashkey
PLpgSQL_function
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLpgSQL_getdiag_kind
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
PLpgSQL_if_elsif
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLpgSQL_label_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_nsitem
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLpgSQL_nsitem_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_plugin
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PLpgSQL_promise_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_raise_option
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLpgSQL_raise_option_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_rec
PLpgSQL_recfield
PLpgSQL_resolve_option
PLpgSQL_row
PLpgSQL_stmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_assert
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_assign
PLpgSQL_stmt_block
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_call
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_case
PLpgSQL_stmt_close
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_commit
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_dynexecute
PLpgSQL_stmt_dynfors
PLpgSQL_stmt_execsql
PLpgSQL_stmt_exit
PLpgSQL_stmt_fetch
PLpgSQL_stmt_forc
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_foreach_a
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_fori
PLpgSQL_stmt_forq
PLpgSQL_stmt_fors
PLpgSQL_stmt_getdiag
PLpgSQL_stmt_if
PLpgSQL_stmt_loop
PLpgSQL_stmt_open
PLpgSQL_stmt_perform
PLpgSQL_stmt_raise
PLpgSQL_stmt_return
PLpgSQL_stmt_return_next
PLpgSQL_stmt_return_query
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_rollback
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_stmt_while
PLpgSQL_trigtype
PLpgSQL_type
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLpgSQL_type_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLpgSQL_var
PLpgSQL_variable
PLwdatum
PLword
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
PLyArrayToOb
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
PLyCursorObject
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLyDatumToOb
PLyDatumToObFunc
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PLyExceptionEntry
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
PLyExecutionContext
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
PLyObToArray
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLyObToDatum
PLyObToDatumFunc
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
PLyObToDomain
PLyObToScalar
PLyObToTransform
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLyObToTuple
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLyObject_AsString_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLyPlanObject
PLyProcedure
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PLyProcedureEntry
PLyProcedureKey
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLyResultObject
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
PLySRFState
PLySavedArgs
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
PLyScalarToOb
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PLySubtransactionData
PLySubtransactionObject
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
PLyTransformToOb
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PLyTupleToOb
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PLyUnicode_FromStringAndSize_t
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PLy_elog_impl_t
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PMINIDUMP_CALLBACK_INFORMATION
PMINIDUMP_EXCEPTION_INFORMATION
PMINIDUMP_USER_STREAM_INFORMATION
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PMSignalData
PMSignalReason
PMState
POLYGON
PQArgBlock
PQEnvironmentOption
PQExpBuffer
PQExpBufferData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PQcommMethods
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PQconninfoOption
PQnoticeProcessor
PQnoticeReceiver
PQprintOpt
PQsslKeyPassHook_OpenSSL_type
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
PREDICATELOCK
PREDICATELOCKTAG
PREDICATELOCKTARGET
PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PROCESS_INFORMATION
PROCLOCK
PROCLOCKTAG
PROC_HDR
PSID
PSID_AND_ATTRIBUTES
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PSQL_COMP_CASE
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PSQL_ECHO
PSQL_ECHO_HIDDEN
PSQL_ERROR_ROLLBACK
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PTEntryArray
PTIterationArray
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PTOKEN_PRIVILEGES
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PTOKEN_USER
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
PULONG
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PUTENVPROC
Move parallel vacuum code to vacuumparallel.c. This commit moves parallel vacuum related code to a new file commands/vacuumparallel.c so that any table AM supporting indexes can utilize parallel vacuum in order to call index AM callbacks (ambulkdelete and amvacuumcleanup) with parallel workers. Another reason for this refactoring is that the parallel vacuum isn't specific to heap so it doesn't make sense to keep this code in heap/vacuumlazy.c. Author: Masahiko Sawada, based on suggestion from Andres Freund Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Haiying Tang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20211030212101.ae3qcouatwmy7tbr%40alap3.anarazel.de
2021-12-23 07:12:52 +01:00
PVIndStats
PVIndVacStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PVOID
Move parallel vacuum code to vacuumparallel.c. This commit moves parallel vacuum related code to a new file commands/vacuumparallel.c so that any table AM supporting indexes can utilize parallel vacuum in order to call index AM callbacks (ambulkdelete and amvacuumcleanup) with parallel workers. Another reason for this refactoring is that the parallel vacuum isn't specific to heap so it doesn't make sense to keep this code in heap/vacuumlazy.c. Author: Masahiko Sawada, based on suggestion from Andres Freund Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Haiying Tang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20211030212101.ae3qcouatwmy7tbr%40alap3.anarazel.de
2021-12-23 07:12:52 +01:00
PVShared
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PX_Alias
PX_Cipher
PX_Combo
PX_HMAC
PX_MD
Page
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
PageData
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
PageGistNSN
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PageHeader
PageHeaderData
PageXLogRecPtr
PagetableEntry
Pairs
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ParallelAppendState
Perform apply of large transactions by parallel workers. Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to be applied via parallel workers. In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to "partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker available. This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available. The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour). In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for publications on servers < PG16. Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-09 02:30:39 +01:00
ParallelApplyWorkerEntry
ParallelApplyWorkerInfo
ParallelApplyWorkerShared
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ParallelBitmapHeapState
tableam: Add and use scan APIs. Too allow table accesses to be not directly dependent on heap, several new abstractions are needed. Specifically: 1) Heap scans need to be generalized into table scans. Do this by introducing TableScanDesc, which will be the "base class" for individual AMs. This contains the AM independent fields from HeapScanDesc. The previous heap_{beginscan,rescan,endscan} et al. have been replaced with a table_ version. There's no direct replacement for heap_getnext(), as that returned a HeapTuple, which is undesirable for a other AMs. Instead there's table_scan_getnextslot(). But note that heap_getnext() lives on, it's still used widely to access catalog tables. This is achieved by new scan_begin, scan_end, scan_rescan, scan_getnextslot callbacks. 2) The portion of parallel scans that's shared between backends need to be able to do so without the user doing per-AM work. To achieve that new parallelscan_{estimate, initialize, reinitialize} callbacks are introduced, which operate on a new ParallelTableScanDesc, which again can be subclassed by AMs. As it is likely that several AMs are going to be block oriented, block oriented callbacks that can be shared between such AMs are provided and used by heap. table_block_parallelscan_{estimate, intiialize, reinitialize} as callbacks, and table_block_parallelscan_{nextpage, init} for use in AMs. These operate on a ParallelBlockTableScanDesc. 3) Index scans need to be able to access tables to return a tuple, and there needs to be state across individual accesses to the heap to store state like buffers. That's now handled by introducing a sort-of-scan IndexFetchTable, which again is intended to be subclassed by individual AMs (for heap IndexFetchHeap). The relevant callbacks for an AM are index_fetch_{end, begin, reset} to create the necessary state, and index_fetch_tuple to retrieve an indexed tuple. Note that index_fetch_tuple implementations need to be smarter than just blindly fetching the tuples for AMs that have optimizations similar to heap's HOT - the currently alive tuple in the update chain needs to be fetched if appropriate. Similar to table_scan_getnextslot(), it's undesirable to continue to return HeapTuples. Thus index_fetch_heap (might want to rename that later) now accepts a slot as an argument. Core code doesn't have a lot of call sites performing index scans without going through the systable_* API (in contrast to loads of heap_getnext calls and working directly with HeapTuples). Index scans now store the result of a search in IndexScanDesc->xs_heaptid, rather than xs_ctup->t_self. As the target is not generally a HeapTuple anymore that seems cleaner. To be able to sensible adapt code to use the above, two further callbacks have been introduced: a) slot_callbacks returns a TupleTableSlotOps* suitable for creating slots capable of holding a tuple of the AMs type. table_slot_callbacks() and table_slot_create() are based upon that, but have additional logic to deal with views, foreign tables, etc. While this change could have been done separately, nearly all the call sites that needed to be adapted for the rest of this commit also would have been needed to be adapted for table_slot_callbacks(), making separation not worthwhile. b) tuple_satisfies_snapshot checks whether the tuple in a slot is currently visible according to a snapshot. That's required as a few places now don't have a buffer + HeapTuple around, but a slot (which in heap's case internally has that information). Additionally a few infrastructure changes were needed: I) SysScanDesc, as used by systable_{beginscan, getnext} et al. now internally uses a slot to keep track of tuples. While systable_getnext() still returns HeapTuples, and will so for the foreseeable future, the index API (see 1) above) now only deals with slots. The remainder, and largest part, of this commit is then adjusting all scans in postgres to use the new APIs. Author: Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi, Alvaro Herrera Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-11 20:46:41 +01:00
ParallelBlockTableScanDesc
ParallelBlockTableScanWorker
ParallelBlockTableScanWorkerData
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
ParallelCompletionPtr
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ParallelContext
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ParallelExecutorInfo
Add parallel-aware hash joins. Introduce parallel-aware hash joins that appear in EXPLAIN plans as Parallel Hash Join with Parallel Hash. While hash joins could already appear in parallel queries, they were previously always parallel-oblivious and had a partial subplan only on the outer side, meaning that the work of the inner subplan was duplicated in every worker. After this commit, the planner will consider using a partial subplan on the inner side too, using the Parallel Hash node to divide the work over the available CPU cores and combine its results in shared memory. If the join needs to be split into multiple batches in order to respect work_mem, then workers process different batches as much as possible and then work together on the remaining batches. The advantages of a parallel-aware hash join over a parallel-oblivious hash join used in a parallel query are that it: * avoids wasting memory on duplicated hash tables * avoids wasting disk space on duplicated batch files * divides the work of building the hash table over the CPUs One disadvantage is that there is some communication between the participating CPUs which might outweigh the benefits of parallelism in the case of small hash tables. This is avoided by the planner's existing reluctance to supply partial plans for small scans, but it may be necessary to estimate synchronization costs in future if that situation changes. Another is that outer batch 0 must be written to disk if multiple batches are required. A potential future advantage of parallel-aware hash joins is that right and full outer joins could be supported, since there is a single set of matched bits for each hashtable, but that is not yet implemented. A new GUC enable_parallel_hash is defined to control the feature, defaulting to on. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Robert Haas Tested-By: Rafia Sabih, Prabhat Sahu Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2W=cOkiZxcg6qiFQP-dHUe09aqTrEMM7yJDrHMhDv_RA@mail.gmail.com https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=37HKyJ4U6XOLi=JgfSHM3o6B-GaeO-6hkOmneTDkH+Uw@mail.gmail.com
2017-12-21 08:39:21 +01:00
ParallelHashGrowth
ParallelHashJoinBatch
ParallelHashJoinBatchAccessor
ParallelHashJoinState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ParallelIndexScanDesc
ParallelReadyList
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ParallelSlot
Refactor and generalize the ParallelSlot machinery. Create a wrapper object, ParallelSlotArray, to encapsulate the number of slots and the slot array itself, plus some other relevant bits of information. This reduces the number of parameters we have to pass around all over the place. Allow for a ParallelSlotArray to contain slots connected to different databases within a single cluster. The current clients of this mechanism don't need this, but it is expected to be used by future patches. Defer connecting to databases until we actually need the connection for something. This is a slight behavior change for vacuumdb and reindexdb. If you specify a number of jobs that is larger than the number of objects, the extra connections will now not be used. But, on the other hand, if you specify a number of jobs that is so large that it's going to fail, the failure would previously have happened before any operations were actually started, and now it won't. Mark Dilger, reviewed by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/12ED3DA8-25F0-4B68-937D-D907CFBF08E7@enterprisedb.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/BA592F2D-F928-46FF-9516-2B827F067F57@enterprisedb.com
2021-03-11 19:17:46 +01:00
ParallelSlotArray
tableam: Add and use scan APIs. Too allow table accesses to be not directly dependent on heap, several new abstractions are needed. Specifically: 1) Heap scans need to be generalized into table scans. Do this by introducing TableScanDesc, which will be the "base class" for individual AMs. This contains the AM independent fields from HeapScanDesc. The previous heap_{beginscan,rescan,endscan} et al. have been replaced with a table_ version. There's no direct replacement for heap_getnext(), as that returned a HeapTuple, which is undesirable for a other AMs. Instead there's table_scan_getnextslot(). But note that heap_getnext() lives on, it's still used widely to access catalog tables. This is achieved by new scan_begin, scan_end, scan_rescan, scan_getnextslot callbacks. 2) The portion of parallel scans that's shared between backends need to be able to do so without the user doing per-AM work. To achieve that new parallelscan_{estimate, initialize, reinitialize} callbacks are introduced, which operate on a new ParallelTableScanDesc, which again can be subclassed by AMs. As it is likely that several AMs are going to be block oriented, block oriented callbacks that can be shared between such AMs are provided and used by heap. table_block_parallelscan_{estimate, intiialize, reinitialize} as callbacks, and table_block_parallelscan_{nextpage, init} for use in AMs. These operate on a ParallelBlockTableScanDesc. 3) Index scans need to be able to access tables to return a tuple, and there needs to be state across individual accesses to the heap to store state like buffers. That's now handled by introducing a sort-of-scan IndexFetchTable, which again is intended to be subclassed by individual AMs (for heap IndexFetchHeap). The relevant callbacks for an AM are index_fetch_{end, begin, reset} to create the necessary state, and index_fetch_tuple to retrieve an indexed tuple. Note that index_fetch_tuple implementations need to be smarter than just blindly fetching the tuples for AMs that have optimizations similar to heap's HOT - the currently alive tuple in the update chain needs to be fetched if appropriate. Similar to table_scan_getnextslot(), it's undesirable to continue to return HeapTuples. Thus index_fetch_heap (might want to rename that later) now accepts a slot as an argument. Core code doesn't have a lot of call sites performing index scans without going through the systable_* API (in contrast to loads of heap_getnext calls and working directly with HeapTuples). Index scans now store the result of a search in IndexScanDesc->xs_heaptid, rather than xs_ctup->t_self. As the target is not generally a HeapTuple anymore that seems cleaner. To be able to sensible adapt code to use the above, two further callbacks have been introduced: a) slot_callbacks returns a TupleTableSlotOps* suitable for creating slots capable of holding a tuple of the AMs type. table_slot_callbacks() and table_slot_create() are based upon that, but have additional logic to deal with views, foreign tables, etc. While this change could have been done separately, nearly all the call sites that needed to be adapted for the rest of this commit also would have been needed to be adapted for table_slot_callbacks(), making separation not worthwhile. b) tuple_satisfies_snapshot checks whether the tuple in a slot is currently visible according to a snapshot. That's required as a few places now don't have a buffer + HeapTuple around, but a slot (which in heap's case internally has that information). Additionally a few infrastructure changes were needed: I) SysScanDesc, as used by systable_{beginscan, getnext} et al. now internally uses a slot to keep track of tuples. While systable_getnext() still returns HeapTuples, and will so for the foreseeable future, the index API (see 1) above) now only deals with slots. The remainder, and largest part, of this commit is then adjusting all scans in postgres to use the new APIs. Author: Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi, Alvaro Herrera Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-11 20:46:41 +01:00
ParallelSlotResultHandler
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ParallelState
tableam: Add and use scan APIs. Too allow table accesses to be not directly dependent on heap, several new abstractions are needed. Specifically: 1) Heap scans need to be generalized into table scans. Do this by introducing TableScanDesc, which will be the "base class" for individual AMs. This contains the AM independent fields from HeapScanDesc. The previous heap_{beginscan,rescan,endscan} et al. have been replaced with a table_ version. There's no direct replacement for heap_getnext(), as that returned a HeapTuple, which is undesirable for a other AMs. Instead there's table_scan_getnextslot(). But note that heap_getnext() lives on, it's still used widely to access catalog tables. This is achieved by new scan_begin, scan_end, scan_rescan, scan_getnextslot callbacks. 2) The portion of parallel scans that's shared between backends need to be able to do so without the user doing per-AM work. To achieve that new parallelscan_{estimate, initialize, reinitialize} callbacks are introduced, which operate on a new ParallelTableScanDesc, which again can be subclassed by AMs. As it is likely that several AMs are going to be block oriented, block oriented callbacks that can be shared between such AMs are provided and used by heap. table_block_parallelscan_{estimate, intiialize, reinitialize} as callbacks, and table_block_parallelscan_{nextpage, init} for use in AMs. These operate on a ParallelBlockTableScanDesc. 3) Index scans need to be able to access tables to return a tuple, and there needs to be state across individual accesses to the heap to store state like buffers. That's now handled by introducing a sort-of-scan IndexFetchTable, which again is intended to be subclassed by individual AMs (for heap IndexFetchHeap). The relevant callbacks for an AM are index_fetch_{end, begin, reset} to create the necessary state, and index_fetch_tuple to retrieve an indexed tuple. Note that index_fetch_tuple implementations need to be smarter than just blindly fetching the tuples for AMs that have optimizations similar to heap's HOT - the currently alive tuple in the update chain needs to be fetched if appropriate. Similar to table_scan_getnextslot(), it's undesirable to continue to return HeapTuples. Thus index_fetch_heap (might want to rename that later) now accepts a slot as an argument. Core code doesn't have a lot of call sites performing index scans without going through the systable_* API (in contrast to loads of heap_getnext calls and working directly with HeapTuples). Index scans now store the result of a search in IndexScanDesc->xs_heaptid, rather than xs_ctup->t_self. As the target is not generally a HeapTuple anymore that seems cleaner. To be able to sensible adapt code to use the above, two further callbacks have been introduced: a) slot_callbacks returns a TupleTableSlotOps* suitable for creating slots capable of holding a tuple of the AMs type. table_slot_callbacks() and table_slot_create() are based upon that, but have additional logic to deal with views, foreign tables, etc. While this change could have been done separately, nearly all the call sites that needed to be adapted for the rest of this commit also would have been needed to be adapted for table_slot_callbacks(), making separation not worthwhile. b) tuple_satisfies_snapshot checks whether the tuple in a slot is currently visible according to a snapshot. That's required as a few places now don't have a buffer + HeapTuple around, but a slot (which in heap's case internally has that information). Additionally a few infrastructure changes were needed: I) SysScanDesc, as used by systable_{beginscan, getnext} et al. now internally uses a slot to keep track of tuples. While systable_getnext() still returns HeapTuples, and will so for the foreseeable future, the index API (see 1) above) now only deals with slots. The remainder, and largest part, of this commit is then adjusting all scans in postgres to use the new APIs. Author: Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi, Alvaro Herrera Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-11 20:46:41 +01:00
ParallelTableScanDesc
ParallelTableScanDescData
Perform apply of large transactions by parallel workers. Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to be applied via parallel workers. In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to "partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker available. This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available. The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour). In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for publications on servers < PG16. Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-09 02:30:39 +01:00
ParallelTransState
Move parallel vacuum code to vacuumparallel.c. This commit moves parallel vacuum related code to a new file commands/vacuumparallel.c so that any table AM supporting indexes can utilize parallel vacuum in order to call index AM callbacks (ambulkdelete and amvacuumcleanup) with parallel workers. Another reason for this refactoring is that the parallel vacuum isn't specific to heap so it doesn't make sense to keep this code in heap/vacuumlazy.c. Author: Masahiko Sawada, based on suggestion from Andres Freund Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Haiying Tang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20211030212101.ae3qcouatwmy7tbr%40alap3.anarazel.de
2021-12-23 07:12:52 +01:00
ParallelVacuumState
Provide DSM segment to ExecXXXInitializeWorker functions. Previously, executor nodes running in parallel worker processes didn't have access to the dsm_segment object used for parallel execution. In order to support resource management based on DSM segment lifetime, they need that. So create a ParallelWorkerContext object to hold it and pass it to all InitializeWorker functions. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2W=cOkiZxcg6qiFQP-dHUe09aqTrEMM7yJDrHMhDv_RA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-17 02:28:11 +01:00
ParallelWorkerContext
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ParallelWorkerInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Param
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ParamCompileHook
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ParamExecData
ParamExternData
ParamFetchHook
ParamKind
ParamListInfo
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ParamPathInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ParamRef
ParamsErrorCbData
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ParentMapEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ParseCallbackState
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
ParseExprKind
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ParseNamespaceColumn
ParseNamespaceItem
ParseParamRefHook
ParseState
ParsedLex
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ParsedScript
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ParsedText
ParsedWord
ParserSetupHook
ParserState
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PartClauseInfo
PartClauseMatchStatus
PartClauseTarget
Perform apply of large transactions by parallel workers. Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to be applied via parallel workers. In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to "partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker available. This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available. The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour). In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for publications on servers < PG16. Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-09 02:30:39 +01:00
PartialFileSetState
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PartitionBoundInfo
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
PartitionBoundInfoData
PartitionBoundSpec
PartitionCmd
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PartitionDesc
PartitionDescData
PartitionDirectory
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PartitionDirectoryEntry
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PartitionDispatch
PartitionElem
Add hash partitioning. Hash partitioning is useful when you want to partition a growing data set evenly. This can be useful to keep table sizes reasonable, which makes maintenance operations such as VACUUM faster, or to enable partition-wise join. At present, we still depend on constraint exclusion for partitioning pruning, and the shape of the partition constraints for hash partitioning is such that that doesn't work. Work is underway to fix that, which should both improve performance and make partitioning pruning work with hash partitioning. Amul Sul, reviewed and tested by Dilip Kumar, Ashutosh Bapat, Yugo Nagata, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Jesper Pedersen, and by me. A few final tweaks also by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b96fhpJAP=ALbETmeLk1Uni_GFZD938zgenhF49qgDTjaQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-10 00:07:25 +01:00
PartitionHashBound
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PartitionKey
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
PartitionListValue
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PartitionMap
PartitionPruneCombineOp
PartitionPruneContext
PartitionPruneInfo
PartitionPruneState
PartitionPruneStep
PartitionPruneStepCombine
PartitionPruneStepOp
PartitionPruningData
Implement table partitioning. Table partitioning is like table inheritance and reuses much of the existing infrastructure, but there are some important differences. The parent is called a partitioned table and is always empty; it may not have indexes or non-inherited constraints, since those make no sense for a relation with no data of its own. The children are called partitions and contain all of the actual data. Each partition has an implicit partitioning constraint. Multiple inheritance is not allowed, and partitioning and inheritance can't be mixed. Partitions can't have extra columns and may not allow nulls unless the parent does. Tuples inserted into the parent are automatically routed to the correct partition, so tuple-routing ON INSERT triggers are not needed. Tuple routing isn't yet supported for partitions which are foreign tables, and it doesn't handle updates that cross partition boundaries. Currently, tables can be range-partitioned or list-partitioned. List partitioning is limited to a single column, but range partitioning can involve multiple columns. A partitioning "column" can be an expression. Because table partitioning is less general than table inheritance, it is hoped that it will be easier to reason about properties of partitions, and therefore that this will serve as a better foundation for a variety of possible optimizations, including query planner optimizations. The tuple routing based which this patch does based on the implicit partitioning constraints is an example of this, but it seems likely that many other useful optimizations are also possible. Amit Langote, reviewed and tested by Robert Haas, Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Kapila, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Corey Huinker, Jaime Casanova, Rushabh Lathia, Erik Rijkers, among others. Minor revisions by me.
2016-12-07 19:17:43 +01:00
PartitionRangeBound
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PartitionRangeDatum
Use MINVALUE/MAXVALUE instead of UNBOUNDED for range partition bounds. Previously, UNBOUNDED meant no lower bound when used in the FROM list, and no upper bound when used in the TO list, which was OK for single-column range partitioning, but problematic with multiple columns. For example, an upper bound of (10.0, UNBOUNDED) would not be collocated with a lower bound of (10.0, UNBOUNDED), thus making it difficult or impossible to define contiguous multi-column range partitions in some cases. Fix this by using MINVALUE and MAXVALUE instead of UNBOUNDED to represent a partition column that is unbounded below or above respectively. This syntax removes any ambiguity, and ensures that if one partition's lower bound equals another partition's upper bound, then the partitions are contiguous. Also drop the constraint prohibiting finite values after an unbounded column, and just document the fact that any values after MINVALUE or MAXVALUE are ignored. Previously it was necessary to repeat UNBOUNDED multiple times, which was needlessly verbose. Note: Forces a post-PG 10 beta2 initdb. Report by Amul Sul, original patch by Amit Langote with some additional hacking by me. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b947mowpLdxL3jo3YLKngRjrq9+Ej4ymduQTfYR+8=YAYQ@mail.gmail.com
2017-07-21 10:20:47 +02:00
PartitionRangeDatumKind
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PartitionScheme
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
PartitionSpec
Allow UPDATE to move rows between partitions. When an UPDATE causes a row to no longer match the partition constraint, try to move it to a different partition where it does match the partition constraint. In essence, the UPDATE is split into a DELETE from the old partition and an INSERT into the new one. This can lead to surprising behavior in concurrency scenarios because EvalPlanQual rechecks won't work as they normally did; the known problems are documented. (There is a pending patch to improve the situation further, but it needs more review.) Amit Khandekar, reviewed and tested by Amit Langote, David Rowley, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Dilip Kumar, Amul Sul, Thomas Munro, Álvaro Herrera, Amit Kapila, and me. A few final revisions by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAJ3gD9do9o2ccQ7j7+tSgiE1REY65XRiMb=yJO3u3QhyP8EEPQ@mail.gmail.com
2018-01-19 21:33:06 +01:00
PartitionTupleRouting
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PartitionedRelPruneInfo
PartitionedRelPruningData
Implement partition-wise grouping/aggregation. If the partition keys of input relation are part of the GROUP BY clause, all the rows belonging to a given group come from a single partition. This allows aggregation/grouping over a partitioned relation to be broken down * into aggregation/grouping on each partition. This should be no worse, and often better, than the normal approach. If the GROUP BY clause does not contain all the partition keys, we can still perform partial aggregation for each partition and then finalize aggregation after appending the partial results. This is less certain to be a win, but it's still useful. Jeevan Chalke, Ashutosh Bapat, Robert Haas. The larger patch series of which this patch is a part was also reviewed and tested by Antonin Houska, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, David Rowley, Dilip Kumar, Konstantin Knizhnik, Pascal Legrand, and Rafia Sabih. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM2+6=V64_xhstVHie0Rz=KPEQnLJMZt_e314P0jaT_oJ9MR8A@mail.gmail.com
2018-03-22 17:49:48 +01:00
PartitionwiseAggregateType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PasswordType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Path
PathClauseUsage
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
PathCostComparison
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
PathHashStack
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PathKey
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
PathKeyInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PathKeysComparison
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
PathTarget
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PathkeyMutatorState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PathkeySortCost
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
PatternInfo
PatternInfoArray
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Pattern_Prefix_Status
Pattern_Type
Refactor the fsync queue for wider use. Previously, md.c and checkpointer.c were tightly integrated so that fsync calls could be handed off and processed in the background. Introduce a system of callbacks and file tags, so that other modules can hand off fsync work in the same way. For now only md.c uses the new interface, but other users are being proposed. Since there may be use cases that are not strictly SMGR implementations, use a new function table for sync handlers rather than extending the traditional SMGR one. Instead of using a bitmapset of segment numbers for each RelFileNode in the checkpointer's hash table, make the segment number part of the key. This requires sending explicit "forget" requests for every segment individually when relations are dropped, but suits the file layout schemes of proposed future users better (ie sparse or high segment numbers). Author: Shawn Debnath and Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro, Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2gTANm=e3ARnJT=n0h8hf88wqmaZxk0JYkxw+b21fNrw@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 10:56:03 +02:00
PendingFsyncEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PendingRelDelete
PendingRelSync
PendingUnlinkEntry
Allow to trigger kernel writeback after a configurable number of writes. Currently writes to the main data files of postgres all go through the OS page cache. This means that some operating systems can end up collecting a large number of dirty buffers in their respective page caches. When these dirty buffers are flushed to storage rapidly, be it because of fsync(), timeouts, or dirty ratios, latency for other reads and writes can increase massively. This is the primary reason for regular massive stalls observed in real world scenarios and artificial benchmarks; on rotating disks stalls on the order of hundreds of seconds have been observed. On linux it is possible to control this by reducing the global dirty limits significantly, reducing the above problem. But global configuration is rather problematic because it'll affect other applications; also PostgreSQL itself doesn't always generally want this behavior, e.g. for temporary files it's undesirable. Several operating systems allow some control over the kernel page cache. Linux has sync_file_range(2), several posix systems have msync(2) and posix_fadvise(2). sync_file_range(2) is preferable because it requires no special setup, whereas msync() requires the to-be-flushed range to be mmap'ed. For the purpose of flushing dirty data posix_fadvise(2) is the worst alternative, as flushing dirty data is just a side-effect of POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED, which also removes the pages from the page cache. Thus the feature is enabled by default only on linux, but can be enabled on all systems that have any of the above APIs. While desirable and likely possible this patch does not contain an implementation for windows. With the infrastructure added, writes made via checkpointer, bgwriter and normal user backends can be flushed after a configurable number of writes. Each of these sources of writes controlled by a separate GUC, checkpointer_flush_after, bgwriter_flush_after and backend_flush_after respectively; they're separate because the number of flushes that are good are separate, and because the performance considerations of controlled flushing for each of these are different. A later patch will add checkpoint sorting - after that flushes from the ckeckpoint will almost always be desirable. Bgwriter flushes are most of the time going to be random, which are slow on lots of storage hardware. Flushing in backends works well if the storage and bgwriter can keep up, but if not it can have negative consequences. This patch is likely to have negative performance consequences without checkpoint sorting, but unfortunately so has sorting without flush control. Discussion: alpine.DEB.2.10.1506011320000.28433@sto Author: Fabien Coelho and Andres Freund
2016-02-19 21:13:05 +01:00
PendingWriteback
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
PerLockTagEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PerlInterpreter
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
Perl_ppaddr_t
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
Permutation
PermutationStep
PermutationStepBlocker
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PermutationStepBlockerType
Make archiver process an auxiliary process. This commit changes WAL archiver process so that it's treated as an auxiliary process and can use shared memory. This is an infrastructure patch required for upcoming shared-memory based stats collector patch series. These patch series basically need any processes including archiver that can report the statistics to access to shared memory. Since this patch itself is useful to simplify the code and when users monitor the status of archiver, it's committed separately in advance. This commit simplifies the code for WAL archiving. For example, previously backends need to signal to archiver via postmaster when they notify archiver that there are some WAL files to archive. On the other hand, this commit removes that signal to postmaster and enables backends to notify archier directly using shared latch. Also, as the side of this change, the information about archiver process becomes viewable at pg_stat_activity view. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Julien Rouhaud, Tomas Vondra, Arthur Zakirov, Fujii Masao Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180629.173418.190173462.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp
2021-03-15 05:13:14 +01:00
PgArchData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PgBackendGSSStatus
PgBackendSSLStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgBackendStatus
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PgBenchExpr
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
PgBenchExprLink
PgBenchExprList
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PgBenchExprType
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
PgBenchFunction
PgBenchValue
PgBenchValueType
Add options to enable and disable checksums in pg_checksums An offline cluster can now work with more modes in pg_checksums: - --enable enables checksums in a cluster, updating all blocks with a correct checksum, and updating the control file at the end. - --disable disables checksums in a cluster, updating only the control file. - --check is an extra option able to verify checksums for a cluster, and the default used if no mode is specified. When running --enable or --disable, the data folder gets fsync'd for durability, and then it is followed by a control file update and flush to keep the operation consistent should the tool be interrupted, killed or the host unplugged. If no mode is specified in the options, then --check is used for compatibility with older versions of pg_checksums (named pg_verify_checksums in v11 where it was introduced). Author: Michael Banck, Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Magnus Hagander, Sergei Kornilov Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
2019-03-23 00:12:55 +01:00
PgChecksumMode
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgFdwAnalyzeState
PgFdwConnState
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
PgFdwDirectModifyState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgFdwModifyState
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
PgFdwOption
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PgFdwPathExtraData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgFdwRelationInfo
PgFdwScanState
PgIfAddrCallback
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
PgStatShared_Archiver
PgStatShared_BgWriter
PgStatShared_Checkpointer
PgStatShared_Common
PgStatShared_Database
PgStatShared_Function
PgStatShared_HashEntry
pgstat: Infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics, documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review easier. While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies, it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly, pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers / compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers. The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse, and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend, autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite). What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope of the already large patchset manageable. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
2023-02-09 05:53:42 +01:00
PgStatShared_IO
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
PgStatShared_Relation
PgStatShared_ReplSlot
PgStatShared_SLRU
PgStatShared_Subscription
PgStatShared_Wal
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
PgStat_ArchiverStats
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
PgStat_BackendSubEntry
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
PgStat_BgWriterStats
pgstat: Infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics, documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review easier. While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies, it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly, pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers / compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers. The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse, and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend, autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite). What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope of the already large patchset manageable. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
2023-02-09 05:53:42 +01:00
PgStat_BktypeIO
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
PgStat_CheckpointerStats
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgStat_Counter
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
PgStat_EntryRef
PgStat_EntryRefHashEntry
PgStat_FetchConsistency
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgStat_FunctionCallUsage
PgStat_FunctionCounts
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
PgStat_HashKey
pgstat: Infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics, documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review easier. While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies, it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly, pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers / compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers. The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse, and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend, autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite). What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope of the already large patchset manageable. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
2023-02-09 05:53:42 +01:00
PgStat_IO
pgstat: introduce PgStat_Kind enum. Will be used by following commits to generalize stats infrastructure. Kept separate to allow commits stand reasonably on their own. Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220404041516.cctrvpadhuriawlq@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 02:56:19 +02:00
PgStat_Kind
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
PgStat_KindInfo
PgStat_LocalState
pgstat: scaffolding for transactional stats creation / drop. One problematic part of the current statistics collector design is that there is no reliable way of getting rid of statistics entries. Because of that pgstat_vacuum_stat() (called by [auto-]vacuum) matches all stats for the current database with the catalog contents and tries to drop now-superfluous entries. That's quite expensive. What's worse, it doesn't work on physical replicas, despite physical replicas collection statistics entries. This commit introduces infrastructure to create / drop statistics entries transactionally, together with the underlying catalog objects (functions, relations, subscriptions). pgstat_xact.c maintains a list of stats entries created / dropped transactionally in the current transaction. To ensure the removal of statistics entries is durable dropped statistics entries are included in commit / abort (and prepare) records, which also ensures that stats entries are dropped on standbys. Statistics entries created separately from creating the underlying catalog object (e.g. when stats were previously lost due to an immediate restart) are *not* WAL logged. However that can only happen outside of the transaction creating the catalog object, so it does not lead to "leaked" statistics entries. For this to work, functions creating / dropping functions / relations / subscriptions need to call into pgstat. For subscriptions this was already done when dropping subscriptions, via pgstat_report_subscription_drop() (now renamed to pgstat_drop_subscription()). This commit does not actually drop stats yet, it just provides the infrastructure. It is however a largely independent piece of infrastructure, so committing it separately makes sense. Bumps XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC. Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 03:22:22 +02:00
PgStat_PendingDroppedStatsItem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgStat_SLRUStats
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
PgStat_ShmemControl
PgStat_Snapshot
PgStat_SnapshotEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgStat_StatDBEntry
PgStat_StatFuncEntry
Use HTAB for replication slot statistics. Previously, we used to use the array of size max_replication_slots to store stats for replication slots. But that had two problems in the cases where a message for dropping a slot gets lost: 1) the stats for the new slot are not recorded if the array is full and 2) writing beyond the end of the array if the user reduces the max_replication_slots. This commit uses HTAB for replication slot statistics, resolving both problems. Now, pgstat_vacuum_stat() search for all the dead replication slots in stats hashtable and tell the collector to remove them. To avoid showing the stats for the already-dropped slots, pg_stat_replication_slots view searches slot stats by the slot name taken from pg_replication_slots. Also, we send a message for creating a slot at slot creation, initializing the stats. This reduces the possibility that the stats are accumulated into the old slot stats when a message for dropping a slot gets lost. Reported-by: Andres Freund Author: Sawada Masahiko, test case by Vignesh C Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Vignesh C, Dilip Kumar Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319185247.ldebgpdaxsowiflw@alap3.anarazel.de
2021-04-27 05:39:11 +02:00
PgStat_StatReplSlotEntry
Reconsider pg_stat_subscription_workers view. It was decided (refer to the Discussion link below) that the stats collector is not an appropriate place to store the error information of subscription workers. This patch changes the pg_stat_subscription_workers view (introduced by commit 8d74fc96db) so that it stores only statistics counters: apply_error_count and sync_error_count, and has one entry for each subscription. The removed error information such as error-XID and the error message would be stored in another way in the future which is more reliable and persistent. After removing these error details, there is no longer any relation information, so the subscription statistics are now a cluster-wide statistics. The patch also changes the view name to pg_stat_subscription_stats since the word "worker" is an implementation detail that we use one worker for one tablesync and one apply. Author: Masahiko Sawada, based on suggestions by Andres Freund Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Haiying Tang, Takamichi Osumi, Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220125063131.4cmvsxbz2tdg6g65@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-03-01 01:47:52 +01:00
PgStat_StatSubEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PgStat_StatTabEntry
PgStat_SubXactStatus
PgStat_TableCounts
PgStat_TableStatus
PgStat_TableXactStatus
Add pg_stat_wal statistics view. This view shows the statistics about WAL activity. Currently it has only two columns: wal_buffers_full and stats_reset. wal_buffers_full column indicates the number of times WAL data was written to the disk because WAL buffers got full. This information is useful when tuning wal_buffers. stats_reset column indicates the time at which these statistics were last reset. pg_stat_wal view is also the basic infrastructure to expose other various statistics about WAL activity later. Bump PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID due to the change in pgstat format. Bump catalog version. Author: Masahiro Ikeda Reviewed-by: Takayuki Tsunakawa, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Amit Kapila, Fujii Masao Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/188bd3f2d2233cf97753b5ced02bb050@oss.nttdata.com
2020-10-02 03:17:11 +02:00
PgStat_WalStats
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
PgXmlErrorContext
PgXmlStrictness
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Pg_finfo_record
Pg_magic_struct
PipeProtoChunk
PipeProtoHeader
PlaceHolderInfo
PlaceHolderVar
Plan
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
PlanDirectModify_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PlanForeignModify_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PlanInvalItem
PlanRowMark
PlanState
PlannedStmt
PlannerGlobal
PlannerInfo
PlannerParamItem
Point
Pointer
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PolicyInfo
PolyNumAggState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Pool
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PopulateArrayContext
PopulateArrayState
PopulateRecordCache
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PopulateRecordsetState
Port
Portal
PortalHashEnt
PortalStatus
PortalStrategy
PostParseColumnRefHook
PostgresPollingStatusType
PostingItem
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
PostponedQual
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PreParseColumnRefHook
PredClass
PredIterInfo
PredIterInfoData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PredXactList
PredXactListElement
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
PredicateLockData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PredicateLockTargetType
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
PrefetchBufferResult
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PrepParallelRestorePtrType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PrepareStmt
PreparedStatement
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
PresortedKeyData
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
PrewarmType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PrintExtraTocPtrType
PrintTocDataPtrType
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
PrintfArgType
PrintfArgValue
PrintfTarget
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PrinttupAttrInfo
PrivTarget
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
PrivateRefCountEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ProcArrayStruct
ProcLangInfo
ProcSignalBarrierType
ProcSignalHeader
ProcSignalReason
ProcSignalSlot
ProcState
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
ProcWaitStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ProcessUtilityContext
ProcessUtility_hook_type
ProcessingMode
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ProgressCommandType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ProjectSet
ProjectSetPath
ProjectSetState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ProjectionInfo
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ProjectionPath
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PromptInterruptContext
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ProtocolVersion
PrsStorage
PruneState
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
PruneStepResult
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
PsqlScanCallbacks
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PsqlScanQuoteType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PsqlScanResult
PsqlScanState
PsqlScanStateData
PsqlSettings
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
Publication
PublicationActions
Allow specifying row filters for logical replication of tables. This feature adds row filtering for publication tables. When a publication is defined or modified, an optional WHERE clause can be specified. Rows that don't satisfy this WHERE clause will be filtered out. This allows a set of tables to be partially replicated. The row filter is per table. A new row filter can be added simply by specifying a WHERE clause after the table name. The WHERE clause must be enclosed by parentheses. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes UPDATE and/or DELETE operations must contain only columns that are covered by REPLICA IDENTITY. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes INSERT can use any column. If the row filter evaluates to NULL, it is regarded as "false". The WHERE clause only allows simple expressions that don't have user-defined functions, user-defined operators, user-defined types, user-defined collations, non-immutable built-in functions, or references to system columns. These restrictions could be addressed in the future. If you choose to do the initial table synchronization, only data that satisfies the row filters is copied to the subscriber. If the subscription has several publications in which a table has been published with different WHERE clauses, rows that satisfy ANY of the expressions will be copied. If a subscriber is a pre-15 version, the initial table synchronization won't use row filters even if they are defined in the publisher. The row filters are applied before publishing the changes. If the subscription has several publications in which the same table has been published with different filters (for the same publish operation), those expressions get OR'ed together so that rows satisfying any of the expressions will be replicated. This means all the other filters become redundant if (a) one of the publications have no filter at all, (b) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES, (c) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA and the table belongs to that same schema. If your publication contains a partitioned table, the publication parameter publish_via_partition_root determines if it uses the partition's row filter (if the parameter is false, the default) or the root partitioned table's row filter. Psql commands \dRp+ and \d <table-name> will display any row filters. Author: Hou Zhijie, Euler Taveira, Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Haiying Tang, Amit Kapila, Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Alvaro Herrera, Andres Freund, Wei Wang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAHE3wggb715X%2BmK_DitLXF25B%3DjE6xyNCH4YOwM860JR7HarGQ%40mail.gmail.com
2022-02-22 03:24:12 +01:00
PublicationDesc
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PublicationInfo
Allow publishing the tables of schema. A new option "FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA" in Create/Alter Publication allows one or more schemas to be specified, whose tables are selected by the publisher for sending the data to the subscriber. The new syntax allows specifying both the tables and schemas. For example: CREATE PUBLICATION pub1 FOR TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; OR ALTER PUBLICATION pub1 ADD TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; A new system table "pg_publication_namespace" has been added, to maintain the schemas that the user wants to publish through the publication. Modified the output plugin (pgoutput) to publish the changes if the relation is part of schema publication. Updates pg_dump to identify and dump schema publications. Updates the \d family of commands to display schema publications and \dRp+ variant will now display associated schemas if any. Author: Vignesh C, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila Syntax-Suggested-by: Tom Lane, Alvaro Herrera Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Masahiko Sawada, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Haiying Tang, Ajin Cherian, Rahila Syed, Bharath Rupireddy, Mark Dilger Tested-by: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALDaNm0OANxuJ6RXqwZsM1MSY4s19nuH3734j4a72etDwvBETQ@mail.gmail.com
2021-10-27 04:14:52 +02:00
PublicationObjSpec
PublicationObjSpecType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
PublicationPartOpt
PublicationRelInfo
Allow publishing the tables of schema. A new option "FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA" in Create/Alter Publication allows one or more schemas to be specified, whose tables are selected by the publisher for sending the data to the subscriber. The new syntax allows specifying both the tables and schemas. For example: CREATE PUBLICATION pub1 FOR TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; OR ALTER PUBLICATION pub1 ADD TABLE t1,t2,t3, ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA s1,s2; A new system table "pg_publication_namespace" has been added, to maintain the schemas that the user wants to publish through the publication. Modified the output plugin (pgoutput) to publish the changes if the relation is part of schema publication. Updates pg_dump to identify and dump schema publications. Updates the \d family of commands to display schema publications and \dRp+ variant will now display associated schemas if any. Author: Vignesh C, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila Syntax-Suggested-by: Tom Lane, Alvaro Herrera Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Masahiko Sawada, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Haiying Tang, Ajin Cherian, Rahila Syed, Bharath Rupireddy, Mark Dilger Tested-by: Haiying Tang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALDaNm0OANxuJ6RXqwZsM1MSY4s19nuH3734j4a72etDwvBETQ@mail.gmail.com
2021-10-27 04:14:52 +02:00
PublicationSchemaInfo
Add PublicationTable and PublicationRelInfo structs These encapsulate a relation when referred from replication DDL. Currently they don't do anything useful (they're just wrappers around RangeVar and Relation respectively) but in the future they'll be used to carry column lists. Extracted from a larger patch by Rahila Syed. Author: Rahila Syed <rahilasyed90@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28vddB_NFdRVpuyRBJEBWjz4BSyTB=_ektNRH8NJ1jf95g@mail.gmail.com
2021-09-06 19:24:50 +02:00
PublicationTable
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PullFilter
PullFilterOps
PushFilter
PushFilterOps
PushFunction
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
PyCFunction
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
PyMappingMethods
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PyMethodDef
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
PyModuleDef
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
PyObject
PySequenceMethods
PyTypeObject
Py_ssize_t
QPRS_STATE
QTN2QTState
QTNode
QUERYTYPE
QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN
QualCost
QualItem
Query
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
QueryCompletion
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
QueryDesc
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
QueryEnvironment
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
QueryInfo
QueryItem
QueryItemType
QueryMode
QueryOperand
QueryOperator
QueryRepresentation
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
QueryRepresentationOperand
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
QuerySource
QueueBackendStatus
QueuePosition
QuitSignalReason
RBTNode
RBTOrderControl
RBTree
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
RBTreeIterator
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RIX
RI_CompareHashEntry
RI_CompareKey
RI_ConstraintInfo
RI_QueryHashEntry
RI_QueryKey
RTEKind
Rework query relation permission checking Currently, information about the permissions to be checked on relations mentioned in a query is stored in their range table entries. So the executor must scan the entire range table looking for relations that need to have permissions checked. This can make the permission checking part of the executor initialization needlessly expensive when many inheritance children are present in the range range. While the permissions need not be checked on the individual child relations, the executor still must visit every range table entry to filter them out. This commit moves the permission checking information out of the range table entries into a new plan node called RTEPermissionInfo. Every top-level (inheritance "root") RTE_RELATION entry in the range table gets one and a list of those is maintained alongside the range table. This new list is initialized by the parser when initializing the range table. The rewriter can add more entries to it as rules/views are expanded. Finally, the planner combines the lists of the individual subqueries into one flat list that is passed to the executor for checking. To make it quick to find the RTEPermissionInfo entry belonging to a given relation, RangeTblEntry gets a new Index field 'perminfoindex' that stores the corresponding RTEPermissionInfo's index in the query's list of the latter. ExecutorCheckPerms_hook has gained another List * argument; the signature is now: typedef bool (*ExecutorCheckPerms_hook_type) (List *rangeTable, List *rtePermInfos, bool ereport_on_violation); The first argument is no longer used by any in-core uses of the hook, but we leave it in place because there may be other implementations that do. Implementations should likely scan the rtePermInfos list to determine which operations to allow or deny. Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqGjJDmUhDSfv-U2qhKJjt9ST7Xh9JXC_irsAQ1TAUsJYg@mail.gmail.com
2022-12-06 16:09:24 +01:00
RTEPermissionInfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
RWConflict
RWConflictPoolHeader
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
Range
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
RangeBound
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
RangeBox
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RangeFunction
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
RangeIOData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RangeQueryClause
RangeSubselect
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
RangeTableFunc
RangeTableFuncCol
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
RangeTableSample
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RangeTblEntry
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
RangeTblFunction
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RangeTblRef
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
RangeType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RangeVar
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
RangeVarGetRelidCallback
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
Ranges
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RawColumnDefault
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
RawParseMode
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
RawStmt
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ReInitializeDSMForeignScan_function
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ReScanForeignScan_function
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ReadBufPtrType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ReadBufferMode
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ReadBytePtrType
ReadExtraTocPtrType
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ReadFunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ReadLocalXLogPageNoWaitPrivate
Add replication command READ_REPLICATION_SLOT The command is supported for physical slots for now, and returns the type of slot, its restart_lsn and its restart_tli. This will be useful for an upcoming patch related to pg_receivewal, to allow the tool to be able to stream from the position of a slot, rather than the last WAL position flushed by the backend (as reported by IDENTIFY_SYSTEM) if the archive directory is found as empty, which would be an advantage in the case of switching to a different archive locations with the same slot used to avoid holes in WAL segment archives. Author: Ronan Dunklau Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier, Bharath Rupireddy Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18708360.4lzOvYHigE@aivenronan
2021-10-25 00:40:42 +02:00
ReadReplicationSlotCmd
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ReassignOwnedStmt
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
RecheckForeignScan_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RecordCacheEntry
RecordCompareData
RecordIOData
Update typedefs list
2018-06-30 18:07:27 +02:00
RecoveryLockListsEntry
Fix handling of WAL segments ready to be archived during crash recovery 78ea8b5 has fixed an issue related to the recycling of WAL segments on standbys depending on archive_mode. However, it has introduced a regression with the handling of WAL segments ready to be archived during crash recovery, causing those files to be recycled without getting archived. This commit fixes the regression by tracking in shared memory if a live cluster is either in crash recovery or archive recovery as the handling of WAL segments ready to be archived is different in both cases (those WAL segments should not be removed during crash recovery), and by using this new shared memory state to decide if a segment can be recycled or not. Previously, it was not possible to know if a cluster was in crash recovery or archive recovery as the shared state was able to track only if recovery was happening or not, leading to the problem. A set of TAP tests is added to close the gap here, making sure that WAL segments ready to be archived are correctly handled when a cluster is in archive or crash recovery with archive_mode set to "on" or "always", for both standby and primary. Reported-by: Benoît Lobréau Author: Jehan-Guillaume de Rorthais Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Fujii Masao, Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200331172229.40ee00dc@firost Backpatch-through: 9.5
2020-04-24 01:48:28 +02:00
RecoveryPauseState
RecoveryState
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
RecoveryTargetTimeLineGoal
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
RecoveryTargetType
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
RectBox
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RecursionContext
RecursiveUnion
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
RecursiveUnionPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RecursiveUnionState
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
RefetchForeignRow_function
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
RefreshMatViewStmt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RegProcedure
Regis
RegisNode
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
RegisteredBgWorker
Add support for partitioned tables and indexes in REINDEX Until now, REINDEX was not able to work with partitioned tables and indexes, forcing users to reindex partitions one by one. This extends REINDEX INDEX and REINDEX TABLE so as they can accept a partitioned index and table in input, respectively, to reindex all the partitions assigned to them with physical storage (foreign tables, partitioned tables and indexes are then discarded). This shares some logic with schema and database REINDEX as each partition gets processed in its own transaction after building a list of relations to work on. This choice has the advantage to minimize the number of invalid indexes to one partition with REINDEX CONCURRENTLY in the event a cancellation or failure in-flight, as the only indexes handled at once in a single REINDEX CONCURRENTLY loop are the ones from the partition being working on. Isolation tests are added to emulate some cases I bumped into while developing this feature, particularly with the concurrent drop of a leaf partition reindexed. However, this is rather limited as LOCK would cause REINDEX to block in the first transaction building the list of partitions. Per its multi-transaction nature, this new flavor cannot run in a transaction block, similarly to REINDEX SCHEMA, SYSTEM and DATABASE. Author: Justin Pryzby, Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/db12e897-73ff-467e-94cb-4af03705435f.adger.lj@alibaba-inc.com
2020-09-08 03:09:22 +02:00
ReindexErrorInfo
Invent struct ReindexIndexInfo This struct is used by ReindexRelationConcurrently to keep track of the relations to process. This saves having to obtain some data repeatedly, and has future uses as well. Reviewed-by: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Hamid Akhtar <hamid.akhtar@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201130195439.GA24598@alvherre.pgsql
2021-01-12 21:04:49 +01:00
ReindexIndexInfo
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ReindexObjectType
Refactor option handling of CLUSTER, REINDEX and VACUUM This continues the work done in b5913f6. All the options of those commands are changed to use hex values rather than enums to reduce the risk of compatibility bugs when introducing new options. Each option set is moved into a new structure that can be extended with more non-boolean options (this was already the case of VACUUM). The code of REINDEX is restructured so as manual REINDEX commands go through a single routine from utility.c, like VACUUM, to ease the allocation handling of option parameters when a command needs to go through multiple transactions. This can be used as a base infrastructure for future patches related to those commands, including reindex filtering and tablespace support. Per discussion with people mentioned below, as well as Alvaro Herrera and Peter Eisentraut. Author: Michael Paquier, Justin Pryzby Reviewed-by: Alexey Kondratov, Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/X8riynBLwxAD9uKk@paquier.xyz
2021-01-18 06:03:10 +01:00
ReindexParams
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ReindexStmt
Refactor code of reindexdb for query generation This merges the portion related to REINDEX SYSTEM into the routine already available for all the other reindex types, making the query generation cleaner. While on it, change the handling of the reindex types using an enum, which allows to get rid of the hardcoded strings used directly in the query generation present for the same purpose (aka "TABLE", "DATABASE", etc.). Per discussion with Julien Rouhaud, Tom Lane, Alvaro Herrera and me. Author: Julien Rouhaud Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOBaU_bSmSik_WRK9niDnm-3NkNZky6+uKxkmQwvthZvMWpS5A@mail.gmail.com
2019-07-02 04:36:53 +02:00
ReindexType
Change internal RelFileNode references to RelFileNumber or RelFileLocator. We have been using the term RelFileNode to refer to either (1) the integer that is used to name the sequence of files for a certain relation within the directory set aside for that tablespace/database combination; or (2) that value plus the OIDs of the tablespace and database; or occasionally (3) the whole series of files created for a relation based on those values. Using the same name for more than one thing is confusing. Replace RelFileNode with RelFileNumber when we're talking about just the single number, i.e. (1) from above, and with RelFileLocator when we're talking about all the things that are needed to locate a relation's files on disk, i.e. (2) from above. In the places where we refer to (3) as a relfilenode, instead refer to "relation storage". Since there is a ton of SQL code in the world that knows about pg_class.relfilenode, don't change the name of that column, or of other SQL-facing things that derive their name from it. On the other hand, do adjust closely-related internal terminology. For example, the structure member names dbNode and spcNode appear to be derived from the fact that the structure itself was called RelFileNode, so change those to dbOid and spcOid. Likewise, various variables with names like rnode and relnode get renamed appropriately, according to how they're being used in context. Hopefully, this is clearer than before. It is also preparation for future patches that intend to widen the relfilenumber fields from its current width of 32 bits. Variables that store a relfilenumber are now declared as type RelFileNumber rather than type Oid; right now, these are the same, but that can now more easily be changed. Dilip Kumar, per an idea from me. Reviewed also by Andres Freund. I fixed some whitespace issues, changed a couple of words in a comment, and made one other minor correction. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoamOtXbVAQf9hWFzonUo6bhhjS6toZQd7HZ-pmojtAmag@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobp7+7kmi4gkq7Y+4AM9fTvL+O1oQ4-5gFTT+6Ng-dQ=g@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-vTe79M8uDH1yprOU64MNFE+R3ODRuA+JWf27JbhY4hJw@mail.gmail.com
2022-07-06 17:39:09 +02:00
RelFileLocator
RelFileLocatorBackend
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RelIdCacheEnt
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
RelInfo
RelInfoArr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RelMapFile
RelMapping
RelOptInfo
RelOptKind
RelToCheck
RelToCluster
RelabelType
Relation
RelationData
RelationInfo
RelationPtr
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
RelationSyncEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RelcacheCallbackFunction
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
ReleaseMatchCB
Change internal RelFileNode references to RelFileNumber or RelFileLocator. We have been using the term RelFileNode to refer to either (1) the integer that is used to name the sequence of files for a certain relation within the directory set aside for that tablespace/database combination; or (2) that value plus the OIDs of the tablespace and database; or occasionally (3) the whole series of files created for a relation based on those values. Using the same name for more than one thing is confusing. Replace RelFileNode with RelFileNumber when we're talking about just the single number, i.e. (1) from above, and with RelFileLocator when we're talking about all the things that are needed to locate a relation's files on disk, i.e. (2) from above. In the places where we refer to (3) as a relfilenode, instead refer to "relation storage". Since there is a ton of SQL code in the world that knows about pg_class.relfilenode, don't change the name of that column, or of other SQL-facing things that derive their name from it. On the other hand, do adjust closely-related internal terminology. For example, the structure member names dbNode and spcNode appear to be derived from the fact that the structure itself was called RelFileNode, so change those to dbOid and spcOid. Likewise, various variables with names like rnode and relnode get renamed appropriately, according to how they're being used in context. Hopefully, this is clearer than before. It is also preparation for future patches that intend to widen the relfilenumber fields from its current width of 32 bits. Variables that store a relfilenumber are now declared as type RelFileNumber rather than type Oid; right now, these are the same, but that can now more easily be changed. Dilip Kumar, per an idea from me. Reviewed also by Andres Freund. I fixed some whitespace issues, changed a couple of words in a comment, and made one other minor correction. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoamOtXbVAQf9hWFzonUo6bhhjS6toZQd7HZ-pmojtAmag@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobp7+7kmi4gkq7Y+4AM9fTvL+O1oQ4-5gFTT+6Ng-dQ=g@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-vTe79M8uDH1yprOU64MNFE+R3ODRuA+JWf27JbhY4hJw@mail.gmail.com
2022-07-06 17:39:09 +02:00
RelfilenumberMapEntry
RelfilenumberMapKey
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Relids
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
RelocationBufferInfo
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
RelptrFreePageBtree
RelptrFreePageManager
RelptrFreePageSpanLeader
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RenameStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ReopenPtrType
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
ReorderBuffer
ReorderBufferApplyChangeCB
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ReorderBufferApplyTruncateCB
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
ReorderBufferBeginCB
ReorderBufferChange
Allow specifying row filters for logical replication of tables. This feature adds row filtering for publication tables. When a publication is defined or modified, an optional WHERE clause can be specified. Rows that don't satisfy this WHERE clause will be filtered out. This allows a set of tables to be partially replicated. The row filter is per table. A new row filter can be added simply by specifying a WHERE clause after the table name. The WHERE clause must be enclosed by parentheses. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes UPDATE and/or DELETE operations must contain only columns that are covered by REPLICA IDENTITY. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes INSERT can use any column. If the row filter evaluates to NULL, it is regarded as "false". The WHERE clause only allows simple expressions that don't have user-defined functions, user-defined operators, user-defined types, user-defined collations, non-immutable built-in functions, or references to system columns. These restrictions could be addressed in the future. If you choose to do the initial table synchronization, only data that satisfies the row filters is copied to the subscriber. If the subscription has several publications in which a table has been published with different WHERE clauses, rows that satisfy ANY of the expressions will be copied. If a subscriber is a pre-15 version, the initial table synchronization won't use row filters even if they are defined in the publisher. The row filters are applied before publishing the changes. If the subscription has several publications in which the same table has been published with different filters (for the same publish operation), those expressions get OR'ed together so that rows satisfying any of the expressions will be replicated. This means all the other filters become redundant if (a) one of the publications have no filter at all, (b) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES, (c) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA and the table belongs to that same schema. If your publication contains a partitioned table, the publication parameter publish_via_partition_root determines if it uses the partition's row filter (if the parameter is false, the default) or the root partitioned table's row filter. Psql commands \dRp+ and \d <table-name> will display any row filters. Author: Hou Zhijie, Euler Taveira, Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Haiying Tang, Amit Kapila, Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Alvaro Herrera, Andres Freund, Wei Wang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAHE3wggb715X%2BmK_DitLXF25B%3DjE6xyNCH4YOwM860JR7HarGQ%40mail.gmail.com
2022-02-22 03:24:12 +01:00
ReorderBufferChangeType
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
ReorderBufferCommitCB
ReorderBufferCommitPreparedCB
ReorderBufferDiskChange
ReorderBufferIterTXNEntry
ReorderBufferIterTXNState
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ReorderBufferMessageCB
ReorderBufferPrepareCB
Extend the output plugin API to allow decoding of prepared xacts. This adds six methods to the output plugin API, adding support for streaming changes of two-phase transactions at prepare time. * begin_prepare * filter_prepare * prepare * commit_prepared * rollback_prepared * stream_prepare Most of this is a simple extension of the existing methods, with the semantic difference that the transaction is not yet committed and maybe aborted later. Until now two-phase transactions were translated into regular transactions on the subscriber, and the GID was not forwarded to it. None of the two-phase commands were communicated to the subscriber. This patch provides the infrastructure for logical decoding plugins to be informed of two-phase commands Like PREPARE TRANSACTION, COMMIT PREPARED and ROLLBACK PREPARED commands with the corresponding GID. This also extends the 'test_decoding' plugin, implementing these new methods. This commit simply adds these new APIs and the upcoming patch to "allow the decoding at prepare time in ReorderBuffer" will use these APIs. Author: Ajin Cherian and Amit Kapila based on previous work by Nikhil Sontakke and Stas Kelvich Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, and Dilip Kumar Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02DA5F5E-CECE-4D9C-8B4B-418077E2C010@postgrespro.ru https://postgr.es/m/CAMGcDxeqEpWj3fTXwqhSwBdXd2RS9jzwWscO-XbeCfso6ts3+Q@mail.gmail.com
2020-12-30 11:47:26 +01:00
ReorderBufferRollbackPreparedCB
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
ReorderBufferStreamAbortCB
ReorderBufferStreamChangeCB
ReorderBufferStreamCommitCB
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ReorderBufferStreamMessageCB
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ReorderBufferStreamPrepareCB
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
ReorderBufferStreamStartCB
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ReorderBufferStreamStopCB
ReorderBufferStreamTruncateCB
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ReorderBufferTXN
ReorderBufferTXNByIdEnt
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
ReorderBufferToastEnt
ReorderBufferTupleBuf
ReorderBufferTupleCidEnt
ReorderBufferTupleCidKey
Fix the logical replication timeout during large DDLs. The DDLs like Refresh Materialized views that generate lots of temporary data due to rewrite rules may not be processed by output plugins (for example pgoutput). So, we won't send keep-alive messages for a long time while processing such commands and that can lead the subscriber side to timeout. We have previously fixed a similar case for large transactions in commit f95d53eded where the output plugin filters all or most of the changes but missed to handle the DDLs. We decided not to backpatch this as this adds a new callback in the existing exposed structure and moreover, users can increase the wal_sender_timeout and wal_receiver_timeout to avoid this problem. Author: Wang wei, Hou Zhijie Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Ashutosh Bapat, Shi yu, Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS3PR01MB6275478E5D29E4A563302D3D9E2B9@OS3PR01MB6275.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA5-nLARN7-3SLU_QUxfy510pmrYK6JJb=bk3hcgemAM_pAv+w@mail.gmail.com
2023-02-08 03:28:25 +01:00
ReorderBufferUpdateProgressTxnCB
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ReorderTuple
RepOriginId
ReparameterizeForeignPathByChild_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ReplaceVarsFromTargetList_context
ReplaceVarsNoMatchOption
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ReplicaIdentityStmt
ReplicationKind
ReplicationSlot
ReplicationSlotCtlData
ReplicationSlotOnDisk
ReplicationSlotPersistency
ReplicationSlotPersistentData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ReplicationState
ReplicationStateCtl
ReplicationStateOnDisk
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ResTarget
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ReservoirState
ReservoirStateData
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ResourceArray
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ResourceOwner
ResourceReleaseCallback
ResourceReleaseCallbackItem
ResourceReleasePhase
RestoreOptions
Final pgindent + perltidy run for v10.
2017-08-14 23:29:33 +02:00
RestorePass
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RestrictInfo
Result
ResultRelInfo
ResultState
ReturnSetInfo
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
ReturnStmt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
RevmapContents
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
RewriteMappingDataEntry
RewriteMappingFile
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RewriteRule
RewriteState
RmgrData
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
RmgrDescData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RmgrId
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
RoleNameItem
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
RoleSpec
RoleSpecType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RoleStmtType
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
RollupData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RowCompareExpr
RowCompareType
RowExpr
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
RowIdentityVarInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RowMarkClause
RowMarkType
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
RowSecurityDesc
RowSecurityPolicy
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
RtlGetLastNtStatus_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
RuleInfo
RuleLock
RuleStmt
RunningTransactions
RunningTransactionsData
SC_HANDLE
SECURITY_ATTRIBUTES
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SECURITY_STATUS
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SEG
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
SERIALIZABLEXACT
SERIALIZABLEXID
SERIALIZABLEXIDTAG
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SERVICE_STATUS
SERVICE_STATUS_HANDLE
SERVICE_TABLE_ENTRY
SID_AND_ATTRIBUTES
SID_IDENTIFIER_AUTHORITY
SID_NAME_USE
SISeg
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
SIZE_T
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SMgrRelation
SMgrRelationData
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
SMgrSortArray
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
SOCKADDR
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SOCKET
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SPELL
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SPICallbackArg
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SPIExecuteOptions
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SPIParseOpenOptions
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SPIPlanPtr
SPIPrepareOptions
SPITupleTable
SPLITCOST
SPNode
SPNodeData
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SPPageDesc
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
SQLDropObject
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SQLFunctionCache
SQLFunctionCachePtr
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SQLFunctionParseInfo
SQLFunctionParseInfoPtr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SSL
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SSLExtensionInfoContext
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SSL_CTX
STARTUPINFO
STRLEN
SV
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
SYNCHRONIZATION_BARRIER
SampleScan
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
SampleScanGetSampleSize_function
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
SampleScanState
SavedTransactionCharacteristics
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ScalarArrayOpExpr
ScalarArrayOpExprHashEntry
ScalarArrayOpExprHashTable
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ScalarIOData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ScalarItem
ScalarMCVItem
Scan
ScanDirection
ScanKey
ScanKeyData
ScanKeywordHashFunc
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ScanKeywordList
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ScanState
ScanTypeControl
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ScannerCallbackState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SchemaQuery
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SecBuffer
SecBufferDesc
SecLabelItem
SecLabelStmt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SeenRelsEntry
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
SelectLimit
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SelectStmt
Selectivity
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
SemTPadded
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SemiAntiJoinFactors
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SeqScan
SeqScanState
SeqTable
SeqTableData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SerCommitSeqNo
Final pgindent run with pg_bsd_indent version 2.1. This is just to provide a clean basis for comparison of the results of the new version. I did fix a typo that crept into 242dfcbaf. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200114221814.GA19630@alvherre.pgsql
2020-05-16 17:49:14 +02:00
SerialControl
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
SerializableXactHandle
Use FullTransactionId for the transaction stack. Provide GetTopFullTransactionId() and GetCurrentFullTransactionId(). The intended users of these interfaces are access methods that use xids for visibility checks but don't want to have to go back and "freeze" existing references some time later before the 32 bit xid counter wraps around. Use a new struct to serialize the transaction state for parallel query, because FullTransactionId doesn't fit into the previous serialization scheme very well. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1%2BMv%2Bmb0HFfWM9Srtc6MVe160WFurXV68iAFMcagRZ0dQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-27 22:59:19 +01:00
SerializedActiveRelMaps
Allow parallel workers to retrieve some data from Port This commit moves authn_id into a new global structure called ClientConnectionInfo (mapping to a MyClientConnectionInfo for each backend) which is intended to hold all the client information that should be shared between the backend and any of its parallel workers, access for extensions and triggers being the primary use case. There is no need to push all the data of Port to the workers, and authn_id is quite a generic concept so using a separate structure provides the best balance (the name of the structure has been suggested by Robert Haas). While on it, and per discussion as this would be useful for a potential SYSTEM_USER that can be accessed through parallel workers, a second field is added for the authentication method, copied directly from Port. ClientConnectionInfo is serialized and restored using a new parallel key and a structure tracks the length of the authn_id, making the addition of more fields straight-forward. Author: Jacob Champion Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Stephen Frost, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Michael Paquier, Julien Rouhaud Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/793d990837ae5c06a558d58d62de9378ab525d83.camel@vmware.com
2022-08-24 05:57:13 +02:00
SerializedClientConnectionInfo
Use FullTransactionId for the transaction stack. Provide GetTopFullTransactionId() and GetCurrentFullTransactionId(). The intended users of these interfaces are access methods that use xids for visibility checks but don't want to have to go back and "freeze" existing references some time later before the 32 bit xid counter wraps around. Use a new struct to serialize the transaction state for parallel query, because FullTransactionId doesn't fit into the previous serialization scheme very well. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1%2BMv%2Bmb0HFfWM9Srtc6MVe160WFurXV68iAFMcagRZ0dQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-27 22:59:19 +01:00
SerializedRanges
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
SerializedReindexState
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
SerializedSnapshotData
Use FullTransactionId for the transaction stack. Provide GetTopFullTransactionId() and GetCurrentFullTransactionId(). The intended users of these interfaces are access methods that use xids for visibility checks but don't want to have to go back and "freeze" existing references some time later before the 32 bit xid counter wraps around. Use a new struct to serialize the transaction state for parallel query, because FullTransactionId doesn't fit into the previous serialization scheme very well. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1%2BMv%2Bmb0HFfWM9Srtc6MVe160WFurXV68iAFMcagRZ0dQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-27 22:59:19 +01:00
SerializedTransactionState
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
Session
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SessionBackupState
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
SessionEndType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SetConstraintState
SetConstraintStateData
SetConstraintTriggerData
Faster expression evaluation and targetlist projection. This replaces the old, recursive tree-walk based evaluation, with non-recursive, opcode dispatch based, expression evaluation. Projection is now implemented as part of expression evaluation. This both leads to significant performance improvements, and makes future just-in-time compilation of expressions easier. The speed gains primarily come from: - non-recursive implementation reduces stack usage / overhead - simple sub-expressions are implemented with a single jump, without function calls - sharing some state between different sub-expressions - reduced amount of indirect/hard to predict memory accesses by laying out operation metadata sequentially; including the avoidance of nearly all of the previously used linked lists - more code has been moved to expression initialization, avoiding constant re-checks at evaluation time Future just-in-time compilation (JIT) has become easier, as demonstrated by released patches intended to be merged in a later release, for primarily two reasons: Firstly, due to a stricter split between expression initialization and evaluation, less code has to be handled by the JIT. Secondly, due to the non-recursive nature of the generated "instructions", less performance-critical code-paths can easily be shared between interpreted and compiled evaluation. The new framework allows for significant future optimizations. E.g.: - basic infrastructure for to later reduce the per executor-startup overhead of expression evaluation, by caching state in prepared statements. That'd be helpful in OLTPish scenarios where initialization overhead is measurable. - optimizing the generated "code". A number of proposals for potential work has already been made. - optimizing the interpreter. Similarly a number of proposals have been made here too. The move of logic into the expression initialization step leads to some backward-incompatible changes: - Function permission checks are now done during expression initialization, whereas previously they were done during execution. In edge cases this can lead to errors being raised that previously wouldn't have been, e.g. a NULL array being coerced to a different array type previously didn't perform checks. - The set of domain constraints to be checked, is now evaluated once during expression initialization, previously it was re-built every time a domain check was evaluated. For normal queries this doesn't change much, but e.g. for plpgsql functions, which caches ExprStates, the old set could stick around longer. The behavior around might still change. Author: Andres Freund, with significant changes by Tom Lane, changes by Heikki Linnakangas Reviewed-By: Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20161206034955.bh33paeralxbtluv@alap3.anarazel.de
2017-03-14 23:45:36 +01:00
SetExprState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SetFunctionReturnMode
SetOp
SetOpCmd
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SetOpPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SetOpState
SetOpStatePerGroup
SetOpStrategy
SetOperation
SetOperationStmt
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
SetQuantifier
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SetToDefault
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SetupWorkerPtrType
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ShDependObjectInfo
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
SharedAggInfo
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SharedBitmapState
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SharedDependencyObjectType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SharedDependencyType
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SharedExecutorInstrumentation
Add infrastructure for sharing temporary files between backends. SharedFileSet allows temporary files to be created by one backend and then exported for read-only access by other backends, with clean-up managed by reference counting associated with a DSM segment. This includes changes to fd.c and buffile.c to support the new kind of temporary file. This will be used by an upcoming patch adding support for parallel hash joins. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan, Andres Freund, Robert Haas, Rushabh Lathia Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2W=cOkiZxcg6qiFQP-dHUe09aqTrEMM7yJDrHMhDv_RA@mail.gmail.com https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznJ_UgLux=_jTgCQ4yFz0iBntudsNKa1we3kN1BAG=88w@mail.gmail.com
2017-12-02 01:30:56 +01:00
SharedFileSet
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
SharedHashInfo
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
SharedIncrementalSortInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SharedInvalCatalogMsg
SharedInvalCatcacheMsg
SharedInvalRelcacheMsg
SharedInvalRelmapMsg
SharedInvalSmgrMsg
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
SharedInvalSnapshotMsg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SharedInvalidationMessage
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SharedJitInstrumentation
Change the name of the Result Cache node to Memoize "Result Cache" was never a great name for this node, but nobody managed to come up with another name that anyone liked enough. That was until David Johnston mentioned "Node Memoization", which Tom Lane revised to just "Memoize". People seem to like "Memoize", so let's do the rename. Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210708165145.GG1176@momjian.us Backpatch-through: 14, where Result Cache was introduced
2021-07-14 02:43:58 +02:00
SharedMemoizeInfo
Add support for coordinating record typmods among parallel workers. Tuples can have type RECORDOID and a typmod number that identifies a blessed TupleDesc in a backend-private cache. To support the sharing of such tuples through shared memory and temporary files, provide a typmod registry in shared memory. To achieve that, introduce per-session DSM segments, created on demand when a backend first runs a parallel query. The per-session DSM segment has a table-of-contents just like the per-query DSM segment, and initially the contents are a shared record typmod registry and a DSA area to provide the space it needs to grow. State relating to the current session is accessed via a Session object reached through global variable CurrentSession that may require significant redesign further down the road as we figure out what else needs to be shared or remodelled. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=0ZtQ-SpsgCyzzYpsXS6e=kZWqk3g5Ygn3MDV7A8dabUA@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-15 04:59:21 +02:00
SharedRecordTableEntry
SharedRecordTableKey
SharedRecordTypmodRegistry
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
SharedSortInfo
Add shared tuplestores. SharedTuplestore allows multiple participants to write into it and then read the tuples back from it in parallel. Each reader receives partial results. For now it always uses disk files, but other buffering policies and other kinds of scans (ie each reader receives complete results) may be useful in future. The upcoming parallel hash join feature will use this facility. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan, Andres Freund, Robert Haas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2W=cOkiZxcg6qiFQP-dHUe09aqTrEMM7yJDrHMhDv_RA@mail.gmail.com
2017-12-18 23:23:19 +01:00
SharedTuplestore
SharedTuplestoreAccessor
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
SharedTuplestoreChunk
SharedTuplestoreParticipant
Add support for coordinating record typmods among parallel workers. Tuples can have type RECORDOID and a typmod number that identifies a blessed TupleDesc in a backend-private cache. To support the sharing of such tuples through shared memory and temporary files, provide a typmod registry in shared memory. To achieve that, introduce per-session DSM segments, created on demand when a backend first runs a parallel query. The per-session DSM segment has a table-of-contents just like the per-query DSM segment, and initially the contents are a shared record typmod registry and a DSA area to provide the space it needs to grow. State relating to the current session is accessed via a Session object reached through global variable CurrentSession that may require significant redesign further down the road as we figure out what else needs to be shared or remodelled. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=0ZtQ-SpsgCyzzYpsXS6e=kZWqk3g5Ygn3MDV7A8dabUA@mail.gmail.com
2017-09-15 04:59:21 +02:00
SharedTypmodTableEntry
Support parallel btree index builds. To make this work, tuplesort.c and logtape.c must also support parallelism, so this patch adds that infrastructure and then applies it to the particular case of parallel btree index builds. Testing to date shows that this can often be 2-3x faster than a serial index build. The model for deciding how many workers to use is fairly primitive at present, but it's better than not having the feature. We can refine it as we get more experience. Peter Geoghegan with some help from Rushabh Lathia. While Heikki Linnakangas is not an author of this patch, he wrote other patches without which this feature would not have been possible, and therefore the release notes should possibly credit him as an author of this feature. Reviewed by Claudio Freire, Heikki Linnakangas, Thomas Munro, Tels, Amit Kapila, me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM3SWZQKM=Pzc=CAHzRixKjp2eO5Q0Jg1SoFQqeXFQ647JiwqQ@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=AxWqDoVvGU7dq856S4r6sJAj6DBn7VMtigkB33N5eyg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-02 19:25:55 +01:00
Sharedsort
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ShellTypeInfo
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
ShippableCacheEntry
ShippableCacheKey
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ShmemIndexEnt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ShutdownForeignScan_function
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
ShutdownInformation
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ShutdownMode
SignTSVector
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SimpleActionList
SimpleActionListCell
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SimpleEcontextStackEntry
SimpleOidList
SimpleOidListCell
SimplePtrList
SimplePtrListCell
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SimpleStats
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SimpleStringList
SimpleStringListCell
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SingleBoundSortItem
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Size
Extend amcheck to check heap pages. Mark Dilger, reviewed by Peter Geoghegan, Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier, Amul Sul, and by me. Some last-minute cosmetic revisions by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/12ED3DA8-25F0-4B68-937D-D907CFBF08E7@enterprisedb.com
2020-10-22 14:44:18 +02:00
SkipPages
Add "Slab" MemoryContext implementation for efficient equal-sized allocations. The default general purpose aset.c style memory context is not a great choice for allocations that are all going to be evenly sized, especially when those objects aren't small, and have varying lifetimes. There tends to be a lot of fragmentation, larger allocations always directly go to libc rather than have their cost amortized over several pallocs. These problems lead to the introduction of ad-hoc slab allocators in reorderbuffer.c. But it turns out that the simplistic implementation leads to problems when a lot of objects are allocated and freed, as aset.c is still the underlying implementation. Especially freeing can easily run into O(n^2) behavior in aset.c. While the O(n^2) behavior in aset.c can, and probably will, be addressed, custom allocators for this behavior are more efficient both in space and time. This allocator is for evenly sized allocations, and supports both cheap allocations and freeing, without fragmenting significantly. It does so by allocating evenly sized blocks via malloc(), and carves them into chunks that can be used for allocations. In order to release blocks to the OS as early as possible, chunks are allocated from the fullest block that still has free objects, increasing the likelihood of a block being entirely unused. A subsequent commit uses this in reorderbuffer.c, but a further allocator is needed to resolve the performance problems triggering this work. There likely are further potentialy uses of this allocator besides reorderbuffer.c. There's potential further optimizations of the new slab.c, in particular the array of freelists could be replaced by a more intelligent structure - but for now this looks more than good enough. Author: Tomas Vondra, editorialized by Andres Freund Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Petr Jelinek, Robert Haas, Jim Nasby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d15dff83-0b37-28ed-0809-95a5cc7292ad@2ndquadrant.com
2017-02-27 12:41:44 +01:00
SlabBlock
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SlabContext
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
SlabSlot
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SlotNumber
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SlruCtl
SlruCtlData
SlruErrorCause
SlruPageStatus
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
SlruScanCallback
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SlruShared
SlruSharedData
Defer flushing of SLRU files. Previously, we called fsync() after writing out individual pg_xact, pg_multixact and pg_commit_ts pages due to cache pressure, leading to regular I/O stalls in user backends and recovery. Collapse requests for the same file into a single system call as part of the next checkpoint, as we already did for relation files, using the infrastructure developed by commit 3eb77eba. This can cause a significant improvement to recovery performance, especially when it's otherwise CPU-bound. Hoist ProcessSyncRequests() up into CheckPointGuts() to make it clearer that it applies to all the SLRU mini-buffer-pools as well as the main buffer pool. Rearrange things so that data collected in CheckpointStats includes SLRU activity. Also remove the Shutdown{CLOG,CommitTS,SUBTRANS,MultiXact}() functions, because they were redundant after the shutdown checkpoint that immediately precedes them. (I'm not sure if they were ever needed, but they aren't now.) Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> (parts) Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <Jakub.Wartak@tomtom.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGLJ=84YT+NvhkEEDAuUtVHMfQ9i-N7k_o50JmQ6Rpj_OQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-09-25 08:49:43 +02:00
SlruWriteAll
SlruWriteAllData
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
SnapBuild
SnapBuildOnDisk
SnapBuildState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Snapshot
SnapshotData
Change snapshot type to be determined by enum rather than callback. This is in preparation for allowing the same snapshot be used for different table AMs. With the current callback based approach we would need one callback for each supported AM, which clearly would not be extensible. Thus add a new Snapshot->snapshot_type field, and move the dispatch into HeapTupleSatisfiesVisibility() (which is now a function). Later work will then dispatch calls to HeapTupleSatisfiesVisibility() and other AMs visibility functions depending on the type of the table. The central SnapshotType enum also seems like a good location to centralize documentation about the intended behaviour of various types of snapshots. As tqual.h isn't included by bufmgr.h any more (as HeapTupleSatisfies* isn't referenced by TestForOldSnapshot() anymore) a few files now need to include it directly. Author: Andres Freund, loosely based on earlier work by Haribabu Kommi Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-01-22 02:03:15 +01:00
SnapshotType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SockAddr
Sort
SortBy
SortByDir
SortByNulls
Support parallel btree index builds. To make this work, tuplesort.c and logtape.c must also support parallelism, so this patch adds that infrastructure and then applies it to the particular case of parallel btree index builds. Testing to date shows that this can often be 2-3x faster than a serial index build. The model for deciding how many workers to use is fairly primitive at present, but it's better than not having the feature. We can refine it as we get more experience. Peter Geoghegan with some help from Rushabh Lathia. While Heikki Linnakangas is not an author of this patch, he wrote other patches without which this feature would not have been possible, and therefore the release notes should possibly credit him as an author of this feature. Reviewed by Claudio Freire, Heikki Linnakangas, Thomas Munro, Tels, Amit Kapila, me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM3SWZQKM=Pzc=CAHzRixKjp2eO5Q0Jg1SoFQqeXFQ647JiwqQ@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=AxWqDoVvGU7dq856S4r6sJAj6DBn7VMtigkB33N5eyg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-02 19:25:55 +01:00
SortCoordinate
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SortGroupClause
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SortItem
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SortPath
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SortShimExtra
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SortState
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SortSupport
SortSupportData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SortTuple
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SortTupleComparator
SortedPoint
SpGistBuildState
SpGistCache
SpGistDeadTuple
SpGistDeadTupleData
SpGistInnerTuple
SpGistInnerTupleData
SpGistLUPCache
SpGistLastUsedPage
SpGistLeafTuple
SpGistLeafTupleData
SpGistMetaPageData
SpGistNodeTuple
SpGistNodeTupleData
Refactor reloption handling for index AMs in-core This reworks the reloption parsing and build of a couple of index AMs by creating new structures for each index AM's options. This split was already done for BRIN, GIN and GiST (which actually has a fillfactor parameter), but not for hash, B-tree and SPGiST which relied on StdRdOptions due to an overlap with the default option set. This saves a couple of bytes for rd_options in each relcache entry with indexes making use of relation options, and brings more consistency between all index AMs. While on it, add a couple of AssertMacro() calls to make sure that utility macros to grab values of reloptions are used with the expected index AM. Author: Nikolay Shaplov Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier, Álvaro Herrera, Dent John Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4127670.gFlpRb6XCm@x200m
2019-11-25 01:40:53 +01:00
SpGistOptions
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SpGistPageOpaque
SpGistPageOpaqueData
SpGistScanOpaque
SpGistScanOpaqueData
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
SpGistSearchItem
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SpGistState
SpGistTypeDesc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SpecialJoinInfo
Allow Pin/UnpinBuffer to operate in a lockfree manner. Pinning/Unpinning a buffer is a very frequent operation; especially in read-mostly cache resident workloads. Benchmarking shows that in various scenarios the spinlock protecting a buffer header's state becomes a significant bottleneck. The problem can be reproduced with pgbench -S on larger machines, but can be considerably worse for queries which touch the same buffers over and over at a high frequency (e.g. nested loops over a small inner table). To allow atomic operations to be used, cram BufferDesc's flags, usage_count, buf_hdr_lock, refcount into a single 32bit atomic variable; that allows to manipulate them together using 32bit compare-and-swap operations. This requires reducing MAX_BACKENDS to 2^18-1 (which could be lifted by using a 64bit field, but it's not a realistic configuration atm). As not all operations can easily implemented in a lockfree manner, implement the previous buf_hdr_lock via a flag bit in the atomic variable. That way we can continue to lock the header in places where it's needed, but can get away without acquiring it in the more frequent hot-paths. There's some additional operations which can be done without the lock, but aren't in this patch; but the most important places are covered. As bufmgr.c now essentially re-implements spinlocks, abstract the delay logic from s_lock.c into something more generic. It now has already two users, and more are coming up; there's a follupw patch for lwlock.c at least. This patch is based on a proof-of-concept written by me, which Alexander Korotkov made into a fully working patch; the committed version is again revised by me. Benchmarking and testing has, amongst others, been provided by Dilip Kumar, Alexander Korotkov, Robert Haas. On a large x86 system improvements for readonly pgbench, with a high client count, of a factor of 8 have been observed. Author: Alexander Korotkov and Andres Freund Discussion: 2400449.GjM57CE0Yg@dinodell
2016-04-11 05:12:32 +02:00
SpinDelayStatus
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
SplitInterval
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
SplitLR
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
SplitPoint
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SplitTextOutputData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SplitVar
SplitedPageLayout
StackElem
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
StartBlobPtrType
StartBlobsPtrType
StartDataPtrType
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
StartReplicationCmd
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
StartupStatusEnum
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
StatEntry
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
StatExtEntry
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
StateFileChunk
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
StatisticExtInfo
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
StatsBuildData
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
StatsData
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
StatsElem
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
StatsExtInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
StdAnalyzeData
Pre branch pgindent / pgperltidy run Along the way make a slight adjustment to src/include/utils/queryjumble.h to avoid an unused typedef.
2021-06-28 17:05:54 +02:00
StdRdOptIndexCleanup
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
StdRdOptions
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
Step
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
StopList
StrategyNumber
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
StreamCtl
Add support for streaming to built-in logical replication. To add support for streaming of in-progress transactions into the built-in logical replication, we need to do three things: * Extend the logical replication protocol, so identify in-progress transactions, and allow adding additional bits of information (e.g. XID of subtransactions). * Modify the output plugin (pgoutput) to implement the new stream API callbacks, by leveraging the extended replication protocol. * Modify the replication apply worker, to properly handle streamed in-progress transaction by spilling the data to disk and then replaying them on commit. We however must explicitly disable streaming replication during replication slot creation, even if the plugin supports it. We don't need to replicate the changes accumulated during this phase, and moreover we don't have a replication connection open so we don't have where to send the data anyway. Author: Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Kuntal Ghosh and Ajin Cherian Tested-by: Neha Sharma, Mahendra Singh Thalor and Ajin Cherian Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/688b0b7f-2f6c-d827-c27b-216a8e3ea700@2ndquadrant.com
2020-09-03 04:24:07 +02:00
String
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
StringInfo
StringInfoData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
StripnullState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SubLink
SubLinkType
Refactor function parse_subscription_options. Instead of using multiple parameters in parse_subscription_options function signature, use the struct SubOpts that encapsulate all the subscription options and their values. It will be useful for future work where we need to add other options in the subscription. Also, use bitmaps to pass the supported and retrieve the specified options much like the way it is done in the commit a3dc926009. Author: Bharath Rupireddy Reviewed-By: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila, Alvaro Herrera Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXtoQczfNsDQWobypVvHbX2DtgEHn8DawS0eGFwuo72kw@mail.gmail.com
2021-07-06 04:16:50 +02:00
SubOpts
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SubPlan
SubPlanState
Allow multiple xacts during table sync in logical replication. For the initial table data synchronization in logical replication, we use a single transaction to copy the entire table and then synchronize the position in the stream with the main apply worker. There are multiple downsides of this approach: (a) We have to perform the entire copy operation again if there is any error (network breakdown, error in the database operation, etc.) while we synchronize the WAL position between tablesync worker and apply worker; this will be onerous especially for large copies, (b) Using a single transaction in the synchronization-phase (where we can receive WAL from multiple transactions) will have the risk of exceeding the CID limit, (c) The slot will hold the WAL till the entire sync is complete because we never commit till the end. This patch solves all the above downsides by allowing multiple transactions during the tablesync phase. The initial copy is done in a single transaction and after that, we commit each transaction as we receive. To allow recovery after any error or crash, we use a permanent slot and origin to track the progress. The slot and origin will be removed once we finish the synchronization of the table. We also remove slot and origin of tablesync workers if the user performs DROP SUBSCRIPTION .. or ALTER SUBSCRIPTION .. REFERESH and some of the table syncs are still not finished. The commands ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... REFRESH PUBLICATION and ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... SET PUBLICATION ... with refresh option as true cannot be executed inside a transaction block because they can now drop the slots for which we have no provision to rollback. This will also open up the path for logical replication of 2PC transactions on the subscriber side. Previously, we can't do that because of the requirement of maintaining a single transaction in tablesync workers. Bump catalog version due to change of state in the catalog (pg_subscription_rel). Author: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila, and Takamichi Osumi Reviewed-by: Ajin Cherian, Petr Jelinek, Hou Zhijie and Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1KHJxaZS-fod-0fey=0tq3=Gkn4ho=8N4-5HWiCfu0H1A@mail.gmail.com
2021-02-12 03:11:51 +01:00
SubRemoveRels
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SubTransactionId
SubXactCallback
SubXactCallbackItem
SubXactEvent
Fix alphabetic ordering in typedefs.list
2020-11-15 06:56:31 +01:00
SubXactInfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SubqueryScan
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SubqueryScanPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SubqueryScanState
SubqueryScanStatus
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
SubscriptExecSetup
SubscriptExecSteps
SubscriptRoutines
SubscriptTransform
SubscriptingRef
SubscriptingRefState
Subscription
SubscriptionInfo
SubscriptionRelState
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
SupportRequestCost
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SupportRequestIndexCondition
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
SupportRequestRows
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SupportRequestSelectivity
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
SupportRequestSimplify
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SupportRequestWFuncMonotonic
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Syn
Refactor the fsync queue for wider use. Previously, md.c and checkpointer.c were tightly integrated so that fsync calls could be handed off and processed in the background. Introduce a system of callbacks and file tags, so that other modules can hand off fsync work in the same way. For now only md.c uses the new interface, but other users are being proposed. Since there may be use cases that are not strictly SMGR implementations, use a new function table for sync handlers rather than extending the traditional SMGR one. Instead of using a bitmapset of segment numbers for each RelFileNode in the checkpointer's hash table, make the segment number part of the key. This requires sending explicit "forget" requests for every segment individually when relations are dropped, but suits the file layout schemes of proposed future users better (ie sparse or high segment numbers). Author: Shawn Debnath and Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro, Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2gTANm=e3ARnJT=n0h8hf88wqmaZxk0JYkxw+b21fNrw@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 10:56:03 +02:00
SyncOps
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SyncRepConfigData
SyncRepStandbyData
Defer flushing of SLRU files. Previously, we called fsync() after writing out individual pg_xact, pg_multixact and pg_commit_ts pages due to cache pressure, leading to regular I/O stalls in user backends and recovery. Collapse requests for the same file into a single system call as part of the next checkpoint, as we already did for relation files, using the infrastructure developed by commit 3eb77eba. This can cause a significant improvement to recovery performance, especially when it's otherwise CPU-bound. Hoist ProcessSyncRequests() up into CheckPointGuts() to make it clearer that it applies to all the SLRU mini-buffer-pools as well as the main buffer pool. Rearrange things so that data collected in CheckpointStats includes SLRU activity. Also remove the Shutdown{CLOG,CommitTS,SUBTRANS,MultiXact}() functions, because they were redundant after the shutdown checkpoint that immediately precedes them. (I'm not sure if they were ever needed, but they aren't now.) Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> (parts) Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <Jakub.Wartak@tomtom.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGLJ=84YT+NvhkEEDAuUtVHMfQ9i-N7k_o50JmQ6Rpj_OQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-09-25 08:49:43 +02:00
SyncRequestHandler
Refactor the fsync queue for wider use. Previously, md.c and checkpointer.c were tightly integrated so that fsync calls could be handed off and processed in the background. Introduce a system of callbacks and file tags, so that other modules can hand off fsync work in the same way. For now only md.c uses the new interface, but other users are being proposed. Since there may be use cases that are not strictly SMGR implementations, use a new function table for sync handlers rather than extending the traditional SMGR one. Instead of using a bitmapset of segment numbers for each RelFileNode in the checkpointer's hash table, make the segment number part of the key. This requires sending explicit "forget" requests for every segment individually when relations are dropped, but suits the file layout schemes of proposed future users better (ie sparse or high segment numbers). Author: Shawn Debnath and Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro, Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2gTANm=e3ARnJT=n0h8hf88wqmaZxk0JYkxw+b21fNrw@mail.gmail.com
2019-04-04 10:56:03 +02:00
SyncRequestType
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
SysFKRelationship
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
SysScanDesc
SyscacheCallbackFunction
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SystemRowsSamplerData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
SystemSamplerData
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
SystemTimeSamplerData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TAR_MEMBER
TBMIterateResult
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TBMIteratingState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TBMIterator
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TBMSharedIterator
TBMSharedIteratorState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TBMStatus
TBlockState
TIDBitmap
tableam: Add tuple_{insert, delete, update, lock} and use. This adds new, required, table AM callbacks for insert/delete/update and lock_tuple. To be able to reasonably use those, the EvalPlanQual mechanism had to be adapted, moving more logic into the AM. Previously both delete/update/lock call-sites and the EPQ mechanism had to have awareness of the specific tuple format to be able to fetch the latest version of a tuple. Obviously that needs to be abstracted away. To do so, move the logic that find the latest row version into the AM. lock_tuple has a new flag argument, TUPLE_LOCK_FLAG_FIND_LAST_VERSION, that forces it to lock the last version, rather than the current one. It'd have been possible to do so via a separate callback as well, but finding the last version usually also necessitates locking the newest version, making it sensible to combine the two. This replaces the previous use of EvalPlanQualFetch(). Additionally HeapTupleUpdated, which previously signaled either a concurrent update or delete, is now split into two, to avoid callers needing AM specific knowledge to differentiate. The move of finding the latest row version into tuple_lock means that encountering a row concurrently moved into another partition will now raise an error about "tuple to be locked" rather than "tuple to be updated/deleted" - which is accurate, as that always happens when locking rows. While possible slightly less helpful for users, it seems like an acceptable trade-off. As part of this commit HTSU_Result has been renamed to TM_Result, and its members been expanded to differentiated between updating and deleting. HeapUpdateFailureData has been renamed to TM_FailureData. The interface to speculative insertion is changed so nodeModifyTable.c does not have to set the speculative token itself anymore. Instead there's a version of tuple_insert, tuple_insert_speculative, that performs the speculative insertion (without requiring a flag to signal that fact), and the speculative insertion is either made permanent with table_complete_speculative(succeeded = true) or aborted with succeeded = false). Note that multi_insert is not yet routed through tableam, nor is COPY. Changing multi_insert requires changes to copy.c that are large enough to better be done separately. Similarly, although simpler, CREATE TABLE AS and CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW are also only going to be adjusted in a later commit. Author: Andres Freund and Haribabu Kommi Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20190313003903.nwvrxi7rw3ywhdel@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-24 03:55:57 +01:00
TM_FailureData
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
TM_IndexDelete
TM_IndexDeleteOp
TM_IndexStatus
tableam: Add tuple_{insert, delete, update, lock} and use. This adds new, required, table AM callbacks for insert/delete/update and lock_tuple. To be able to reasonably use those, the EvalPlanQual mechanism had to be adapted, moving more logic into the AM. Previously both delete/update/lock call-sites and the EPQ mechanism had to have awareness of the specific tuple format to be able to fetch the latest version of a tuple. Obviously that needs to be abstracted away. To do so, move the logic that find the latest row version into the AM. lock_tuple has a new flag argument, TUPLE_LOCK_FLAG_FIND_LAST_VERSION, that forces it to lock the last version, rather than the current one. It'd have been possible to do so via a separate callback as well, but finding the last version usually also necessitates locking the newest version, making it sensible to combine the two. This replaces the previous use of EvalPlanQualFetch(). Additionally HeapTupleUpdated, which previously signaled either a concurrent update or delete, is now split into two, to avoid callers needing AM specific knowledge to differentiate. The move of finding the latest row version into tuple_lock means that encountering a row concurrently moved into another partition will now raise an error about "tuple to be locked" rather than "tuple to be updated/deleted" - which is accurate, as that always happens when locking rows. While possible slightly less helpful for users, it seems like an acceptable trade-off. As part of this commit HTSU_Result has been renamed to TM_Result, and its members been expanded to differentiated between updating and deleting. HeapUpdateFailureData has been renamed to TM_FailureData. The interface to speculative insertion is changed so nodeModifyTable.c does not have to set the speculative token itself anymore. Instead there's a version of tuple_insert, tuple_insert_speculative, that performs the speculative insertion (without requiring a flag to signal that fact), and the speculative insertion is either made permanent with table_complete_speculative(succeeded = true) or aborted with succeeded = false). Note that multi_insert is not yet routed through tableam, nor is COPY. Changing multi_insert requires changes to copy.c that are large enough to better be done separately. Similarly, although simpler, CREATE TABLE AS and CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW are also only going to be adjusted in a later commit. Author: Andres Freund and Haribabu Kommi Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20190313003903.nwvrxi7rw3ywhdel@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-24 03:55:57 +01:00
TM_Result
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TOKEN_DEFAULT_DACL
TOKEN_INFORMATION_CLASS
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
TOKEN_PRIVILEGES
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TOKEN_USER
TParser
TParserCharTest
TParserPosition
TParserSpecial
TParserState
TParserStateAction
TParserStateActionItem
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
TQueueDestReceiver
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TRGM
TSAnyCacheEntry
TSConfigCacheEntry
TSConfigInfo
TSDictInfo
TSDictionaryCacheEntry
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TSExecuteCallback
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TSLexeme
TSParserCacheEntry
TSParserInfo
TSQuery
TSQueryData
TSQueryParserState
TSQuerySign
TSReadPointer
TSTemplateInfo
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
TSTernaryValue
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TSTokenTypeStorage
TSVector
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TSVectorBuildState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TSVectorData
TSVectorParseState
TSVectorStat
TState
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
TStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TStoreState
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
TXNEntryFile
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TYPCATEGORY
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
T_Action
T_WorkerStatus
tableam: introduce table AM infrastructure. This introduces the concept of table access methods, i.e. CREATE ACCESS METHOD ... TYPE TABLE and CREATE TABLE ... USING (storage-engine). No table access functionality is delegated to table AMs as of this commit, that'll be done in following commits. Subsequent commits will incrementally abstract table access functionality to be routed through table access methods. That change is too large to be reviewed & committed at once, so it'll be done incrementally. Docs will be updated at the end, as adding them incrementally would likely make them less coherent, and definitely is a lot more work, without a lot of benefit. Table access methods are specified similar to index access methods, i.e. pg_am.amhandler returns, as INTERNAL, a pointer to a struct with callbacks. In contrast to index AMs that struct needs to live as long as a backend, typically that's achieved by just returning a pointer to a constant struct. Psql's \d+ now displays a table's access method. That can be disabled with HIDE_TABLEAM=true, which is mainly useful so regression tests can be run against different AMs. It's quite possible that this behaviour still needs to be fine tuned. For now it's not allowed to set a table AM for a partitioned table, as we've not resolved how partitions would inherit that. Disallowing allows us to introduce, if we decide that's the way forward, such a behaviour without a compatibility break. Catversion bumped, to add the heap table AM and references to it. Author: Haribabu Kommi, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Dimitri Golgov and others Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql https://postgr.es/m/20190107235616.6lur25ph22u5u5av@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20190304234700.w5tmhducs5wxgzls@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-03-06 18:54:38 +01:00
TableAmRoutine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TableAttachInfo
TableDataInfo
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TableFunc
TableFuncRoutine
TableFuncScan
TableFuncScanState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TableInfo
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
TableLikeClause
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
TableSampleClause
tableam: Add and use scan APIs. Too allow table accesses to be not directly dependent on heap, several new abstractions are needed. Specifically: 1) Heap scans need to be generalized into table scans. Do this by introducing TableScanDesc, which will be the "base class" for individual AMs. This contains the AM independent fields from HeapScanDesc. The previous heap_{beginscan,rescan,endscan} et al. have been replaced with a table_ version. There's no direct replacement for heap_getnext(), as that returned a HeapTuple, which is undesirable for a other AMs. Instead there's table_scan_getnextslot(). But note that heap_getnext() lives on, it's still used widely to access catalog tables. This is achieved by new scan_begin, scan_end, scan_rescan, scan_getnextslot callbacks. 2) The portion of parallel scans that's shared between backends need to be able to do so without the user doing per-AM work. To achieve that new parallelscan_{estimate, initialize, reinitialize} callbacks are introduced, which operate on a new ParallelTableScanDesc, which again can be subclassed by AMs. As it is likely that several AMs are going to be block oriented, block oriented callbacks that can be shared between such AMs are provided and used by heap. table_block_parallelscan_{estimate, intiialize, reinitialize} as callbacks, and table_block_parallelscan_{nextpage, init} for use in AMs. These operate on a ParallelBlockTableScanDesc. 3) Index scans need to be able to access tables to return a tuple, and there needs to be state across individual accesses to the heap to store state like buffers. That's now handled by introducing a sort-of-scan IndexFetchTable, which again is intended to be subclassed by individual AMs (for heap IndexFetchHeap). The relevant callbacks for an AM are index_fetch_{end, begin, reset} to create the necessary state, and index_fetch_tuple to retrieve an indexed tuple. Note that index_fetch_tuple implementations need to be smarter than just blindly fetching the tuples for AMs that have optimizations similar to heap's HOT - the currently alive tuple in the update chain needs to be fetched if appropriate. Similar to table_scan_getnextslot(), it's undesirable to continue to return HeapTuples. Thus index_fetch_heap (might want to rename that later) now accepts a slot as an argument. Core code doesn't have a lot of call sites performing index scans without going through the systable_* API (in contrast to loads of heap_getnext calls and working directly with HeapTuples). Index scans now store the result of a search in IndexScanDesc->xs_heaptid, rather than xs_ctup->t_self. As the target is not generally a HeapTuple anymore that seems cleaner. To be able to sensible adapt code to use the above, two further callbacks have been introduced: a) slot_callbacks returns a TupleTableSlotOps* suitable for creating slots capable of holding a tuple of the AMs type. table_slot_callbacks() and table_slot_create() are based upon that, but have additional logic to deal with views, foreign tables, etc. While this change could have been done separately, nearly all the call sites that needed to be adapted for the rest of this commit also would have been needed to be adapted for table_slot_callbacks(), making separation not worthwhile. b) tuple_satisfies_snapshot checks whether the tuple in a slot is currently visible according to a snapshot. That's required as a few places now don't have a buffer + HeapTuple around, but a slot (which in heap's case internally has that information). Additionally a few infrastructure changes were needed: I) SysScanDesc, as used by systable_{beginscan, getnext} et al. now internally uses a slot to keep track of tuples. While systable_getnext() still returns HeapTuples, and will so for the foreseeable future, the index API (see 1) above) now only deals with slots. The remainder, and largest part, of this commit is then adjusting all scans in postgres to use the new APIs. Author: Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi, Alvaro Herrera Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-11 20:46:41 +01:00
TableScanDesc
TableScanDescData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TableSpaceCacheEntry
TableSpaceOpts
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
TablespaceList
TablespaceListCell
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TapeBlockTrailer
Support parallel btree index builds. To make this work, tuplesort.c and logtape.c must also support parallelism, so this patch adds that infrastructure and then applies it to the particular case of parallel btree index builds. Testing to date shows that this can often be 2-3x faster than a serial index build. The model for deciding how many workers to use is fairly primitive at present, but it's better than not having the feature. We can refine it as we get more experience. Peter Geoghegan with some help from Rushabh Lathia. While Heikki Linnakangas is not an author of this patch, he wrote other patches without which this feature would not have been possible, and therefore the release notes should possibly credit him as an author of this feature. Reviewed by Claudio Freire, Heikki Linnakangas, Thomas Munro, Tels, Amit Kapila, me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM3SWZQKM=Pzc=CAHzRixKjp2eO5Q0Jg1SoFQqeXFQ647JiwqQ@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=AxWqDoVvGU7dq856S4r6sJAj6DBn7VMtigkB33N5eyg@mail.gmail.com
2018-02-02 19:25:55 +01:00
TapeShare
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
TarMethodData
TarMethodFile
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TargetEntry
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
TclExceptionNameMap
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Tcl_DString
Tcl_FileProc
Tcl_HashEntry
Tcl_HashTable
Tcl_Interp
Tcl_NotifierProcs
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
Tcl_Obj
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Tcl_Time
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
TempNamespaceStatus
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
TestDecodingData
Fix 'skip-empty-xacts' option in test_decoding for streaming mode. In streaming mode, the transaction can be decoded in multiple streams and those streams can be interleaved with streams of other transactions. So, we can't remember the transaction's write status in the logical decoding context because that might get changed due to some other transactions and lead to wrong answers for 'skip-empty-xacts' option. We decided to keep each transaction's write status in the ReorderBufferTxn to avoid interleaved streams changing the status of some unrelated transactions. Diagnosed-by: Amit Kapila Author: Dilip Kumar Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1LR7=XNM_TLmpZMFuV8ZQpoxkem--NZJYf8YXmesbvwLA@mail.gmail.com
2020-11-17 07:44:53 +01:00
TestDecodingTxnData
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
TestSpec
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TextFreq
TextPositionState
TheLexeme
TheSubstitute
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TidExpr
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
TidExprType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TidHashKey
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
TidOpExpr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TidPath
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
TidRangePath
TidRangeScan
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TidRangeScanState
TidScan
TidScanState
TimeADT
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
TimeLineHistoryCmd
TimeLineHistoryEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TimeLineID
TimeOffset
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
TimeStamp
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TimeTzADT
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
TimeZoneAbbrevTable
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
TimeoutId
TimeoutType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Timestamp
TimestampTz
TmFromChar
TmToChar
Fix ordering in typedefs.list
2020-03-23 22:54:33 +01:00
ToastAttrInfo
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
ToastCompressionId
Fix ordering in typedefs.list
2020-03-23 22:54:33 +01:00
ToastTupleContext
amcheck: fix multiple problems with TOAST pointer validation First, don't perform database access while holding a buffer lock. When checking a heap, we can validate that TOAST pointers are sane by performing a scan on the TOAST index and looking up the chunks that correspond to each value ID that appears in a TOAST poiner in the main table. But, to do that while holding a buffer lock at least risks causing other backends to wait uninterruptibly, and probably can cause undetected and uninterruptible deadlocks. So, instead, make a list of checks to perform while holding the lock, and then perform the checks after releasing it. Second, adjust things so that we don't try to follow TOAST pointers for tuples that are already eligible to be pruned. The TOAST tuples become eligible for pruning at the same time that the main tuple does, so trying to check them may lead to spurious reports of corruption, as observed in the buildfarm. The necessary infrastructure to decide whether or not the tuple being checked is prunable was added by commit 3b6c1259f9ca8e21860aaf24ec6735a8e5598ea0, but it wasn't actually used for its intended purpose prior to this patch. Mark Dilger, adjusted by me to avoid a memory leak. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/AC5479E4-6321-473D-AC92-5EC36299FBC2@enterprisedb.com
2021-04-07 19:28:35 +02:00
ToastedAttribute
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TocEntry
TokenAuxData
Refactor code related to pg_hba_file_rules() into new file hba.c is growing big, and more contents are planned for it. In order to prepare for this future work, this commit moves all the code related to the system function processing the contents of pg_hba.conf, pg_hba_file_rules() to a new file called hbafuncs.c, which will be used as the location for the SQL portion of the authentication file parsing. While on it, HbaToken, the structure holding a string token lexed from a configuration file related to authentication, is renamed to a more generic AuthToken, as it gets used not only for pg_hba.conf, but also for pg_ident.conf. TokenizedLine is now named TokenizedAuthLine. The size of hba.c is reduced by ~12%. Author: Julien Rouhaud Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
2022-03-24 04:42:30 +01:00
TokenizedAuthLine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TrackItem
Perform apply of large transactions by parallel workers. Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to be applied via parallel workers. In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to "partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker available. This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available. The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour). In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for publications on servers < PG16. Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-09 02:30:39 +01:00
TransApplyAction
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TransInvalidationInfo
TransState
TransactionId
TransactionState
TransactionStateData
TransactionStmt
TransactionStmtKind
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
TransformInfo
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TransformJsonStringValuesState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TransitionCaptureState
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
TrgmArc
TrgmArcInfo
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
TrgmBound
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
TrgmColor
TrgmColorInfo
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
TrgmGistOptions
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
TrgmNFA
TrgmPackArcInfo
TrgmPackedArc
TrgmPackedGraph
TrgmPackedState
TrgmPrefix
TrgmState
TrgmStateKey
TrieChar
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Trigger
TriggerData
TriggerDesc
TriggerEvent
TriggerFlags
TriggerInfo
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
TriggerTransition
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TruncateStmt
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
TsmRoutine
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TupOutputState
TupSortStatus
TupStoreStatus
TupleConstr
TupleConversionMap
TupleDesc
TupleHashEntry
TupleHashEntryData
TupleHashIterator
TupleHashTable
Modify tqueue infrastructure to support transient record types. Commit 4a4e6893aa080b9094dadbe0e65f8a75fee41ac6, which introduced this mechanism, failed to account for the fact that the RECORD pseudo-type uses transient typmods that are only meaningful within a single backend. Transferring such tuples without modification between two cooperating backends does not work. This commit installs a system for passing the tuple descriptors over the same shm_mq being used to send the tuples themselves. The two sides might not assign the same transient typmod to any given tuple descriptor, so we must also substitute the appropriate receiver-side typmod for the one used by the sender. That adds some CPU overhead, but still seems better than being unable to pass records between cooperating parallel processes. Along the way, move the logic for handling multiple tuple queues from tqueue.c to nodeGather.c; tqueue.c now provides a TupleQueueReader, which reads from a single queue, rather than a TupleQueueFunnel, which potentially reads from multiple queues. This change was suggested previously as a way to make sure that nodeGather.c rather than tqueue.c had policy control over the order in which to read from queues, but it wasn't clear to me until now how good an idea it was. typmod mapping needs to be performed separately for each queue, and it is much simpler if the tqueue.c code handles that and leaves multiplexing multiple queues to higher layers of the stack.
2015-11-06 22:58:45 +01:00
TupleQueueReader
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TupleTableSlot
tableam: Add and use scan APIs. Too allow table accesses to be not directly dependent on heap, several new abstractions are needed. Specifically: 1) Heap scans need to be generalized into table scans. Do this by introducing TableScanDesc, which will be the "base class" for individual AMs. This contains the AM independent fields from HeapScanDesc. The previous heap_{beginscan,rescan,endscan} et al. have been replaced with a table_ version. There's no direct replacement for heap_getnext(), as that returned a HeapTuple, which is undesirable for a other AMs. Instead there's table_scan_getnextslot(). But note that heap_getnext() lives on, it's still used widely to access catalog tables. This is achieved by new scan_begin, scan_end, scan_rescan, scan_getnextslot callbacks. 2) The portion of parallel scans that's shared between backends need to be able to do so without the user doing per-AM work. To achieve that new parallelscan_{estimate, initialize, reinitialize} callbacks are introduced, which operate on a new ParallelTableScanDesc, which again can be subclassed by AMs. As it is likely that several AMs are going to be block oriented, block oriented callbacks that can be shared between such AMs are provided and used by heap. table_block_parallelscan_{estimate, intiialize, reinitialize} as callbacks, and table_block_parallelscan_{nextpage, init} for use in AMs. These operate on a ParallelBlockTableScanDesc. 3) Index scans need to be able to access tables to return a tuple, and there needs to be state across individual accesses to the heap to store state like buffers. That's now handled by introducing a sort-of-scan IndexFetchTable, which again is intended to be subclassed by individual AMs (for heap IndexFetchHeap). The relevant callbacks for an AM are index_fetch_{end, begin, reset} to create the necessary state, and index_fetch_tuple to retrieve an indexed tuple. Note that index_fetch_tuple implementations need to be smarter than just blindly fetching the tuples for AMs that have optimizations similar to heap's HOT - the currently alive tuple in the update chain needs to be fetched if appropriate. Similar to table_scan_getnextslot(), it's undesirable to continue to return HeapTuples. Thus index_fetch_heap (might want to rename that later) now accepts a slot as an argument. Core code doesn't have a lot of call sites performing index scans without going through the systable_* API (in contrast to loads of heap_getnext calls and working directly with HeapTuples). Index scans now store the result of a search in IndexScanDesc->xs_heaptid, rather than xs_ctup->t_self. As the target is not generally a HeapTuple anymore that seems cleaner. To be able to sensible adapt code to use the above, two further callbacks have been introduced: a) slot_callbacks returns a TupleTableSlotOps* suitable for creating slots capable of holding a tuple of the AMs type. table_slot_callbacks() and table_slot_create() are based upon that, but have additional logic to deal with views, foreign tables, etc. While this change could have been done separately, nearly all the call sites that needed to be adapted for the rest of this commit also would have been needed to be adapted for table_slot_callbacks(), making separation not worthwhile. b) tuple_satisfies_snapshot checks whether the tuple in a slot is currently visible according to a snapshot. That's required as a few places now don't have a buffer + HeapTuple around, but a slot (which in heap's case internally has that information). Additionally a few infrastructure changes were needed: I) SysScanDesc, as used by systable_{beginscan, getnext} et al. now internally uses a slot to keep track of tuples. While systable_getnext() still returns HeapTuples, and will so for the foreseeable future, the index API (see 1) above) now only deals with slots. The remainder, and largest part, of this commit is then adjusting all scans in postgres to use the new APIs. Author: Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi, Alvaro Herrera Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de https://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsql
2019-03-11 20:46:41 +01:00
TupleTableSlotOps
Split TuplesortPublic from Tuplesortstate The new TuplesortPublic data structure contains the definition of sort-variant-specific interface methods and the part of Tuple sort operation state required by their implementations. This will let define Tuple sort variants without knowledge of Tuplesortstate, that is without knowledge of generic sort implementation guts. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdvjix0Ahx-H3Jp1M2R%2B_74P-zKnGGygx4OWr%3DbUQ8BNdw%40mail.gmail.com Author: Alexander Korotkov Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov, Maxim Orlov, Matthias van de Meent Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, John Naylor
2022-07-27 07:28:10 +02:00
TuplesortClusterArg
TuplesortDatumArg
TuplesortIndexArg
TuplesortIndexBTreeArg
TuplesortIndexHashArg
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
TuplesortInstrumentation
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
TuplesortMethod
Split TuplesortPublic from Tuplesortstate The new TuplesortPublic data structure contains the definition of sort-variant-specific interface methods and the part of Tuple sort operation state required by their implementations. This will let define Tuple sort variants without knowledge of Tuplesortstate, that is without knowledge of generic sort implementation guts. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdvjix0Ahx-H3Jp1M2R%2B_74P-zKnGGygx4OWr%3DbUQ8BNdw%40mail.gmail.com Author: Alexander Korotkov Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov, Maxim Orlov, Matthias van de Meent Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, John Naylor
2022-07-27 07:28:10 +02:00
TuplesortPublic
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TuplesortSpaceType
Tuplesortstate
Tuplestorestate
TwoPhaseCallback
TwoPhaseFileHeader
TwoPhaseLockRecord
TwoPhasePgStatRecord
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
TwoPhasePredicateLockRecord
TwoPhasePredicateRecord
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
TwoPhasePredicateRecordType
Implement genuine serializable isolation level. Until now, our Serializable mode has in fact been what's called Snapshot Isolation, which allows some anomalies that could not occur in any serialized ordering of the transactions. This patch fixes that using a method called Serializable Snapshot Isolation, based on research papers by Michael J. Cahill (see README-SSI for full references). In Serializable Snapshot Isolation, transactions run like they do in Snapshot Isolation, but a predicate lock manager observes the reads and writes performed and aborts transactions if it detects that an anomaly might occur. This method produces some false positives, ie. it sometimes aborts transactions even though there is no anomaly. To track reads we implement predicate locking, see storage/lmgr/predicate.c. Whenever a tuple is read, a predicate lock is acquired on the tuple. Shared memory is finite, so when a transaction takes many tuple-level locks on a page, the locks are promoted to a single page-level lock, and further to a single relation level lock if necessary. To lock key values with no matching tuple, a sequential scan always takes a relation-level lock, and an index scan acquires a page-level lock that covers the search key, whether or not there are any matching keys at the moment. A predicate lock doesn't conflict with any regular locks or with another predicate locks in the normal sense. They're only used by the predicate lock manager to detect the danger of anomalies. Only serializable transactions participate in predicate locking, so there should be no extra overhead for for other transactions. Predicate locks can't be released at commit, but must be remembered until all the transactions that overlapped with it have completed. That means that we need to remember an unbounded amount of predicate locks, so we apply a lossy but conservative method of tracking locks for committed transactions. If we run short of shared memory, we overflow to a new "pg_serial" SLRU pool. We don't currently allow Serializable transactions in Hot Standby mode. That would be hard, because even read-only transactions can cause anomalies that wouldn't otherwise occur. Serializable isolation mode now means the new fully serializable level. Repeatable Read gives you the old Snapshot Isolation level that we have always had. Kevin Grittner and Dan Ports, reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas and Anssi Kääriäinen
2011-02-07 22:46:51 +01:00
TwoPhasePredicateXactRecord
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TwoPhaseRecordOnDisk
TwoPhaseRmgrId
TwoPhaseStateData
Type
TypeCacheEntry
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
TypeCacheEnumData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TypeCast
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
TypeCat
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
TypeFuncClass
TypeInfo
TypeName
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
U
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
U32
U8
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
UChar
UCharIterator
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
UColAttribute
UColAttributeValue
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
UCollator
UConverter
UErrorCode
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
UINT
ULARGE_INTEGER
ULONG
ULONG_PTR
UV
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
UVersionInfo
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
UnicodeNormalizationForm
UnicodeNormalizationQC
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Unique
UniquePath
UniquePathMethod
UniqueState
UnlistenStmt
UnresolvedTup
UnresolvedTupData
Split ExecUpdate and ExecDelete into reusable pieces Create subroutines ExecUpdatePrologue / ExecUpdateAct / ExecUpdateEpilogue, and similar for ExecDelete. Introduce a new struct to be used internally in nodeModifyTable.c, dubbed ModifyTableContext, which contains all context information needed to perform these operations, as well as ExecInsert and others. This allows using a different schedule and a different way of evaluating the results of these operations, which can be exploited by a later commit introducing support for MERGE. It also makes ExecUpdate and ExecDelete proper shorter and (hopefully) simpler. Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com> Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202202271724.4z7xv3cf46kv@alvherre.pgsql
2022-03-17 11:47:04 +01:00
UpdateContext
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
UpdateStmt
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
UpperRelationKind
UpperUniquePath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
UserAuth
UserMapping
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
UserOpts
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
VacAttrStats
VacAttrStatsP
Move index vacuum routines to vacuum.c. An upcoming patch moves parallel vacuum code out of vacuumlazy.c. This code restructuring will allow both lazy vacuum and parallel vacuum to use index vacuum functions. Author: Masahiko Sawada Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20211030212101.ae3qcouatwmy7tbr%40alap3.anarazel.de
2021-12-22 03:25:14 +01:00
VacDeadItems
Introduce vacuum errcontext to display additional information. The additional information displayed will be block number for error occurring while processing heap and index name for error occurring while processing the index. This will help us in diagnosing the problems that occur during a vacuum. For ex. due to corruption (either caused by bad hardware or by some bug) if we get some error while vacuuming, it can help us identify the block in heap and or additional index information. It sets up an error context callback to display additional information with the error. During different phases of vacuum (heap scan, heap vacuum, index vacuum, index clean up, heap truncate), we update the error context callback to display appropriate information. We can extend it to a bit more granular level like adding the phases for FSM operations or for prefetching the blocks while truncating. However, I felt that it requires adding many more error callback function calls and can make the code a bit complex, so left those for now. Author: Justin Pryzby, with few changes by Amit Kapila Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Amit Kapila, Andres Freund, Michael Paquier and Sawada Masahiko Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20191120210600.GC30362@telsasoft.com
2020-03-30 04:03:38 +02:00
VacErrPhase
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
VacOptValue
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
VacuumParams
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
VacuumRelation
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
VacuumStmt
tableam: Support for an index build's initial table scan(s). To support building indexes over tables of different AMs, the scans to do so need to be routed through the table AM. While moving a fair amount of code, nearly all the changes are just moving code to below a callback. Currently the range based interface wouldn't make much sense for non block based table AMs. But that seems aceptable for now. Author: Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
2019-03-28 03:59:06 +01:00
ValidateIndexState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ValuesScan
ValuesScanState
Var
VarBit
VarChar
VarParamState
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
VarString
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
VarStringSortSupport
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Variable
VariableAssignHook
VariableCache
VariableCacheData
VariableSetKind
VariableSetStmt
VariableShowStmt
VariableSpace
VariableStatData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
VariableSubstituteHook
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
Variables
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
VersionedQuery
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Vfd
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ViewCheckOption
Add new typedefs introduced in 773df883e8 to typedefs.list
2020-03-19 19:40:45 +01:00
ViewOptCheckOption
Move view reloptions into their own varlena struct Per discussion after a gripe from me in http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20140611194633.GH18688@eldon.alvh.no-ip.org Jaime Casanova
2014-07-14 23:24:40 +02:00
ViewOptions
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ViewStmt
VirtualTransactionId
VirtualTupleTableSlot
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
VolatileFunctionStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Vsrt
WAIT_ORDER
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
WALAvailability
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
WALInsertLock
WALInsertLockPadded
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
WALOpenSegment
WALReadError
Suppress useless wakeups in walreceiver. Instead of waking up 10 times per second to check for various timeout conditions, keep track of when we next have periodic work to do. Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Author: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJGhX4r2LPUE3Oy9BX71Eum6PBcS8L3sJpScR9oKaTVaA%40mail.gmail.com
2022-11-08 08:36:36 +01:00
WalRcvWakeupReason
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
WALSegmentCloseCB
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WALSegmentContext
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
WALSegmentOpenCB
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WCHAR
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
WCOKind
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
WFW_WaitOption
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
WIDGET
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WORD
WORKSTATE
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
WSABUF
WSADATA
WSANETWORKEVENTS
WSAPROTOCOL_INFO
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
WaitEvent
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
WaitEventActivity
WaitEventClient
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
WaitEventIO
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
WaitEventIPC
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
WaitEventSet
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
WaitEventTimeout
Final pgindent + perltidy run for v10.
2017-08-14 23:29:33 +02:00
WaitPMResult
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
WalCloseMethod
Add support for LZ4 with compression of full-page writes in WAL The logic is implemented so as there can be a choice in the compression used when building a WAL record, and an extra per-record bit is used to track down if a block is compressed with PGLZ, LZ4 or nothing. wal_compression, the existing parameter, is changed to an enum with support for the following backward-compatible values: - "off", the default, to not use compression. - "pglz" or "on", to compress FPWs with PGLZ. - "lz4", the new mode, to compress FPWs with LZ4. Benchmarking has showed that LZ4 outclasses easily PGLZ. ZSTD would be also an interesting choice, but going just with LZ4 for now makes the patch minimalistic as toast compression is already able to use LZ4, so there is no need to worry about any build-related needs for this implementation. Author: Andrey Borodin, Justin Pryzby Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3037310D-ECB7-4BF1-AF20-01C10BB33A33@yandex-team.ru
2021-06-29 04:17:55 +02:00
WalCompression
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
WalLevel
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WalRcvData
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
WalRcvExecResult
WalRcvExecStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WalRcvState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
WalRcvStreamOptions
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
WalReceiverConn
WalReceiverFunctionsType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WalSnd
WalSndCtlData
Allow logical decoding via the walsender interface. In order for this to work, walsenders need the optional ability to connect to a database, so the "replication" keyword now allows true or false, for backward-compatibility, and the new value "database" (which causes the "dbname" parameter to be respected). walsender needs to loop not only when idle but also when sending decoded data to the user and when waiting for more xlog data to decode. This means that there are now three separate loops inside walsender.c; although some refactoring has been done here, this is still a bit ugly. Andres Freund, with contributions from Álvaro Herrera, and further review by me.
2014-03-10 18:50:28 +01:00
WalSndSendDataCallback
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
WalSndState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
WalTimeSample
Add infrastructure to track WAL usage. This allows gathering the WAL generation statistics for each statement execution. The three statistics that we collect are the number of WAL records, the number of full page writes and the amount of WAL bytes generated. This helps the users who have write-intensive workload to see the impact of I/O due to WAL. This further enables us to see approximately what percentage of overall WAL is due to full page writes. In the future, we can extend this functionality to allow us to compute the the exact amount of WAL data due to full page writes. This patch in itself is just an infrastructure to compute WAL usage data. The upcoming patches will expose this data via explain, auto_explain, pg_stat_statements and verbose (auto)vacuum output. Author: Kirill Bychik, Julien Rouhaud Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Fujii Masao and Amit Kapila Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
2020-04-04 06:32:08 +02:00
WalUsage
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
WalWriteMethod
Walfile
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WindowAgg
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
WindowAggPath
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WindowAggState
WindowAggStatus
WindowClause
WindowClauseSortData
WindowDef
WindowFunc
WindowFuncExprState
WindowFuncLists
WindowObject
WindowObjectData
WindowStatePerAgg
WindowStatePerAggData
WindowStatePerFunc
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
WithCheckOption
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WithClause
WordEntry
WordEntryIN
WordEntryPos
WordEntryPosVector
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
WordEntryPosVector1
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WorkTableScan
WorkTableScanState
WorkerInfo
WorkerInfoData
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
WorkerInstrumentation
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
WorkerJobDumpPtrType
WorkerJobRestorePtrType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
Working_State
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
WriteBufPtrType
WriteBytePtrType
Allow logical decoding via the walsender interface. In order for this to work, walsenders need the optional ability to connect to a database, so the "replication" keyword now allows true or false, for backward-compatibility, and the new value "database" (which causes the "dbname" parameter to be respected). walsender needs to loop not only when idle but also when sending decoded data to the user and when waiting for more xlog data to decode. This means that there are now three separate loops inside walsender.c; although some refactoring has been done here, this is still a bit ugly. Andres Freund, with contributions from Álvaro Herrera, and further review by me.
2014-03-10 18:50:28 +01:00
WriteDataCallback
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
WriteDataPtrType
WriteExtraTocPtrType
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
WriteFunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
WriteManifestState
WriteTarState
Allow to trigger kernel writeback after a configurable number of writes. Currently writes to the main data files of postgres all go through the OS page cache. This means that some operating systems can end up collecting a large number of dirty buffers in their respective page caches. When these dirty buffers are flushed to storage rapidly, be it because of fsync(), timeouts, or dirty ratios, latency for other reads and writes can increase massively. This is the primary reason for regular massive stalls observed in real world scenarios and artificial benchmarks; on rotating disks stalls on the order of hundreds of seconds have been observed. On linux it is possible to control this by reducing the global dirty limits significantly, reducing the above problem. But global configuration is rather problematic because it'll affect other applications; also PostgreSQL itself doesn't always generally want this behavior, e.g. for temporary files it's undesirable. Several operating systems allow some control over the kernel page cache. Linux has sync_file_range(2), several posix systems have msync(2) and posix_fadvise(2). sync_file_range(2) is preferable because it requires no special setup, whereas msync() requires the to-be-flushed range to be mmap'ed. For the purpose of flushing dirty data posix_fadvise(2) is the worst alternative, as flushing dirty data is just a side-effect of POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED, which also removes the pages from the page cache. Thus the feature is enabled by default only on linux, but can be enabled on all systems that have any of the above APIs. While desirable and likely possible this patch does not contain an implementation for windows. With the infrastructure added, writes made via checkpointer, bgwriter and normal user backends can be flushed after a configurable number of writes. Each of these sources of writes controlled by a separate GUC, checkpointer_flush_after, bgwriter_flush_after and backend_flush_after respectively; they're separate because the number of flushes that are good are separate, and because the performance considerations of controlled flushing for each of these are different. A later patch will add checkpoint sorting - after that flushes from the ckeckpoint will almost always be desirable. Bgwriter flushes are most of the time going to be random, which are slow on lots of storage hardware. Flushing in backends works well if the storage and bgwriter can keep up, but if not it can have negative consequences. This patch is likely to have negative performance consequences without checkpoint sorting, but unfortunately so has sorting without flush control. Discussion: alpine.DEB.2.10.1506011320000.28433@sto Author: Fabien Coelho and Andres Freund
2016-02-19 21:13:05 +01:00
WritebackContext
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
X509
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
X509_EXTENSION
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
X509_NAME
X509_NAME_ENTRY
X509_STORE
X509_STORE_CTX
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
XLTW_Oper
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XLogCtlData
XLogCtlInsert
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
XLogDumpConfig
XLogDumpPrivate
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XLogLongPageHeader
XLogLongPageHeaderData
XLogPageHeader
XLogPageHeaderData
XLogPageReadCB
XLogPageReadPrivate
Add circular WAL decoding buffer, take II. Teach xlogreader.c to decode the WAL into a circular buffer. This will support optimizations based on looking ahead, to follow in a later commit. * XLogReadRecord() works as before, decoding records one by one, and allowing them to be examined via the traditional XLogRecGetXXX() macros and certain traditional members like xlogreader->ReadRecPtr. * An alternative new interface XLogReadAhead()/XLogNextRecord() is added that returns pointers to DecodedXLogRecord objects so that it's now possible to look ahead in the WAL stream while replaying. * In order to be able to use the new interface effectively while streaming data, support is added for the page_read() callback to respond to a new nonblocking mode with XLREAD_WOULDBLOCK instead of waiting for more data to arrive. No direct user of the new interface is included in this commit, though XLogReadRecord() uses it internally. Existing code doesn't need to change, except in a few places where it was accessing reader internals directly and now needs to go through accessor macros. Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier versions) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ4VJN8ttxScUFM8dOKX0BrBiboo5uz1cq=AovOddfHpA@mail.gmail.com
2022-03-18 05:45:04 +01:00
XLogPageReadResult
Prefetch data referenced by the WAL, take II. Introduce a new GUC recovery_prefetch. When enabled, look ahead in the WAL and try to initiate asynchronous reading of referenced data blocks that are not yet cached in our buffer pool. For now, this is done with posix_fadvise(), which has several caveats. Since not all OSes have that system call, "try" is provided so that it can be enabled where available. Better mechanisms for asynchronous I/O are possible in later work. Set to "try" for now for test coverage. Default setting to be finalized before release. The GUC wal_decode_buffer_size limits the distance we can look ahead in bytes of decoded data. The existing GUC maintenance_io_concurrency is used to limit the number of concurrent I/Os allowed, based on pessimistic heuristics used to infer that I/Os have begun and completed. We'll also not look more than maintenance_io_concurrency * 4 block references ahead. Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version) Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version) Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <Jakub.Wartak@tomtom.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Sait Talha Nisanci <Sait.Nisanci@microsoft.com> (earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ4VJN8ttxScUFM8dOKX0BrBiboo5uz1cq%3DAovOddfHpA%40mail.gmail.com
2022-04-07 09:28:40 +02:00
XLogPrefetchStats
XLogPrefetcher
XLogPrefetcherFilter
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XLogReaderRoutine
XLogReaderState
XLogRecData
XLogRecPtr
Prefetch data referenced by the WAL, take II. Introduce a new GUC recovery_prefetch. When enabled, look ahead in the WAL and try to initiate asynchronous reading of referenced data blocks that are not yet cached in our buffer pool. For now, this is done with posix_fadvise(), which has several caveats. Since not all OSes have that system call, "try" is provided so that it can be enabled where available. Better mechanisms for asynchronous I/O are possible in later work. Set to "try" for now for test coverage. Default setting to be finalized before release. The GUC wal_decode_buffer_size limits the distance we can look ahead in bytes of decoded data. The existing GUC maintenance_io_concurrency is used to limit the number of concurrent I/Os allowed, based on pessimistic heuristics used to infer that I/Os have begun and completed. We'll also not look more than maintenance_io_concurrency * 4 block references ahead. Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version) Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version) Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <Jakub.Wartak@tomtom.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com> (earlier version) Tested-by: Sait Talha Nisanci <Sait.Nisanci@microsoft.com> (earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ4VJN8ttxScUFM8dOKX0BrBiboo5uz1cq%3DAovOddfHpA%40mail.gmail.com
2022-04-07 09:28:40 +02:00
XLogRecStats
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XLogRecord
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
XLogRecordBlockCompressHeader
XLogRecordBlockHeader
XLogRecordBlockImageHeader
Introduce logical decoding. This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is, inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them. It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema of the effected tables. The output format is controlled by a so-called "output plugin"; an example is included. To make use of this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system, and to perform filtering. Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream changes via walsender. Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan, Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve Singer.
2014-03-03 22:32:18 +01:00
XLogRecordBuffer
Split xlog.c into xlog.c and xlogrecovery.c. This moves the functions related to performing WAL recovery into the new xlogrecovery.c source file, leaving xlog.c responsible for maintaining the WAL buffers, coordinating the startup and switch from recovery to normal operations, and other miscellaneous stuff that have always been in xlog.c. Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Robert Haas Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/a31f27b4-a31d-f976-6217-2b03be646ffa%40iki.fi
2022-02-16 08:30:38 +01:00
XLogRecoveryCtlData
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
XLogRedoAction
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
XLogSegNo
XLogSource
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
XLogStats
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XLogwrtResult
XLogwrtRqst
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
XPV
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XPVIV
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
XPVMG
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XactCallback
XactCallbackItem
XactEvent
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
XactLockTableWaitInfo
Extend amcheck to check heap pages. Mark Dilger, reviewed by Peter Geoghegan, Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier, Amul Sul, and by me. Some last-minute cosmetic revisions by me. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/12ED3DA8-25F0-4B68-937D-D907CFBF08E7@enterprisedb.com
2020-10-22 14:44:18 +02:00
XidBoundsViolation
XidCacheStatus
XidCommitStatus
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
XidStatus
XmlExpr
XmlExprOp
XmlOptionType
XmlSerialize
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
XmlTableBuilderData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
YYLTYPE
YYSTYPE
YY_BUFFER_STATE
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
ZSTD_CCtx
ZSTD_DCtx
ZSTD_inBuffer
ZSTD_outBuffer
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
_SPI_connection
_SPI_plan
__AssignProcessToJobObject
__CreateJobObject
__CreateRestrictedToken
__IsProcessInJob
__QueryInformationJobObject
__SetInformationJobObject
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
__time64_t
_dev_t
_ino_t
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
_locale_t
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
_resultmap
_stringlist
acquireLocksOnSubLinks_context
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
adjust_appendrel_attrs_context
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
aff_regex_struct
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
allocfunc
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
amadjustmembers_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
ambeginscan_function
ambuild_function
ambuildempty_function
ambuildphasename_function
ambulkdelete_function
amcanreturn_function
amcostestimate_function
amendscan_function
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
amestimateparallelscan_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
amgetbitmap_function
amgettuple_function
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
aminitparallelscan_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
aminsert_function
ammarkpos_function
amoptions_function
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
amparallelrescan_function
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
amproperty_function
amrescan_function
amrestrpos_function
amvacuumcleanup_function
amvalidate_function
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
array_iter
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
array_unnest_fctx
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
assign_collations_context
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
autovac_table
av_relation
avl_dbase
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
avl_node
avl_tree
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
avw_dbase
backslashResult
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
backup_manifest_info
backup_manifest_option
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
base_yy_extra_type
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
basebackup_options
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
bbsink
bbsink_copystream
bbsink_gzip
bbsink_lz4
bbsink_ops
bbsink_server
bbsink_shell
bbsink_state
bbsink_throttle
bbsink_zstd
bbstreamer
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
bbstreamer_archive_context
bbstreamer_extractor
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
bbstreamer_gzip_decompressor
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
bbstreamer_gzip_writer
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
bbstreamer_lz4_frame
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
bbstreamer_member
bbstreamer_ops
bbstreamer_plain_writer
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
bbstreamer_recovery_injector
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
bbstreamer_tar_archiver
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
bbstreamer_tar_parser
bbstreamer_zstd_frame
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
bgworker_main_type
binaryheap
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
binaryheap_comparator
bitmapword
Update typedefs.list and re-run pgindent Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaA9=1RWKtBWpDaj+sF3Stgc8sHgf5z=KGtbjwPLQVDMA@mail.gmail.com
2017-11-29 15:24:24 +01:00
bits16
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
bits32
bits8
Add Bloom filter implementation. A Bloom filter is a space-efficient, probabilistic data structure that can be used to test set membership. Callers will sometimes incur false positives, but never false negatives. The rate of false positives is a function of the total number of elements and the amount of memory available for the Bloom filter. Two classic applications of Bloom filters are cache filtering, and data synchronization testing. Any user of Bloom filters must accept the possibility of false positives as a cost worth paying for the benefit in space efficiency. This commit adds a test harness extension module, test_bloomfilter. It can be used to get a sense of how the Bloom filter implementation performs under varying conditions. This is infrastructure for the upcoming "heapallindexed" amcheck patch, which verifies the consistency of a heap relation against one of its indexes. Author: Peter Geoghegan Reviewed-By: Andrey Borodin, Michael Paquier, Thomas Munro, Andres Freund Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzm5VmG7cu1N-H=nnS57wZThoSDQU+F5dewx3o84M+jY=g@mail.gmail.com
2018-04-01 02:49:41 +02:00
bloom_filter
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
boolKEY
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
brin_column_state
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
brin_serialize_callback_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
bytea
cached_re_str
Use FullTransactionId for the transaction stack. Provide GetTopFullTransactionId() and GetCurrentFullTransactionId(). The intended users of these interfaces are access methods that use xids for visibility checks but don't want to have to go back and "freeze" existing references some time later before the 32 bit xid counter wraps around. Use a new struct to serialize the transaction state for parallel query, because FullTransactionId doesn't fit into the previous serialization scheme very well. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1%2BMv%2Bmb0HFfWM9Srtc6MVe160WFurXV68iAFMcagRZ0dQ%40mail.gmail.com
2019-03-27 22:59:19 +01:00
canonicalize_state
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
cashKEY
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
catalogid_hash
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
cfp
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
check_agg_arguments_context
check_function_callback
check_network_data
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
check_object_relabel_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
check_password_hook_type
check_ungrouped_columns_context
chr
clock_t
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
cmpEntriesArg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
codes_t
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
collation_cache_entry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
color
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
colormaprange
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
compare_context
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
config_var_value
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
contain_aggs_of_level_context
convert_testexpr_context
Add support for COPY TO callback functions This is useful as a way for extensions to process COPY TO rows in the way they see fit (say auditing, analytics, backend, etc.) without the need to invoke an external process running as the OS user running the backend through PROGRAM that requires superuser rights. COPY FROM already provides a similar callback for logical replication. For COPY TO, the callback is triggered when we are ready to send a row in CopySendEndOfRow(), which is the same code path as when sending a row to a frontend or a pipe/file. A small test module, test_copy_callbacks, is added to provide some coverage for this facility. Author: Bilva Sanaba, Nathan Bossart Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/253C21D1-FCEB-41D9-A2AF-E6517015B7D7@amazon.com
2022-10-11 04:45:52 +02:00
copy_data_dest_cb
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
copy_data_source_cb
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
core_YYSTYPE
core_yy_extra_type
core_yyscan_t
Add integrity-checking functions to pg_visibility. The new pg_check_visible() and pg_check_frozen() functions can be used to verify that the visibility map bits for a relation's data pages match the actual state of the tuples on those pages. Amit Kapila and Robert Haas, reviewed (in earlier versions) by Andres Freund. Additional testing help by Thomas Munro.
2016-06-15 20:33:58 +02:00
corrupt_items
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
cost_qual_eval_context
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
cp_hash_func
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
create_upper_paths_hook_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
createdb_failure_params
crosstab_HashEnt
crosstab_cat_desc
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
datapagemap_iterator_t
datapagemap_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
dateKEY
datetkn
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
dce_uuid_t
Add doubly linked count list implementation We have various requirements when using a dlist_head to keep track of the number of items in the list. This, traditionally, has been done by maintaining a counter variable in the calling code. Here we tidy this up by adding "dclist", which is very similar to dlist but also keeps track of the number of items stored in the list. Callers may use the new dclist_count() function when they need to know how many items are stored. Obtaining the count is an O(1) operation. For simplicity reasons, dclist and dlist both use dlist_node as their node type and dlist_iter/dlist_mutable_iter as their iterator type. dclists have all of the same functionality as dlists except there is no function named dclist_delete(). To remove an item from a list dclist_delete_from() must be used. This requires knowing which dclist the given item is stored in. Additionally, here we also convert some dlists where additional code exists to keep track of the number of items stored and to make these use dclists instead. Author: David Rowley Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy, Aleksander Alekseev Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrtVxr+FXEX0VbViCFKDGxA3tWDgw9oFewNXCJMmwLjLg@mail.gmail.com
2022-11-02 02:06:05 +01:00
dclist_head
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
decimal
deparse_columns
deparse_context
deparse_expr_cxt
deparse_namespace
destructor
dev_t
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
digit
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
disassembledLeaf
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
dlist_head
dlist_iter
dlist_mutable_iter
dlist_node
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ds_state
Introduce dynamic shared memory areas. Programmers discovered decades ago that it was useful to have a simple interface for allocating and freeing memory, which is why malloc() and free() were invented. Unfortunately, those handy tools don't work with dynamic shared memory segments because those are specific to PostgreSQL and are not necessarily mapped at the same address in every cooperating process. So invent our own allocator instead. This makes it possible for processes cooperating as part of parallel query execution to allocate and free chunks of memory without having to reserve them prior to the start of execution. It could also be used for longer lived objects; for example, we could consider storing data for pg_stat_statements or the stats collector in shared memory using these interfaces, rather than writing them to files. Basically, anything that needs shared memory but can't predict in advance how much it's going to need might find this useful. Thomas Munro and Robert Haas. The original code (of mine) on which Thomas based his work was actually designed to be a new backend-local memory allocator for PostgreSQL, but that hasn't gone anywhere - or not yet, anyway. Thomas took that work and performed major refactoring and extensive modifications to make it work with dynamic shared memory, including the addition of appropriate locking. Discussion: CA+TgmobkeWptGwiNa+SGFWsTLzTzD-CeLz0KcE-y6LFgoUus4A@mail.gmail.com Discussion: CAEepm=1z5WLuNoJ80PaCvz6EtG9dN0j-KuHcHtU6QEfcPP5-qA@mail.gmail.com
2016-12-02 18:34:36 +01:00
dsa_area
dsa_area_control
dsa_area_pool
dsa_area_span
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
dsa_handle
dsa_pointer
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
dsa_pointer_atomic
Introduce dynamic shared memory areas. Programmers discovered decades ago that it was useful to have a simple interface for allocating and freeing memory, which is why malloc() and free() were invented. Unfortunately, those handy tools don't work with dynamic shared memory segments because those are specific to PostgreSQL and are not necessarily mapped at the same address in every cooperating process. So invent our own allocator instead. This makes it possible for processes cooperating as part of parallel query execution to allocate and free chunks of memory without having to reserve them prior to the start of execution. It could also be used for longer lived objects; for example, we could consider storing data for pg_stat_statements or the stats collector in shared memory using these interfaces, rather than writing them to files. Basically, anything that needs shared memory but can't predict in advance how much it's going to need might find this useful. Thomas Munro and Robert Haas. The original code (of mine) on which Thomas based his work was actually designed to be a new backend-local memory allocator for PostgreSQL, but that hasn't gone anywhere - or not yet, anyway. Thomas took that work and performed major refactoring and extensive modifications to make it work with dynamic shared memory, including the addition of appropriate locking. Discussion: CA+TgmobkeWptGwiNa+SGFWsTLzTzD-CeLz0KcE-y6LFgoUus4A@mail.gmail.com Discussion: CAEepm=1z5WLuNoJ80PaCvz6EtG9dN0j-KuHcHtU6QEfcPP5-qA@mail.gmail.com
2016-12-02 18:34:36 +01:00
dsa_segment_header
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
dsa_segment_index
Introduce dynamic shared memory areas. Programmers discovered decades ago that it was useful to have a simple interface for allocating and freeing memory, which is why malloc() and free() were invented. Unfortunately, those handy tools don't work with dynamic shared memory segments because those are specific to PostgreSQL and are not necessarily mapped at the same address in every cooperating process. So invent our own allocator instead. This makes it possible for processes cooperating as part of parallel query execution to allocate and free chunks of memory without having to reserve them prior to the start of execution. It could also be used for longer lived objects; for example, we could consider storing data for pg_stat_statements or the stats collector in shared memory using these interfaces, rather than writing them to files. Basically, anything that needs shared memory but can't predict in advance how much it's going to need might find this useful. Thomas Munro and Robert Haas. The original code (of mine) on which Thomas based his work was actually designed to be a new backend-local memory allocator for PostgreSQL, but that hasn't gone anywhere - or not yet, anyway. Thomas took that work and performed major refactoring and extensive modifications to make it work with dynamic shared memory, including the addition of appropriate locking. Discussion: CA+TgmobkeWptGwiNa+SGFWsTLzTzD-CeLz0KcE-y6LFgoUus4A@mail.gmail.com Discussion: CAEepm=1z5WLuNoJ80PaCvz6EtG9dN0j-KuHcHtU6QEfcPP5-qA@mail.gmail.com
2016-12-02 18:34:36 +01:00
dsa_segment_map
Hash tables backed by DSA shared memory. Add general purpose chaining hash tables for DSA memory. Unlike DynaHash in shared memory mode, these hash tables can grow as required, and cope with being mapped into different addresses in different backends. There is a wide range of potential users for such a hash table, though it's very likely the interface will need to evolve as we come to understand the needs of different kinds of users. E.g support for iterators and incremental resizing is planned for later commits and the details of the callback signatures are likely to change. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: John Gorman, Andres Freund, Dilip Kumar, Robert Haas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=3d8o8XdVwYT6O=bHKsKAM2pu2D6sV1S_=4d+jStVCE7w@mail.gmail.com https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=0ZtQ-SpsgCyzzYpsXS6e=kZWqk3g5Ygn3MDV7A8dabUA@mail.gmail.com
2017-08-23 07:41:32 +02:00
dshash_compare_function
dshash_hash
dshash_hash_function
dshash_parameters
dshash_partition
dshash: Add sequential scan support. Add ability to scan all entries sequentially to dshash. The interface is similar but a bit different both from that of dynahash and simple dshash search functions. The most significant differences is that dshash's interfac always needs a call to dshash_seq_term when scan ends. Another is locking. Dshash holds partition lock when returning an entry, dshash_seq_next() also holds lock when returning an entry but callers shouldn't release it, since the lock is essential to continue a scan. The seqscan interface allows entry deletion while a scan is in progress using dshash_delete_current(). Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyoga.ntt@gmail.com>
2022-03-10 21:54:54 +01:00
dshash_seq_status
Hash tables backed by DSA shared memory. Add general purpose chaining hash tables for DSA memory. Unlike DynaHash in shared memory mode, these hash tables can grow as required, and cope with being mapped into different addresses in different backends. There is a wide range of potential users for such a hash table, though it's very likely the interface will need to evolve as we come to understand the needs of different kinds of users. E.g support for iterators and incremental resizing is planned for later commits and the details of the callback signatures are likely to change. Author: Thomas Munro Reviewed-By: John Gorman, Andres Freund, Dilip Kumar, Robert Haas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=3d8o8XdVwYT6O=bHKsKAM2pu2D6sV1S_=4d+jStVCE7w@mail.gmail.com https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=0ZtQ-SpsgCyzzYpsXS6e=kZWqk3g5Ygn3MDV7A8dabUA@mail.gmail.com
2017-08-23 07:41:32 +02:00
dshash_table
dshash_table_control
dshash_table_handle
dshash_table_item
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
dsm_control_header
dsm_control_item
dsm_handle
dsm_op
dsm_segment
dsm_segment_detach_callback
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
eLogType
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ean13
eary
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
ec_matches_callback_type
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
ec_member_foreign_arg
ec_member_matches_arg
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
emit_log_hook_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
eval_const_expressions_context
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
exec_thread_arg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
execution_state
explain_get_index_name_hook_type
f_smgr
fd_set
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
fe_scram_state
fe_scram_state_enum
pg_rewind: Refactor the abstraction to fetch from local/libpq source. This makes the abstraction of a "source" server more clear, by introducing a common abstract class, borrowing the object-oriented programming term, that represents all the operations that can be done on the source server. There are two implementations of it, one for fetching via libpq, and another to fetch from a local directory. This adds some code, but makes it easier to understand what's going on. The copy_executeFileMap() and libpq_executeFileMap() functions contained basically the same logic, just calling different functions to fetch the source files. Refactor so that the common logic is in one place, in a new function called perform_rewind(). Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Soumyadeep Chakraborty Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/0c5b3783-af52-3ee5-f8fa-6e794061f70d%40iki.fi
2020-11-04 10:21:18 +01:00
fetch_range_request
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
file_action_t
file_entry_t
file_type_t
pg_rewind: Refactor the abstraction to fetch from local/libpq source. This makes the abstraction of a "source" server more clear, by introducing a common abstract class, borrowing the object-oriented programming term, that represents all the operations that can be done on the source server. There are two implementations of it, one for fetching via libpq, and another to fetch from a local directory. This adds some code, but makes it easier to understand what's going on. The copy_executeFileMap() and libpq_executeFileMap() functions contained basically the same logic, just calling different functions to fetch the source files. Refactor so that the common logic is in one place, in a new function called perform_rewind(). Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Soumyadeep Chakraborty Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/0c5b3783-af52-3ee5-f8fa-6e794061f70d%40iki.fi
2020-11-04 10:21:18 +01:00
filehash_hash
Use more efficient hashtable for execGrouping.c to speed up hash aggregation. The more efficient hashtable speeds up hash-aggregations with more than a few hundred groups significantly. Improvements of over 120% have been measured. Due to the the different hash table queries that not fully determined (e.g. GROUP BY without ORDER BY) may change their result order. The conversion is largely straight-forward, except that, due to the static element types of simplehash.h type hashes, the additional data some users store in elements (e.g. the per-group working data for hash aggregaters) is now stored in TupleHashEntryData->additional. The meaning of BuildTupleHashTable's entrysize (renamed to additionalsize) has been changed to only be about the additionally stored size. That size is only used for the initial sizing of the hash-table. Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra Discussion: <20160727004333.r3e2k2y6fvk2ntup@alap3.anarazel.de>
2016-10-15 02:22:51 +02:00
filehash_iterator
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
filemap_t
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
fill_string_relopt
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
finalize_primnode_context
find_dependent_phvs_context
find_expr_references_context
fix_join_expr_context
fix_scan_expr_context
fix_upper_expr_context
fix_windowagg_cond_context
flatten_join_alias_vars_context
Rework query relation permission checking Currently, information about the permissions to be checked on relations mentioned in a query is stored in their range table entries. So the executor must scan the entire range table looking for relations that need to have permissions checked. This can make the permission checking part of the executor initialization needlessly expensive when many inheritance children are present in the range range. While the permissions need not be checked on the individual child relations, the executor still must visit every range table entry to filter them out. This commit moves the permission checking information out of the range table entries into a new plan node called RTEPermissionInfo. Every top-level (inheritance "root") RTE_RELATION entry in the range table gets one and a list of those is maintained alongside the range table. This new list is initialized by the parser when initializing the range table. The rewriter can add more entries to it as rules/views are expanded. Finally, the planner combines the lists of the individual subqueries into one flat list that is passed to the executor for checking. To make it quick to find the RTEPermissionInfo entry belonging to a given relation, RangeTblEntry gets a new Index field 'perminfoindex' that stores the corresponding RTEPermissionInfo's index in the query's list of the latter. ExecutorCheckPerms_hook has gained another List * argument; the signature is now: typedef bool (*ExecutorCheckPerms_hook_type) (List *rangeTable, List *rtePermInfos, bool ereport_on_violation); The first argument is no longer used by any in-core uses of the hook, but we leave it in place because there may be other implementations that do. Implementations should likely scan the rtePermInfos list to determine which operations to allow or deny. Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqGjJDmUhDSfv-U2qhKJjt9ST7Xh9JXC_irsAQ1TAUsJYg@mail.gmail.com
2022-12-06 16:09:24 +01:00
flatten_rtes_walker_context
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
float4
float4KEY
float8
float8KEY
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
floating_decimal_32
floating_decimal_64
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
fmAggrefPtr
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
fmExprContextCallbackFunction
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
fmNodePtr
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
fmStringInfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
fmgr_hook_type
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
foreign_glob_cxt
foreign_loc_cxt
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
freeaddrinfo_ptr_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
freefunc
fsec_t
Update typedef list for upcoming pgindent run.
2011-06-09 20:01:49 +02:00
gbt_vsrt_arg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
gbtree_ninfo
gbtree_vinfo
generate_series_fctx
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
generate_series_numeric_fctx
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
generate_series_timestamp_fctx
generate_series_timestamptz_fctx
generate_subscripts_fctx
get_attavgwidth_hook_type
get_index_stats_hook_type
get_relation_info_hook_type
get_relation_stats_hook_type
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
getaddrinfo_ptr_t
getnameinfo_ptr_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
gid_t
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
gin_leafpage_items_state
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ginxlogCreatePostingTree
ginxlogDeleteListPages
ginxlogDeletePage
ginxlogInsert
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ginxlogInsertDataInternal
ginxlogInsertEntry
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ginxlogInsertListPage
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ginxlogRecompressDataLeaf
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ginxlogSplit
ginxlogUpdateMeta
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
ginxlogVacuumDataLeafPage
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
gistxlogDelete
gistxlogPage
gistxlogPageDelete
gistxlogPageReuse
gistxlogPageSplit
gistxlogPageUpdate
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
grouping_sets_data
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
gseg_picksplit_item
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
gss_buffer_desc
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
gss_cred_id_t
gss_ctx_id_t
gss_name_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
gtrgm_consistent_cache
gzFile
hashfunc
hbaPort
heap_page_items_state
help_handler
hlCheck
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
hstoreCheckKeyLen_t
hstoreCheckValLen_t
hstorePairs_t
hstoreUniquePairs_t
hstoreUpgrade_t
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
hyperLogLogState
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
ifState
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ilist
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
import_error_callback_arg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
indexed_tlist
inet
inetKEY
inet_struct
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
init_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
inline_cte_walker_context
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
inline_error_callback_arg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ino_t
instr_time
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
int128
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
int16
int16KEY
int2vector
int32
int32KEY
int32_t
int64
int64KEY
int8
internalPQconninfoOption
intptr_t
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
intset_internal_node
intset_leaf_node
intset_node
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
intvKEY
Add pg_stat_io view, providing more detailed IO statistics Builds on 28e626bde00 and f30d62c2fc6. See the former for motivation. Rows of the view show IO operations for a particular backend type, IO target object, IO context combination (e.g. a client backend's operations on permanent relations in shared buffers) and each column in the view is the total number of IO Operations done (e.g. writes). So a cell in the view would be, for example, the number of blocks of relation data written from shared buffers by client backends since the last stats reset. In anticipation of tracking WAL IO and non-block-oriented IO (such as temporary file IO), the "op_bytes" column specifies the unit of the "reads", "writes", and "extends" columns for a given row. Rows for combinations of IO operation, backend type, target object and context that never occur, are ommitted entirely. For example, checkpointer will never operate on temporary relations. Similarly, if an IO operation never occurs for such a combination, the IO operation's cell will be null, to distinguish from 0 observed IO operations. For example, bgwriter should not perform reads. Note that some of the cells in the view are redundant with fields in pg_stat_bgwriter (e.g. buffers_backend). For now, these have been kept for backwards compatibility. Bumps catversion. Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Author: Samay Sharma <smilingsamay@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Maciek Sakrejda <m.sakrejda@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Lukas Fittl <lukas@fittl.com> Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
2023-02-11 18:51:58 +01:00
io_stat_col
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
itemIdCompact
itemIdCompactData
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
iterator
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
jmp_buf
join_search_hook_type
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
json_aelem_action
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
json_manifest_error_callback
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
json_manifest_perfile_callback
json_manifest_perwalrange_callback
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
json_ofield_action
json_scalar_action
json_struct_action
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
keyEntryData
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
key_t
lclContext
lclTocEntry
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
leafSegmentInfo
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
leaf_item
pg_rewind: Refactor the abstraction to fetch from local/libpq source. This makes the abstraction of a "source" server more clear, by introducing a common abstract class, borrowing the object-oriented programming term, that represents all the operations that can be done on the source server. There are two implementations of it, one for fetching via libpq, and another to fetch from a local directory. This adds some code, but makes it easier to understand what's going on. The copy_executeFileMap() and libpq_executeFileMap() functions contained basically the same logic, just calling different functions to fetch the source files. Refactor so that the common logic is in one place, in a new function called perform_rewind(). Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Soumyadeep Chakraborty Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/0c5b3783-af52-3ee5-f8fa-6e794061f70d%40iki.fi
2020-11-04 10:21:18 +01:00
libpq_source
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
line_t
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
lineno_t
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
list_sort_comparator
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
local_relopt
local_relopts
pg_rewind: Refactor the abstraction to fetch from local/libpq source. This makes the abstraction of a "source" server more clear, by introducing a common abstract class, borrowing the object-oriented programming term, that represents all the operations that can be done on the source server. There are two implementations of it, one for fetching via libpq, and another to fetch from a local directory. This adds some code, but makes it easier to understand what's going on. The copy_executeFileMap() and libpq_executeFileMap() functions contained basically the same logic, just calling different functions to fetch the source files. Refactor so that the common logic is in one place, in a new function called perform_rewind(). Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Soumyadeep Chakraborty Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/0c5b3783-af52-3ee5-f8fa-6e794061f70d%40iki.fi
2020-11-04 10:21:18 +01:00
local_source
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
locale_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
locate_agg_of_level_context
locate_var_of_level_context
locate_windowfunc_context
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
logstreamer_param
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
lquery
lquery_level
lquery_variant
ltree
ltree_gist
ltree_level
ltxtquery
mXactCacheEnt
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
mac8KEY
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
macKEY
macaddr
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
macaddr8
macaddr_sortsupport_state
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
manifest_file
manifest_files_hash
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
manifest_files_iterator
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
manifest_wal_range
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
map_variable_attnos_context
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
max_parallel_hazard_context
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
mb2wchar_with_len_converter
mbchar_verifier
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
mbcharacter_incrementer
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
mbdisplaylen_converter
mblen_converter
mbstr_verifier
Change the name of the Result Cache node to Memoize "Result Cache" was never a great name for this node, but nobody managed to come up with another name that anyone liked enough. That was until David Johnston mentioned "Node Memoization", which Tom Lane revised to just "Memoize". People seem to like "Memoize", so let's do the rename. Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210708165145.GG1176@momjian.us Backpatch-through: 14, where Result Cache was introduced
2021-07-14 02:43:58 +02:00
memoize_hash
memoize_iterator
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
metastring
mix_data_t
mixedStruct
mode_t
movedb_failure_params
Multirange datatypes Multiranges are basically sorted arrays of non-overlapping ranges with set-theoretic operations defined over them. Since v14, each range type automatically gets a corresponding multirange datatype. There are both manual and automatic mechanisms for naming multirange types. Once can specify multirange type name using multirange_type_name attribute in CREATE TYPE.  Otherwise, a multirange type name is generated automatically. If the range type name contains "range" then we change that to "multirange". Otherwise, we add "_multirange" to the end. Implementation of multiranges comes with a space-efficient internal representation format, which evades extra paddings and duplicated storage of oids.  Altogether this format allows fetching a particular range by its index in O(n). Statistic gathering and selectivity estimation are implemented for multiranges. For this purpose, stored multirange is approximated as union range without gaps. This field will likely need improvements in the future. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALNJ-vSUpQ_Y%3DjXvTxt1VYFztaBSsWVXeF1y6gTYQ4bOiWDLgQ%40mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a0b8026459d1e6167933be2104a6174e7d40d0ab.camel%40j-davis.com#fe7218c83b08068bfffb0c5293eceda0 Author: Paul Jungwirth, revised by me Reviewed-by: David Fetter, Corey Huinker, Jeff Davis, Pavel Stehule Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Tom Lane, Isaac Morland, David G. Johnston Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu, Alexander Korotkov
2020-12-20 05:20:33 +01:00
multirange_bsearch_comparison
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
multirange_unnest_fctx
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
mxact
mxtruncinfo
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
needs_fmgr_hook_type
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
network_sortsupport_state
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
nodeitem
normal_rand_fctx
ntile_context
numeric
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
object_access_hook_type
object_access_hook_type_str
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
off_t
oidKEY
oidvector
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
on_dsm_detach_callback
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
on_exit_nicely_callback
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
openssl_tls_init_hook_typ
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
ossl_EVP_cipher_func
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
other
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
output_type
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
pagetable_hash
pagetable_iterator
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
pairingheap
pairingheap_comparator
pairingheap_node
parallel_worker_main_type
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
parse_error_callback_arg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
parser_context
Implement partition-wise grouping/aggregation. If the partition keys of input relation are part of the GROUP BY clause, all the rows belonging to a given group come from a single partition. This allows aggregation/grouping over a partitioned relation to be broken down * into aggregation/grouping on each partition. This should be no worse, and often better, than the normal approach. If the GROUP BY clause does not contain all the partition keys, we can still perform partial aggregation for each partition and then finalize aggregation after appending the partial results. This is less certain to be a win, but it's still useful. Jeevan Chalke, Ashutosh Bapat, Robert Haas. The larger patch series of which this patch is a part was also reviewed and tested by Antonin Houska, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, David Rowley, Dilip Kumar, Konstantin Knizhnik, Pascal Legrand, and Rafia Sabih. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM2+6=V64_xhstVHie0Rz=KPEQnLJMZt_e314P0jaT_oJ9MR8A@mail.gmail.com
2018-03-22 17:49:48 +01:00
partition_method_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pendingPosition
pgParameterStatus
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
pg_atomic_flag
pg_atomic_uint32
pg_atomic_uint64
Refactor SASL code with a generic interface for its mechanisms The code of SCRAM and SASL have been tightly linked together since SCRAM exists in the core code, making hard to apprehend the addition of new SASL mechanisms, but these are by design different facilities, with SCRAM being an option for SASL. This refactors the code related to both so as the backend and the frontend use a set of callbacks for SASL mechanisms, documenting while on it what is expected by anybody adding a new SASL mechanism. The separation between both layers is neat, using two sets of callbacks for the frontend and the backend to mark the frontier between both facilities. The shape of the callbacks is now directly inspired from the routines used by SCRAM, so the code change is straight-forward, and the SASL code is moved into its own set of files. These will likely change depending on how and if new SASL mechanisms get added in the future. Author: Jacob Champion Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3d2a6f5d50e741117d6baf83eb67ebf1a8a35a11.camel@vmware.com
2021-07-07 03:55:15 +02:00
pg_be_sasl_mech
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_checksum_context
pg_checksum_raw_context
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
pg_checksum_type
Rename backup_compression.{c,h} to compression.{c,h} Compression option handling (level, algorithm or even workers) can be used across several parts of the system and not only base backups. Structures, objects and routines are renamed in consequence, to remove the concept of base backups from this part of the code making this change straight-forward. pg_receivewal, that has gained support for LZ4 since babbbb5, will make use of this infrastructure for its set of compression options, bringing more consistency with pg_basebackup. This cleanup needs to be done before releasing a beta of 15. pg_dump is a potential future target, as well, and adding more compression options to it may happen in 16~. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Georgios Kokolatos Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YlPQGNAAa04raObK@paquier.xyz
2022-04-12 06:38:54 +02:00
pg_compress_algorithm
pg_compress_specification
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
pg_conn_host
pg_conn_host_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_conv_map
pg_crc32
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
pg_crc32c
Move SHA2 routines to a new generic API layer for crypto hashes Two new routines to allocate a hash context and to free it are created, as these become necessary for the goal behind this refactoring: switch the all cryptohash implementations for OpenSSL to use EVP (for FIPS and also because upstream does not recommend the use of low-level cryptohash functions for 20 years). Note that OpenSSL hides the internals of cryptohash contexts since 1.1.0, so it is necessary to leave the allocation to OpenSSL itself, explaining the need for those two new routines. This part is going to require more work to properly track hash contexts with resource owners, but this not introduced here. Still, this refactoring makes the move possible. This reduces the number of routines for all SHA2 implementations from twelve (SHA{224,256,386,512} with init, update and final calls) to five (create, free, init, update and final calls) by incorporating the hash type directly into the hash context data. The new cryptohash routines are moved to a new file, called cryptohash.c for the fallback implementations, with SHA2 specifics becoming a part internal to src/common/. OpenSSL specifics are part of cryptohash_openssl.c. This infrastructure is usable for more hash types, like MD5 or HMAC. Any code paths using the internal SHA2 routines are adapted to report correctly errors, which are most of the changes of this commit. The zones mostly impacted are checksum manifests, libpq and SCRAM. Note that e21cbb4 was a first attempt to switch SHA2 to EVP, but it lacked the refactoring needed for libpq, as done here. This patch has been tested on Linux and Windows, with and without OpenSSL, and down to 1.0.1, the oldest version supported on HEAD. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200924025314.GE7405@paquier.xyz
2020-12-02 02:37:20 +01:00
pg_cryptohash_ctx
Improve error handling of cryptohash computations The existing cryptohash facility was causing problems in some code paths related to MD5 (frontend and backend) that relied on the fact that the only type of error that could happen would be an OOM, as the MD5 implementation used in PostgreSQL ~13 (the in-core implementation is used when compiling with or without OpenSSL in those older versions), could fail only under this circumstance. The new cryptohash facilities can fail for reasons other than OOMs, like attempting MD5 when FIPS is enabled (upstream OpenSSL allows that up to 1.0.2, Fedora and Photon patch OpenSSL 1.1.1 to allow that), so this would cause incorrect reports to show up. This commit extends the cryptohash APIs so as callers of those routines can fetch more context when an error happens, by using a new routine called pg_cryptohash_error(). The error states are stored within each implementation's internal context data, so as it is possible to extend the logic depending on what's suited for an implementation. The default implementation requires few error states, but OpenSSL could report various issues depending on its internal state so more is needed in cryptohash_openssl.c, and the code is shaped so as we are always able to grab the necessary information. The core code is changed to adapt to the new error routine, painting more "const" across the call stack where the static errors are stored, particularly in authentication code paths on variables that provide log details. This way, any future changes would warn if attempting to free these strings. The MD5 authentication code was also a bit blurry about the handling of "logdetail" (LOG sent to the postmaster), so improve the comments related that, while on it. The origin of the problem is 87ae969, that introduced the centralized cryptohash facility. Extra changes are done for pgcrypto in v14 for the non-OpenSSL code path to cope with the improvements done by this commit. Reported-by: Michael Mühlbeyer Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Tom Lane Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/89B7F072-5BBE-4C92-903E-D83E865D9367@trivadis.com Backpatch-through: 14
2022-01-11 01:55:16 +01:00
pg_cryptohash_errno
Move SHA2 routines to a new generic API layer for crypto hashes Two new routines to allocate a hash context and to free it are created, as these become necessary for the goal behind this refactoring: switch the all cryptohash implementations for OpenSSL to use EVP (for FIPS and also because upstream does not recommend the use of low-level cryptohash functions for 20 years). Note that OpenSSL hides the internals of cryptohash contexts since 1.1.0, so it is necessary to leave the allocation to OpenSSL itself, explaining the need for those two new routines. This part is going to require more work to properly track hash contexts with resource owners, but this not introduced here. Still, this refactoring makes the move possible. This reduces the number of routines for all SHA2 implementations from twelve (SHA{224,256,386,512} with init, update and final calls) to five (create, free, init, update and final calls) by incorporating the hash type directly into the hash context data. The new cryptohash routines are moved to a new file, called cryptohash.c for the fallback implementations, with SHA2 specifics becoming a part internal to src/common/. OpenSSL specifics are part of cryptohash_openssl.c. This infrastructure is usable for more hash types, like MD5 or HMAC. Any code paths using the internal SHA2 routines are adapted to report correctly errors, which are most of the changes of this commit. The zones mostly impacted are checksum manifests, libpq and SCRAM. Note that e21cbb4 was a first attempt to switch SHA2 to EVP, but it lacked the refactoring needed for libpq, as done here. This patch has been tested on Linux and Windows, with and without OpenSSL, and down to 1.0.1, the oldest version supported on HEAD. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200924025314.GE7405@paquier.xyz
2020-12-02 02:37:20 +01:00
pg_cryptohash_type
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
pg_ctype_cache
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_enc
pg_enc2gettext
pg_enc2name
pg_encname
Refactor SASL code with a generic interface for its mechanisms The code of SCRAM and SASL have been tightly linked together since SCRAM exists in the core code, making hard to apprehend the addition of new SASL mechanisms, but these are by design different facilities, with SCRAM being an option for SASL. This refactors the code related to both so as the backend and the frontend use a set of callbacks for SASL mechanisms, documenting while on it what is expected by anybody adding a new SASL mechanism. The separation between both layers is neat, using two sets of callbacks for the frontend and the backend to mark the frontier between both facilities. The shape of the callbacks is now directly inspired from the routines used by SCRAM, so the code change is straight-forward, and the SASL code is moved into its own set of files. These will likely change depending on how and if new SASL mechanisms get added in the future. Author: Jacob Champion Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3d2a6f5d50e741117d6baf83eb67ebf1a8a35a11.camel@vmware.com
2021-07-07 03:55:15 +02:00
pg_fe_sasl_mech
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
pg_funcptr_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_gssinfo
Refactor HMAC implementations Similarly to the cryptohash implementations, this refactors the existing HMAC code into a single set of APIs that can be plugged with any crypto libraries PostgreSQL is built with (only OpenSSL currently). If there is no such libraries, a fallback implementation is available. Those new APIs are designed similarly to the existing cryptohash layer, so there is no real new design here, with the same logic around buffer bound checks and memory handling. HMAC has a dependency on cryptohashes, so all the cryptohash types supported by cryptohash{_openssl}.c can be used with HMAC. This refactoring is an advantage mainly for SCRAM, that included its own implementation of HMAC with SHA256 without relying on the existing crypto libraries even if PostgreSQL was built with their support. This code has been tested on Windows and Linux, with and without OpenSSL, across all the versions supported on HEAD from 1.1.1 down to 1.0.1. I have also checked that the implementations are working fine using some sample results, a custom extension of my own, and doing cross-checks across different major versions with SCRAM with the client and the backend. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Bruce Momjian Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/X9m0nkEJEzIPXjeZ@paquier.xyz
2021-04-03 10:30:49 +02:00
pg_hmac_ctx
Improve error handling of HMAC computations This is similar to b69aba7, except that this completes the work for HMAC with a new routine called pg_hmac_error() that would provide more context about the type of error that happened during a HMAC computation: - The fallback HMAC implementation in hmac.c relies on cryptohashes, so in some code paths it is necessary to return back the error generated by cryptohashes. - For the OpenSSL implementation (hmac_openssl.c), the logic is very similar to cryptohash_openssl.c, where the error context comes from OpenSSL if one of its internal routines failed, with different error codes if something internal to hmac_openssl.c failed or was incorrect. Any in-core code paths that use the centralized HMAC interface are related to SCRAM, for errors that are unlikely going to happen, with only SHA-256. It would be possible to see errors when computing some HMACs with MD5 for example and OpenSSL FIPS enabled, and this commit would help in reporting the correct errors but nothing in core uses that. So, at the end, no backpatch to v14 is done, at least for now. Errors in SCRAM related to the computation of the server key, stored key, etc. need to pass down the potential error context string across more layers of their respective call stacks for the frontend and the backend, so each surrounding routine is adapted for this purpose. Reviewed-by: Sergey Shinderuk Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Yd0N9tSAIIkFd+qi@paquier.xyz
2022-01-13 08:17:21 +01:00
pg_hmac_errno
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
pg_int64
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_local_to_utf_combined
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
pg_locale_t
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
pg_mb_radix_tree
Refactor MD5 implementations according to new cryptohash infrastructure This commit heavily reorganizes the MD5 implementations that exist in the tree in various aspects. First, MD5 is added to the list of options available in cryptohash.c and cryptohash_openssl.c. This means that if building with OpenSSL, EVP is used for MD5 instead of the fallback implementation that Postgres had for ages. With the recent refactoring work for cryptohash functions, this change is straight-forward. If not building with OpenSSL, a fallback implementation internal to src/common/ is used. Second, this reduces the number of MD5 implementations present in the tree from two to one, by moving the KAME implementation from pgcrypto to src/common/, and by removing the implementation that existed in src/common/. KAME was already structured with an init/update/final set of routines by pgcrypto (see original pgcrypto/md5.h) for compatibility with OpenSSL, so moving it to src/common/ has proved to be a straight-forward move, requiring no actual manipulation of the internals of each routine. Some benchmarking has not shown any performance gap between both implementations. Similarly to the fallback implementation used for SHA2, the fallback implementation of MD5 is moved to src/common/md5.c with an internal header called md5_int.h for the init, update and final routines. This gets then consumed by cryptohash.c. The original routines used for MD5-hashed passwords are moved to a separate file called md5_common.c, also in src/common/, aimed at being shared between all MD5 implementations as utility routines to keep compatibility with any code relying on them. Like the SHA2 changes, this commit had its round of tests on both Linux and Windows, across all versions of OpenSSL supported on HEAD, with and even without OpenSSL. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201106073434.GA4961@paquier.xyz
2020-12-10 03:59:10 +01:00
pg_md5_ctx
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_on_exit_callback
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
pg_prng_state
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_re_flags
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
pg_saslprep_rc
Introduce SHA1 implementations in the cryptohash infrastructure With this commit, SHA1 goes through the implementation provided by OpenSSL via EVP when building the backend with it, and uses as fallback implementation KAME which was located in pgcrypto and already shaped for an integration with a set of init, update and final routines. Structures and routines have been renamed to make things consistent with the fallback implementations of MD5 and SHA2. uuid-ossp has used for ages a shortcut with pgcrypto to fetch a copy of SHA1 if needed. This was built depending on the build options within ./configure, so this cleans up some code and removes the build dependency between pgcrypto and uuid-ossp. Note that this will help with the refactoring of HMAC, as pgcrypto offers the option to use MD5, SHA1 or SHA2, so only the second option was missing to make that possible. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/X9HXKTgrvJvYO7Oh@paquier.xyz
2021-01-23 03:33:04 +01:00
pg_sha1_ctx
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
pg_sha224_ctx
pg_sha256_ctx
pg_sha384_ctx
pg_sha512_ctx
Introduce xid8-based functions to replace txid_XXX. The txid_XXX family of fmgr functions exposes 64 bit transaction IDs to users as int8. Now that we have an SQL type xid8 for FullTransactionId, define a new set of functions including pg_current_xact_id() and pg_current_snapshot() based on that. Keep the old functions around too, for now. It's a bit sneaky to use the same C functions for both, but since the binary representation is identical except for the signedness of the type, and since older functions are the ones using the wrong signedness, and since we'll presumably drop the older ones after a reasonable period of time, it seems reasonable to switch to FullTransactionId internally and share the code for both. Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com> Reviewed-by: Takao Fujii <btfujiitkp@oss.nttdata.com> Reviewed-by: Yoshikazu Imai <imai.yoshikazu@fujitsu.com> Reviewed-by: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190725000636.666m5mad25wfbrri%40alap3.anarazel.de
2020-04-07 01:33:56 +02:00
pg_snapshot
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
pg_stack_base_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_time_t
pgbench: Improve time logic. Instead of instr_time (struct timespec) and the INSTR_XXX macros, introduce pg_time_usec_t and use integer arithmetic. Don't include the connection time in TPS unless using -C mode, but report it separately. Author: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200227180100.zyvjwzcpiokfsqm2%40alap3.anarazel.de
2021-03-10 04:09:50 +01:00
pg_time_usec_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_tz
pg_tz_cache
pg_tzenum
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
pg_unicode_decompinfo
pg_unicode_decomposition
Use perfect hash for NFC and NFKC Unicode Normalization quick check This makes the normalization quick check about 30% faster for NFC and 50% faster for NFKC than the binary search used previously. The hash lookup reuses the existing array of bit fields used for the binary search to get the quick check property and is generated as part of "make update-unicode" in src/common/unicode/. Author: John Naylor Reviewed-by: Mark Dilger, Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACPNZCt4fbJ0_bGrN5QPt34N4whv=mszM0LMVQdoa2rC9UMRXA@mail.gmail.com
2020-10-11 12:09:01 +02:00
pg_unicode_norminfo
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
pg_unicode_normprops
Use perfect hash for NFC and NFKC Unicode Normalization quick check This makes the normalization quick check about 30% faster for NFC and 50% faster for NFKC than the binary search used previously. The hash lookup reuses the existing array of bit fields used for the binary search to get the quick check property and is generated as part of "make update-unicode" in src/common/unicode/. Author: John Naylor Reviewed-by: Mark Dilger, Michael Paquier Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACPNZCt4fbJ0_bGrN5QPt34N4whv=mszM0LMVQdoa2rC9UMRXA@mail.gmail.com
2020-10-11 12:09:01 +02:00
pg_unicode_recompinfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_utf_to_local_combined
pg_uuid_t
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
pg_wc_probefunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pg_wchar
pg_wchar_tbl
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
pgp_armor_headers_state
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pgsocket
pgsql_thing_t
pgssEntry
pg_stat_statements: Track number of times pgss entries were deallocated. If more distinct statements than pg_stat_statements.max are observed, pg_stat_statements entries about the least-executed statements are deallocated. This commit enables us to track the total number of times those entries were deallocated. That number can be viewed in the pg_stat_statements_info view that this commit adds. It's useful when tuning pg_stat_statements.max parameter. If it's high, i.e., the entries are deallocated very frequently, which might cause the performance regression and we can increase pg_stat_statements.max to avoid those frequent deallocations. The pg_stat_statements_info view is intended to display the statistics of pg_stat_statements module itself. Currently it has only one column "dealloc" indicating the number of times entries were deallocated. But an upcoming patch will add other columns (for example, the time at which pg_stat_statements statistics were last reset) into the view. Author: Katsuragi Yuta, Yuki Seino Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0d9f1107772cf5c3f954e985464c7298@oss.nttdata.com
2020-11-26 13:18:05 +01:00
pgssGlobalStats
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pgssHashKey
pgssSharedState
Allow pg_stat_statements to track planning statistics. This commit makes pg_stat_statements support new GUC pg_stat_statements.track_planning. If this option is enabled, pg_stat_statements tracks the planning statistics of the statements, e.g., the number of times the statement was planned, the total time spent planning the statement, etc. This feature is useful to check the statements that it takes a long time to plan. Previously since pg_stat_statements tracked only the execution statistics, we could not use that for the purpose. The planning and execution statistics are stored at the end of each phase separately. So there are not always one-to-one relationship between them. For example, if the statement is successfully planned but fails in the execution phase, only its planning statistics are stored. This may cause the users to be able to see different pg_stat_statements results from the previous version. To avoid this, pg_stat_statements.track_planning needs to be disabled. This commit bumps the version of pg_stat_statements to 1.8 since it changes the definition of pg_stat_statements function. Author: Julien Rouhaud, Pascal Legrand, Thomas Munro, Fujii Masao Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov, Tomas Vondra, Yoshikazu Imai, Haribabu Kommi, Tom Lane Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwFx_=DO-Gu-MfPW3VQ4qC7TfVdH2zHmvZfrGv6fQ3D-Tw@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=0e59Y_6Q_YXYCTHZkqOc6H2pJ54C_Xe=VFu50Aqqp_sA@mail.gmail.com Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DB6PR0301MB21352F6210E3B11934B0DCC790B00@DB6PR0301MB2135.eurprd03.prod.outlook.com
2020-04-02 04:20:19 +02:00
pgssStoreKind
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
pgssVersion
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
pgstat_entry_ref_hash_hash
pgstat_entry_ref_hash_iterator
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pgstat_page
pgstat: store statistics in shared memory. Previously the statistics collector received statistics updates via UDP and shared statistics data by writing them out to temporary files regularly. These files can reach tens of megabytes and are written out up to twice a second. This has repeatedly prevented us from adding additional useful statistics. Now statistics are stored in shared memory. Statistics for variable-numbered objects are stored in a dshash hashtable (backed by dynamic shared memory). Fixed-numbered stats are stored in plain shared memory. The header for pgstat.c contains an overview of the architecture. The stats collector is not needed anymore, remove it. By utilizing the transactional statistics drop infrastructure introduced in a prior commit statistics entries cannot "leak" anymore. Previously leaked statistics were dropped by pgstat_vacuum_stat(), called from [auto-]vacuum. On systems with many small relations pgstat_vacuum_stat() could be quite expensive. Now that replicas drop statistics entries for dropped objects, it is not necessary anymore to reset stats when starting from a cleanly shut down replica. Subsequent commits will perform some further code cleanup, adapt docs and add tests. Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID. Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> Reviewed-By: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru> (in a much earlier version) Reviewed-By: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at> (in a much earlier version) Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220308205351.2xcn6k4x5yivcxyd@alap3.anarazel.de Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210319235115.y3wz7hpnnrshdyv6@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 06:29:46 +02:00
pgstat_snapshot_hash
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pgstattuple_type
pgthreadlock_t
pid_t
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
pivot_field
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
planner_hook_type
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
plperl_array_info
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
plperl_call_data
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
plperl_interp_desc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
plperl_proc_desc
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
plperl_proc_key
plperl_proc_ptr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
plperl_query_desc
plperl_query_entry
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
plpgsql_CastHashEntry
plpgsql_CastHashKey
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
plpgsql_HashEnt
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
pltcl_call_state
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
pltcl_interp_desc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pltcl_proc_desc
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
pltcl_proc_key
pltcl_proc_ptr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pltcl_query_desc
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
pointer
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v13. Includes some manual cleanup of places that pgindent messed up, most of which weren't per project style anyway. Notably, it seems some people didn't absorb the style rules of commit c9d297751, because there were a bunch of new occurrences of function calls with a newline just after the left paren, all with faulty expectations about how the rest of the call would get indented.
2020-05-14 19:06:38 +02:00
polymorphic_actuals
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
pos_trgm
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
post_parse_analyze_hook_type
Again update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run This time, use the buildfarm-supplied contents for this file, instead of trying to update it by eyeballing the pgindent output. Per discussion with Tom and Bruce.
2016-05-02 15:23:55 +02:00
postprocess_result_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pqbool
pqsigfunc
printQueryOpt
printTableContent
printTableFooter
printTableOpt
printTextFormat
printTextLineFormat
printTextLineWrap
printTextRule
Add xheader_width pset option to psql The setting controls tha maximum length of the header line in expanded format output. Possible settings are full, column, page, or an integer. the default is full, the current behaviour, and in this case the header line is the length of the widest line of output. column causes the header to be truncated to the width of the first column, page causes it to be truncated to the width of the terminal page, and an integer causes it to be truncated to that value. If the full value is less than the page or integer value no truncation occurs. If given without an argument this option prints its current setting. Platon Pronko, somewhat modified by me. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f03d38a3-db96-a56e-d1bc-dbbc80bbde4d@gmail.com
2022-07-25 20:24:50 +02:00
printXheaderWidthType
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
printfunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
priv_map
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
process_file_callback_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
process_sublinks_context
Once again allow LWLocks to be used within DSM segments. Prior to commit 7882c3b0b95640e361f1533fe0f2d02e4e5d8610, it was possible to use LWLocks within DSM segments, but that commit broke this use case by switching from a doubly linked list to a circular linked list. Switch back, using a new bit of general infrastructure for maintaining lists of PGPROCs. Thomas Munro, reviewed by me.
2016-08-16 00:09:55 +02:00
proclist_head
proclist_mutable_iter
proclist_node
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
promptStatus_t
Add missing pthread_barrier_t. Supply a simple implementation of the missing pthread_barrier_t type and functions, for macOS. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200227180100.zyvjwzcpiokfsqm2%40alap3.anarazel.de
2021-03-10 03:40:17 +01:00
pthread_barrier_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pthread_cond_t
pthread_key_t
pthread_mutex_t
pthread_once_t
pthread_t
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
ptrdiff_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pull_var_clause_context
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
pull_varattnos_context
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
pull_varnos_context
pull_vars_context
pullup_replace_vars_context
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
pushdown_safety_info
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
qc_hash_func
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
qsort_arg_comparator
qsort_comparator
query_pathkeys_callback
radius_attribute
radius_packet
rangeTableEntry_used_context
rank_context
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
rbt_allocfunc
rbt_combiner
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
rbt_comparator
rbt_freefunc
reduce_outer_joins_state
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
reference
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
regex_arc_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
regex_t
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
regexp
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
regexp_matches_ctx
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
registered_buffer
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
regmatch_t
regoff_t
regproc
relopt_bool
Add new typedefs introduced in 773df883e8 to typedefs.list
2020-03-19 19:40:45 +01:00
relopt_enum
relopt_enum_elt_def
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
relopt_gen
relopt_int
relopt_kind
relopt_parse_elt
relopt_real
relopt_string
relopt_type
relopt_value
Implement operator class parameters PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN, SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to index the particular dataset. This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but unused for index attributes. In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so fn_expr is unused for them. This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops, gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular json parts. Catversion is bumped. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
2020-03-30 18:17:11 +02:00
relopts_validator
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
remoteConn
remoteConnHashEnt
remoteDep
rendezvousHashEntry
replace_rte_variables_callback
replace_rte_variables_context
Final pgindent run with pg_bsd_indent version 2.1. This is just to provide a clean basis for comparison of the results of the new version. I did fix a typo that crept into 242dfcbaf. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200114221814.GA19630@alvherre.pgsql
2020-05-16 17:49:14 +02:00
ret_type
pg_rewind: Refactor the abstraction to fetch from local/libpq source. This makes the abstraction of a "source" server more clear, by introducing a common abstract class, borrowing the object-oriented programming term, that represents all the operations that can be done on the source server. There are two implementations of it, one for fetching via libpq, and another to fetch from a local directory. This adds some code, but makes it easier to understand what's going on. The copy_executeFileMap() and libpq_executeFileMap() functions contained basically the same logic, just calling different functions to fetch the source files. Refactor so that the common logic is in one place, in a new function called perform_rewind(). Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Soumyadeep Chakraborty Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/0c5b3783-af52-3ee5-f8fa-6e794061f70d%40iki.fi
2020-11-04 10:21:18 +01:00
rewind_source
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
rewrite_event
Allow specifying row filters for logical replication of tables. This feature adds row filtering for publication tables. When a publication is defined or modified, an optional WHERE clause can be specified. Rows that don't satisfy this WHERE clause will be filtered out. This allows a set of tables to be partially replicated. The row filter is per table. A new row filter can be added simply by specifying a WHERE clause after the table name. The WHERE clause must be enclosed by parentheses. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes UPDATE and/or DELETE operations must contain only columns that are covered by REPLICA IDENTITY. The row filter WHERE clause for a table added to a publication that publishes INSERT can use any column. If the row filter evaluates to NULL, it is regarded as "false". The WHERE clause only allows simple expressions that don't have user-defined functions, user-defined operators, user-defined types, user-defined collations, non-immutable built-in functions, or references to system columns. These restrictions could be addressed in the future. If you choose to do the initial table synchronization, only data that satisfies the row filters is copied to the subscriber. If the subscription has several publications in which a table has been published with different WHERE clauses, rows that satisfy ANY of the expressions will be copied. If a subscriber is a pre-15 version, the initial table synchronization won't use row filters even if they are defined in the publisher. The row filters are applied before publishing the changes. If the subscription has several publications in which the same table has been published with different filters (for the same publish operation), those expressions get OR'ed together so that rows satisfying any of the expressions will be replicated. This means all the other filters become redundant if (a) one of the publications have no filter at all, (b) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES, (c) one of the publications was created using FOR ALL TABLES IN SCHEMA and the table belongs to that same schema. If your publication contains a partitioned table, the publication parameter publish_via_partition_root determines if it uses the partition's row filter (if the parameter is false, the default) or the root partitioned table's row filter. Psql commands \dRp+ and \d <table-name> will display any row filters. Author: Hou Zhijie, Euler Taveira, Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian Reviewed-by: Greg Nancarrow, Haiying Tang, Amit Kapila, Tomas Vondra, Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Alvaro Herrera, Andres Freund, Wei Wang Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAHE3wggb715X%2BmK_DitLXF25B%3DjE6xyNCH4YOwM860JR7HarGQ%40mail.gmail.com
2022-02-22 03:24:12 +01:00
rf_context
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
rm_detail_t
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
role_auth_extra
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
row_security_policy_hook_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
rsv_callback
Initial pgindent and pgperltidy run for v14. Also "make reformat-dat-files". The only change worthy of note is that pgindent messed up the formatting of launcher.c's struct LogicalRepWorkerId, which led me to notice that that struct wasn't used at all anymore, so I just took it out.
2021-05-12 19:14:10 +02:00
saophash_hash
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
save_buffer
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
scram_state
scram_state_enum
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
sem_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
sequence_magic
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
set_join_pathlist_hook_type
set_rel_pathlist_hook_type
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
shm_mq
shm_mq_handle
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
shm_mq_iovec
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
shm_mq_result
shm_toc
shm_toc_entry
shm_toc_estimator
Add a new shmem_request_hook hook. Currently, preloaded libraries are expected to request additional shared memory and LWLocks in _PG_init(). However, it is not unusal for such requests to depend on MaxBackends, which won't be initialized at that time. Such requests could also depend on GUCs that other modules might change. This introduces a new hook where modules can safely use MaxBackends and GUCs to request additional shared memory and LWLocks. Furthermore, this change restricts requests for shared memory and LWLocks to this hook. Previously, libraries could make requests until the size of the main shared memory segment was calculated. Unlike before, we no longer silently ignore requests received at invalid times. Instead, we FATAL if someone tries to request additional shared memory or LWLocks outside of the hook. Nathan Bossart and Julien Rouhaud Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220412210112.GA2065815%40nathanxps13 Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Yn2jE/lmDhKtkUdr@paquier.xyz
2022-05-13 15:31:06 +02:00
shmem_request_hook_type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
shmem_startup_hook_type
sig_atomic_t
sigjmp_buf
signedbitmapword
sigset_t
size_t
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
slist_head
slist_iter
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
slist_mutable_iter
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
slist_node
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
slock_t
socket_set
Pre-beta mechanical code beautification. Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files. I manually fixed a couple of comments that pgindent uglified.
2022-05-12 21:17:30 +02:00
socklen_t
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
spgBulkDeleteState
spgChooseIn
spgChooseOut
spgChooseResultType
spgConfigIn
spgConfigOut
spgInnerConsistentIn
spgInnerConsistentOut
spgLeafConsistentIn
spgLeafConsistentOut
spgNodePtr
spgPickSplitIn
spgPickSplitOut
spgVacPendingItem
spgxlogAddLeaf
spgxlogAddNode
spgxlogMoveLeafs
spgxlogPickSplit
spgxlogSplitTuple
spgxlogState
spgxlogVacuumLeaf
spgxlogVacuumRedirect
spgxlogVacuumRoot
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
split_pathtarget_context
Update typedefs list
2018-06-30 18:07:27 +02:00
split_pathtarget_item
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
sql_error_callback_arg
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
sqlparseInfo
sqlparseState
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ss_lru_item_t
ss_scan_location_t
ss_scan_locations_t
ssize_t
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
standard_qp_extra
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
stemmer_module
stmtCacheEntry
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
storeInfo
storeRes_func
stream_stop_callback
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
string
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
substitute_actual_parameters_context
substitute_actual_srf_parameters_context
substitute_phv_relids_context
symbol
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
tablespaceinfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
teSection
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
temp_tablespaces_extra
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
test_re_flags
test_regex_ctx
test_shm_mq_header
Initial pgindent run for v12. This is still using the 2.0 version of pg_bsd_indent. I thought it would be good to commit this separately, so as to document the differences between 2.0 and 2.1 behavior. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16296.1558103386@sss.pgh.pa.us
2019-05-22 18:55:34 +02:00
test_spec
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
test_start_function
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
text
timeKEY
time_t
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
timeout_handler_proc
timeout_params
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
timerCA
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
tlist_vinfo
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
toast_compress_header
Add error context callback when tokenizing authentication files The parsing of the authentication files for HBA and ident entries happens in two phases: - Tokenization of the files, creating a list of TokenizedAuthLines. - Validation of the HBA and ident entries, building a set of HbaLines or IdentLines. The second phase doing the validation provides already some error context about the configuration file and the line where a problem happens, but there is no such information in the first phase when tokenizing the files. This commit adds an ErrorContextCallback in tokenize_auth_file(), with a context made of the line number and the configuration file name involved in a problem. This is useful for files included in an HBA file for user and database lists, and it will become much more handy to track problems for files included via a potential @include[_dir,_if_exists]. The error context is registered so as the full chain of events is reported when using cascaded inclusions when for example tokenize_auth_file() recurses over itself on new files, displaying one context line for each file gone through when tokenizing things. Author: Michael Paquier Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y2xUBJ+S+Z0zbxRW@paquier.xyz
2022-11-14 03:58:10 +01:00
tokenize_error_callback_arg
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
transferMode
Update pgindent install instructions and update typedef list.
2012-06-10 21:15:31 +02:00
transfer_thread_arg
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
trgm
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
trgm_mb_char
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
trivalue
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
tsKEY
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
ts_parserstate
ts_tokenizer
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
ts_tokentype
tsearch_readline_state
Use more efficient hashtable for execGrouping.c to speed up hash aggregation. The more efficient hashtable speeds up hash-aggregations with more than a few hundred groups significantly. Improvements of over 120% have been measured. Due to the the different hash table queries that not fully determined (e.g. GROUP BY without ORDER BY) may change their result order. The conversion is largely straight-forward, except that, due to the static element types of simplehash.h type hashes, the additional data some users store in elements (e.g. the per-group working data for hash aggregaters) is now stored in TupleHashEntryData->additional. The meaning of BuildTupleHashTable's entrysize (renamed to additionalsize) has been changed to only be about the additionally stored size. That size is only used for the initial sizing of the hash-table. Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra Discussion: <20160727004333.r3e2k2y6fvk2ntup@alap3.anarazel.de>
2016-10-15 02:22:51 +02:00
tuplehash_hash
tuplehash_iterator
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
type
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
tzEntry
u_char
u_int
uchr
uid_t
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
uint128
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
uint16
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
uint16_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
uint32
uint32_t
uint64
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
uint64_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
uint8
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
uint8_t
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
uintptr_t
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
unicodeStyleBorderFormat
unicodeStyleColumnFormat
unicodeStyleFormat
unicodeStyleRowFormat
unicode_linestyle
unit_conversion
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
unlogged_relation_entry
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
utf_local_conversion_func
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
uuidKEY
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
uuid_rc_t
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
uuid_sortsupport_state
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
uuid_t
va_list
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
vacuumingOptions
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
validate_string_relopt
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
varatt_expanded
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
varattrib_1b
varattrib_1b_e
varattrib_4b
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
vbits
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
verifier_context
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
walrcv_check_conninfo_fn
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
walrcv_connect_fn
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
walrcv_create_slot_fn
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
walrcv_disconnect_fn
walrcv_endstreaming_fn
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
walrcv_exec_fn
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
walrcv_get_backend_pid_fn
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
walrcv_get_conninfo_fn
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
walrcv_get_senderinfo_fn
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
walrcv_identify_system_fn
walrcv_readtimelinehistoryfile_fn
walrcv_receive_fn
walrcv_send_fn
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
walrcv_server_version_fn
Update typedefs.list So developers can more easily run pgindent locally
2016-12-13 16:51:32 +01:00
walrcv_startstreaming_fn
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
wchar2mb_with_len_converter
wchar_t
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
win32_deadchild_waitinfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
wint_t
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
worker_state
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
worktable
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
wrap
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
xl_brin_createidx
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
xl_brin_desummarize
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
xl_brin_insert
xl_brin_revmap_extend
xl_brin_samepage_update
xl_brin_update
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_btree_dedup
xl_btree_delete
xl_btree_insert
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
xl_btree_mark_page_halfdead
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_btree_metadata
xl_btree_newroot
xl_btree_reuse_page
xl_btree_split
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
xl_btree_unlink_page
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
xl_btree_update
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_btree_vacuum
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
xl_clog_truncate
xl_commit_ts_truncate
Add new block-by-block strategy for CREATE DATABASE. Because this strategy logs changes on a block-by-block basis, it avoids the need to checkpoint before and after the operation. However, because it logs each changed block individually, it might generate a lot of extra write-ahead logging if the template database is large. Therefore, the older strategy remains available via a new STRATEGY parameter to CREATE DATABASE, and a corresponding --strategy option to createdb. Somewhat controversially, this patch assembles the list of relations to be copied to the new database by reading the pg_class relation of the template database. Cross-database access like this isn't normally possible, but it can be made to work here because there can't be any connections to the database being copied, nor can it contain any in-doubt transactions. Even so, we have to use lower-level interfaces than normal, since the table scan and relcache interfaces will not work for a database to which we're not connected. The advantage of this approach is that we do not need to rely on the filesystem to determine what ought to be copied, but instead on PostgreSQL's own knowledge of the database structure. This avoids, for example, copying stray files that happen to be located in the source database directory. Dilip Kumar, with a fairly large number of cosmetic changes by me. Reviewed and tested by Ashutosh Sharma, Andres Freund, John Naylor, Greg Nancarrow, Neha Sharma. Additional feedback from Bruce Momjian, Heikki Linnakangas, Julien Rouhaud, Adam Brusselback, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Álvaro Herrera, and others. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYtcdxBjLh31DLxUXHxFVMPGzrU5_T=CYCvRyFHywSBUQ@mail.gmail.com
2022-03-29 17:31:43 +02:00
xl_dbase_create_file_copy_rec
xl_dbase_create_wal_log_rec
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_dbase_drop_rec
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
xl_end_of_recovery
Update typedefs list in prep. for post-PG10 beta1 pgindent run
2017-05-17 21:52:16 +02:00
xl_hash_add_ovfl_page
xl_hash_delete
xl_hash_init_bitmap_page
xl_hash_init_meta_page
xl_hash_insert
xl_hash_move_page_contents
xl_hash_split_allocate_page
xl_hash_split_complete
xl_hash_squeeze_page
xl_hash_update_meta_page
xl_hash_vacuum_one_page
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
xl_heap_confirm
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_heap_delete
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
xl_heap_freeze_page
Run pgindent on heapam.c An upcoming patch by Melanie Plageman does some refactoring work in this area. Run pgindent on that file now before making any changes so that it's easier to maintain/evolve each of the individual patches doing the refactor work. Additionally, add a few new required typedefs to the list to make it easier to do future pgindent runs on this file during the refactor work. Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_YSOnhKsDyFcqJsKtBSrd32DP-jjXmv7hL0BPD-z0TGXQ@mail.gmail.com
2023-01-23 11:08:38 +01:00
xl_heap_freeze_plan
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
xl_heap_freeze_tuple
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_heap_header
xl_heap_inplace
xl_heap_insert
xl_heap_lock
xl_heap_lock_updated
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
xl_heap_multi_insert
Add new wal_level, logical, sufficient for logical decoding. When wal_level=logical, we'll log columns from the old tuple as configured by the REPLICA IDENTITY facility added in commit 07cacba983ef79be4a84fcd0e0ca3b5fcb85dd65. This makes it possible a properly-configured logical replication solution to correctly follow table updates even if they change the chosen key columns, or, with REPLICA IDENTITY FULL, even if the table has no key at all. Note that updates which do not modify the replica identity column won't log anything extra, making the choice of a good key (i.e. one that will rarely be changed) important to performance when wal_level=logical is configured. Each insert, update, or delete to a catalog table will also log the CMIN and/or CMAX values of stamped by the current transaction. This is necessary because logical decoding will require access to historical snapshots of the catalog in order to decode some data types, and the CMIN/CMAX values that we may need in order to judge row visibility may have been overwritten by the time we need them. Andres Freund, reviewed in various versions by myself, Heikki Linnakangas, KONDO Mitsumasa, and many others.
2013-12-11 00:33:45 +01:00
xl_heap_new_cid
Remove tupgone special case from vacuumlazy.c. Retry the call to heap_prune_page() in rare cases where there is disagreement between the heap_prune_page() call and the call to HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum() that immediately follows. Disagreement is possible when a concurrently-aborted transaction makes a tuple DEAD during the tiny window between each step. This was the only case where a tuple considered DEAD by VACUUM still had storage following pruning. VACUUM's definition of dead tuples is now uniformly simple and unambiguous: dead tuples from each page are always LP_DEAD line pointers that were encountered just after we performed pruning (and just before we considered freezing remaining items with tuple storage). Eliminating the tupgone=true special case enables INDEX_CLEANUP=off style skipping of index vacuuming that takes place based on flexible, dynamic criteria. The INDEX_CLEANUP=off case had to know about skipping indexes up-front before now, due to a subtle interaction with the special case (see commit dd695979) -- this was a special case unto itself. Now there are no special cases. And so now it won't matter when or how we decide to skip index vacuuming: it won't affect how pruning behaves, and it won't be affected by any of the implementation details of pruning or freezing. Also remove XLOG_HEAP2_CLEANUP_INFO records. These are no longer necessary because we now rely entirely on heap pruning taking care of recovery conflicts. There is no longer any need to generate recovery conflicts for DEAD tuples that pruning just missed. This also means that heap vacuuming now uses exactly the same strategy for recovery conflicts as index vacuuming always has: REDO routines never need to process a latestRemovedXid from the WAL record, since earlier REDO of the WAL record from pruning is sufficient in all cases. The generic XLOG_HEAP2_CLEAN record type is now split into two new record types to reflect this new division (these are called XLOG_HEAP2_PRUNE and XLOG_HEAP2_VACUUM). Also stop acquiring a super-exclusive lock for heap pages when they're vacuumed during VACUUM's second heap pass. A regular exclusive lock is enough. This is correct because heap page vacuuming is now strictly a matter of setting the LP_DEAD line pointers to LP_UNUSED. No other backend can have a pointer to a tuple located in a pinned buffer that can be invalidated by a concurrent heap page vacuum operation. Heap vacuuming can now be thought of as conceptually similar to index vacuuming and conceptually dissimilar to heap pruning. Heap pruning now has sole responsibility for anything involving the logical contents of the database (e.g., managing transaction status information, recovery conflicts, considering what to do with HOT chains). Index vacuuming and heap vacuuming are now only concerned with recycling garbage items from physical data structures that back the logical database. Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC due to pruning and heap page vacuum WAL record changes. Credit for the idea of retrying pruning a page to avoid the tupgone case goes to Andres Freund. Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznneCXTzuFmcwx_EyRQgfsfJAAsu+CsqRFmFXCAar=nJw@mail.gmail.com
2021-04-06 17:49:22 +02:00
xl_heap_prune
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
xl_heap_rewrite_mapping
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
xl_heap_truncate
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_heap_update
Remove tupgone special case from vacuumlazy.c. Retry the call to heap_prune_page() in rare cases where there is disagreement between the heap_prune_page() call and the call to HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum() that immediately follows. Disagreement is possible when a concurrently-aborted transaction makes a tuple DEAD during the tiny window between each step. This was the only case where a tuple considered DEAD by VACUUM still had storage following pruning. VACUUM's definition of dead tuples is now uniformly simple and unambiguous: dead tuples from each page are always LP_DEAD line pointers that were encountered just after we performed pruning (and just before we considered freezing remaining items with tuple storage). Eliminating the tupgone=true special case enables INDEX_CLEANUP=off style skipping of index vacuuming that takes place based on flexible, dynamic criteria. The INDEX_CLEANUP=off case had to know about skipping indexes up-front before now, due to a subtle interaction with the special case (see commit dd695979) -- this was a special case unto itself. Now there are no special cases. And so now it won't matter when or how we decide to skip index vacuuming: it won't affect how pruning behaves, and it won't be affected by any of the implementation details of pruning or freezing. Also remove XLOG_HEAP2_CLEANUP_INFO records. These are no longer necessary because we now rely entirely on heap pruning taking care of recovery conflicts. There is no longer any need to generate recovery conflicts for DEAD tuples that pruning just missed. This also means that heap vacuuming now uses exactly the same strategy for recovery conflicts as index vacuuming always has: REDO routines never need to process a latestRemovedXid from the WAL record, since earlier REDO of the WAL record from pruning is sufficient in all cases. The generic XLOG_HEAP2_CLEAN record type is now split into two new record types to reflect this new division (these are called XLOG_HEAP2_PRUNE and XLOG_HEAP2_VACUUM). Also stop acquiring a super-exclusive lock for heap pages when they're vacuumed during VACUUM's second heap pass. A regular exclusive lock is enough. This is correct because heap page vacuuming is now strictly a matter of setting the LP_DEAD line pointers to LP_UNUSED. No other backend can have a pointer to a tuple located in a pinned buffer that can be invalidated by a concurrent heap page vacuum operation. Heap vacuuming can now be thought of as conceptually similar to index vacuuming and conceptually dissimilar to heap pruning. Heap pruning now has sole responsibility for anything involving the logical contents of the database (e.g., managing transaction status information, recovery conflicts, considering what to do with HOT chains). Index vacuuming and heap vacuuming are now only concerned with recycling garbage items from physical data structures that back the logical database. Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC due to pruning and heap page vacuum WAL record changes. Credit for the idea of retrying pruning a page to avoid the tupgone case goes to Andres Freund. Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie> Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznneCXTzuFmcwx_EyRQgfsfJAAsu+CsqRFmFXCAar=nJw@mail.gmail.com
2021-04-06 17:49:22 +02:00
xl_heap_vacuum
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
xl_heap_visible
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_invalid_page
xl_invalid_page_key
Update typedefs.list file in preparation for pgindent run In addition to adding new typedefs, I also re-sorted the file so that various entries add piecemeal, mostly or entirely by me, were alphabetized the same way as other entries in the file.
2016-04-27 17:47:28 +02:00
xl_invalidations
xl_logical_message
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
xl_multi_insert_tuple
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_multixact_create
Rework the way multixact truncations work. The fact that multixact truncations are not WAL logged has caused a fair share of problems. Amongst others it requires to do computations during recovery while the database is not in a consistent state, delaying truncations till checkpoints, and handling members being truncated, but offset not. We tried to put bandaids on lots of these issues over the last years, but it seems time to change course. Thus this patch introduces WAL logging for multixact truncations. This allows: 1) to perform the truncation directly during VACUUM, instead of delaying it to the checkpoint. 2) to avoid looking at the offsets SLRU for truncation during recovery, we can just use the master's values. 3) simplify a fair amount of logic to keep in memory limits straight, this has gotten much easier During the course of fixing this a bunch of additional bugs had to be fixed: 1) Data was not purged from memory the member's SLRU before deleting segments. This happened to be hard or impossible to hit due to the interlock between checkpoints and truncation. 2) find_multixact_start() relied on SimpleLruDoesPhysicalPageExist - but that doesn't work for offsets that haven't yet been flushed to disk. Add code to flush the SLRUs to fix. Not pretty, but it feels slightly safer to only make decisions based on actual on-disk state. 3) find_multixact_start() could be called concurrently with a truncation and thus fail. Via SetOffsetVacuumLimit() that could lead to a round of emergency vacuuming. The problem remains in pg_get_multixact_members(), but that's quite harmless. For now this is going to only get applied to 9.5+, leaving the issues in the older branches in place. It is quite possible that we need to backpatch at a later point though. For the case this gets backpatched we need to handle that an updated standby may be replaying WAL from a not-yet upgraded primary. We have to recognize that situation and use "old style" truncation (i.e. looking at the SLRUs) during WAL replay. In contrast to before, this now happens in the startup process, when replaying a checkpoint record, instead of the checkpointer. Doing truncation in the restartpoint is incorrect, they can happen much later than the original checkpoint, thereby leading to wraparound. To avoid "multixact_redo: unknown op code 48" errors standbys would have to be upgraded before primaries. A later patch will bump the WAL page magic, and remove the legacy truncation codepaths. Legacy truncation support is just included to make a possible future backpatch easier. Discussion: 20150621192409.GA4797@alap3.anarazel.de Reviewed-By: Robert Haas, Alvaro Herrera, Thomas Munro Backpatch: 9.5 for now
2015-09-26 19:04:25 +02:00
xl_multixact_truncate
Fix WAL replay in presence of an incomplete record Physical replication always ships WAL segment files to replicas once they are complete. This is a problem if one WAL record is split across a segment boundary and the primary server crashes before writing down the segment with the next portion of the WAL record: WAL writing after crash recovery would happily resume at the point where the broken record started, overwriting that record ... but any standby or backup may have already received a copy of that segment, and they are not rewinding. This causes standbys to stop following the primary after the latter crashes: LOG: invalid contrecord length 7262 at A8/D9FFFBC8 because the standby is still trying to read the continuation record (contrecord) for the original long WAL record, but it is not there and it will never be. A workaround is to stop the replica, delete the WAL file, and restart it -- at which point a fresh copy is brought over from the primary. But that's pretty labor intensive, and I bet many users would just give up and re-clone the standby instead. A fix for this problem was already attempted in commit 515e3d84a0b5, but it only addressed the case for the scenario of WAL archiving, so streaming replication would still be a problem (as well as other things such as taking a filesystem-level backup while the server is down after having crashed), and it had performance scalability problems too; so it had to be reverted. This commit fixes the problem using an approach suggested by Andres Freund, whereby the initial portion(s) of the split-up WAL record are kept, and a special type of WAL record is written where the contrecord was lost, so that WAL replay in the replica knows to skip the broken parts. With this approach, we can continue to stream/archive segment files as soon as they are complete, and replay of the broken records will proceed across the crash point without a hitch. Because a new type of WAL record is added, users should be careful to upgrade standbys first, primaries later. Otherwise they risk the standby being unable to start if the primary happens to write such a record. A new TAP test that exercises this is added, but the portability of it is yet to be seen. This has been wrong since the introduction of physical replication, so backpatch all the way back. In stable branches, keep the new XLogReaderState members at the end of the struct, to avoid an ABI break. Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org> Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <bossartn@amazon.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202108232252.dh7uxf6oxwcy@alvherre.pgsql
2021-09-29 16:21:51 +02:00
xl_overwrite_contrecord
Update pgindent testing instructions.
2010-07-06 21:18:19 +02:00
xl_parameter_change
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_relmap_update
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
xl_replorigin_drop
xl_replorigin_set
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
xl_restore_point
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xl_running_xacts
xl_seq_rec
xl_smgr_create
xl_smgr_truncate
xl_standby_lock
xl_standby_locks
xl_tblspc_create_rec
xl_tblspc_drop_rec
xl_xact_abort
xl_xact_assignment
xl_xact_commit
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
xl_xact_dbinfo
xl_xact_invals
xl_xact_origin
xl_xact_parsed_abort
xl_xact_parsed_commit
Preliminary work for pgindent run. Update typedefs.list from current buildfarm results. Adjust pgindent's typedef blacklist to block some more unfortunate typedef names that have snuck in since last time. Manually tweak a few places where I didn't like the initial results of pgindent'ing.
2018-04-26 20:45:04 +02:00
xl_xact_parsed_prepare
xl_xact_prepare
Change internal RelFileNode references to RelFileNumber or RelFileLocator. We have been using the term RelFileNode to refer to either (1) the integer that is used to name the sequence of files for a certain relation within the directory set aside for that tablespace/database combination; or (2) that value plus the OIDs of the tablespace and database; or occasionally (3) the whole series of files created for a relation based on those values. Using the same name for more than one thing is confusing. Replace RelFileNode with RelFileNumber when we're talking about just the single number, i.e. (1) from above, and with RelFileLocator when we're talking about all the things that are needed to locate a relation's files on disk, i.e. (2) from above. In the places where we refer to (3) as a relfilenode, instead refer to "relation storage". Since there is a ton of SQL code in the world that knows about pg_class.relfilenode, don't change the name of that column, or of other SQL-facing things that derive their name from it. On the other hand, do adjust closely-related internal terminology. For example, the structure member names dbNode and spcNode appear to be derived from the fact that the structure itself was called RelFileNode, so change those to dbOid and spcOid. Likewise, various variables with names like rnode and relnode get renamed appropriately, according to how they're being used in context. Hopefully, this is clearer than before. It is also preparation for future patches that intend to widen the relfilenumber fields from its current width of 32 bits. Variables that store a relfilenumber are now declared as type RelFileNumber rather than type Oid; right now, these are the same, but that can now more easily be changed. Dilip Kumar, per an idea from me. Reviewed also by Andres Freund. I fixed some whitespace issues, changed a couple of words in a comment, and made one other minor correction. Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoamOtXbVAQf9hWFzonUo6bhhjS6toZQd7HZ-pmojtAmag@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobp7+7kmi4gkq7Y+4AM9fTvL+O1oQ4-5gFTT+6Ng-dQ=g@mail.gmail.com Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-vTe79M8uDH1yprOU64MNFE+R3ODRuA+JWf27JbhY4hJw@mail.gmail.com
2022-07-06 17:39:09 +02:00
xl_xact_relfilelocators
pgstat: scaffolding for transactional stats creation / drop. One problematic part of the current statistics collector design is that there is no reliable way of getting rid of statistics entries. Because of that pgstat_vacuum_stat() (called by [auto-]vacuum) matches all stats for the current database with the catalog contents and tries to drop now-superfluous entries. That's quite expensive. What's worse, it doesn't work on physical replicas, despite physical replicas collection statistics entries. This commit introduces infrastructure to create / drop statistics entries transactionally, together with the underlying catalog objects (functions, relations, subscriptions). pgstat_xact.c maintains a list of stats entries created / dropped transactionally in the current transaction. To ensure the removal of statistics entries is durable dropped statistics entries are included in commit / abort (and prepare) records, which also ensures that stats entries are dropped on standbys. Statistics entries created separately from creating the underlying catalog object (e.g. when stats were previously lost due to an immediate restart) are *not* WAL logged. However that can only happen outside of the transaction creating the catalog object, so it does not lead to "leaked" statistics entries. For this to work, functions creating / dropping functions / relations / subscriptions need to call into pgstat. For subscriptions this was already done when dropping subscriptions, via pgstat_report_subscription_drop() (now renamed to pgstat_drop_subscription()). This commit does not actually drop stats yet, it just provides the infrastructure. It is however a largely independent piece of infrastructure, so committing it separately makes sense. Bumps XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC. Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> Reviewed-By: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com> Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220303021600.hs34ghqcw6zcokdh@alap3.anarazel.de
2022-04-07 03:22:22 +02:00
xl_xact_stats_item
xl_xact_stats_items
Update typedef file in preparation for pgindent run
2015-05-24 03:20:37 +02:00
xl_xact_subxacts
xl_xact_twophase
xl_xact_xinfo
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xmlBuffer
xmlBufferPtr
xmlChar
xmlDocPtr
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
xmlErrorPtr
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
xmlExternalEntityLoader
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
xmlGenericErrorFunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xmlNodePtr
xmlNodeSetPtr
xmlParserCtxtPtr
Rerun pgindent with updated typedef list.
2011-11-14 18:12:23 +01:00
xmlParserInputPtr
xmlStructuredErrorFunc
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xmlTextWriter
xmlTextWriterPtr
xmlXPathCompExprPtr
xmlXPathContextPtr
xmlXPathObjectPtr
xmltype
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
xpath_workspace
pgindent run for release 9.3 This is the first run of the Perl-based pgindent script. Also update pgindent instructions.
2013-05-29 22:58:43 +02:00
xsltSecurityPrefsPtr
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
xsltStylesheetPtr
xsltTransformContextPtr
Latest consolidated typedef list from buildfarm.
2011-04-09 05:11:37 +02:00
yy_parser
Add pgindent typedefs file to CVS.
2010-02-26 02:55:35 +01:00
yy_size_t
yyscan_t
z_stream
z_streamp
Update typedef list in preparation for pgindent run
2014-05-06 15:08:14 +02:00
zic_t